Premier Elite 24

Installation Manual
Premier Elite 24/24-W/48/48-W/88/168 & 640

Revision 9
INS176
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Contents Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Contents
Contents .................................................................... 2 Trouble-Shooting ...............................................................42
Reset and Service Messages ............................................44
1. System Overview.................................................. 4
System Architecture ............................................................ 4 5. Programming the Control Panel ....................... 45
Control Panel ....................................................................... 4 Introduction ........................................................................45
Remote Keypads ................................................................. 5 Copying and Pasting ..........................................................47
Zone Expanders................................................................... 6 Log Off Engineer ................................................................47
Output Expanders................................................................ 6 Resetting the Engineers Code (User 00) ..........................47
Communicators ................................................................... 6 5.1 Zone Setup ........................................................ 48
Other Devices ...................................................................... 6 Ricochet Devices MT2 .......................................................49
3. Installation ............................................................ 7 Zone Types .........................................................................50
Installation Sequence.......................................................... 7 Zone Attributes 1 ................................................................51
Control Panel ....................................................................... 7 Zone Attributes 2 ................................................................51
Power Supply Ratings ....................................................... 18 Attributes for Moment or Latch Keys ................................52
Connecting AC Mains........................................................ 19 Attributes for Custom Zones .............................................52
Connecting Batteries......................................................... 19 Zone Areas 24/48/88/168 ...................................................52
Connecting Devices to the Network ................................. 20 Zone Areas 640 ..................................................................52
Remote Keypads ............................................................... 22 Zone Text ............................................................................52
8XP-W & 32XP-W V2.xx> .................................................... 23 Zone Chime ........................................................................52
System Design Considerations ........................................ 23 Remote Test Enable ...........................................................53
Ricochet MT2 Expander Addressing ................................ 24 Zone Wiring ........................................................................53
8XE Zone Expander (24 Only) ........................................... 25 Zone Groups .......................................................................53
8XP Zone Expander ........................................................... 25 DD 243 ................................................................................53
Star and Daisy Jumper Option.......................................... 26 5.2 Area Programming ........................................... 54
iProx Module...................................................................... 27 Timers .................................................................................54
60iXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 27 Arming Modes ....................................................................55
OP16 Output Expander ..................................................... 27 Area Arm Suites 24/48/88/168 ...........................................55
RM8 Relay Module ............................................................ 28 Area Arm Suites 640 ..........................................................56
Zone and Output Numbering 24/48/88/168 ...................... 29 Area Suite Text ...................................................................56
Zone and Output Numbering 640 ..................................... 30 Suite Arm Modes ................................................................57
Zone Connections ............................................................. 31 Area Options 24/48/88/168 ................................................57
60IXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 32 Area Options 640................................................................57
Auxiliary/Fault Connections .............................................. 33 Time Arm Area ....................................................................61
Speaker Connections ........................................................ 33 Area Text.............................................................................61
External Sounder Connections ......................................... 33
5.3 Global Options .................................................. 62
Panel Outputs .................................................................... 34
System Timers ....................................................................62
Digicom Outputs 1 - 8........................................................ 34
System Config. ...................................................................63
2-Wire Smoke Detector ..................................................... 35
System Options ..................................................................67
Expander Auxiliary Input ................................................... 35
Monitor Hardware ..............................................................68
Plug-on Communicators ................................................... 36
Control Timers....................................................................68
Com GSM ........................................................................... 36
System Text ........................................................................69
SIM Card Types ................................................................. 37
Part Arm Text ......................................................................69
Premier Elite ComGSM Layout ......................................... 37
Holiday Dates .....................................................................70
Aerial Siting ....................................................................... 38
Speaker Tones ...................................................................70
Installation ......................................................................... 38
PC Output Text ...................................................................71
Panel Configuration........................................................... 38
Custom O/P Text ................................................................71
Using the SMS Control Commands .................................. 38
What will be sent in the Text Message ............................. 39 5.4 Keypad Setup ................................................... 72
AV Module .......................................................................... 40 Keypad Areas .....................................................................73
ComIP Module ................................................................... 40 Keypad Zone Mapping .......................................................73
Commissioning.................................................................. 41 Keypad Options..................................................................73
USB-Com ........................................................................... 41 Keypad Speaker Volume....................................................73
PC-Com .............................................................................. 41 Keypad Sounder Options ..................................................73
PRINT-Com ........................................................................ 41
5.5 Expander Setup ................................................ 74
Connecting a Computer .................................................... 41
Expander Areas ..................................................................75
Connecting a Printer ......................................................... 41
Expander Location Text .....................................................75
4. Commissioning and Troubleshooting ............. 42 Expander Auxiliary Input....................................................75
Commissioning.................................................................. 42
2 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Contents
Expander Speaker Volume ................................................75 Change Eng. Code ........................................................... 119

Expander Sounder Options ...............................................75 Adjust Volumes ................................................................ 119
5.6 System Outputs ................................................ 76 Default NVM Data ............................................................. 119

Location Text .................................................................... 119
Available Outputs ...............................................................77
Print Log Data .................................................................. 120
Programming Outputs........................................................77
Soak Test Areas 24/48/88/168 ......................................... 120
Output Group - Not Used ...................................................77
Soak Test Areas 640 ........................................................ 120
Output Group - System ......................................................77
View iD Data ..................................................................... 121
Output Group - Area ...........................................................79
Configure Radio ............................................................... 121
Output Group - Zone ..........................................................81
Ricochet Diagnostics (MT2 Only) ................................... 122
Output Group - User Code Entered ...................................81
Output Group - Control Timer............................................81 5.10 Programming Part Arms.............................. 124
Output Group - PC Control ................................................81 Alter Part Arms ................................................................. 124
Output Group - Door Control .............................................81 6. Specifications Control Panels ........................ 125
Output Attributes ................................................................81
Remote Keypads .............................................................. 128
X-10 Outputs .......................................................................81
Zone Expanders ............................................................... 128
Custom Outputs .................................................................82
Output Expanders ............................................................ 128
Zone Group Outputs ..........................................................82
Standards ......................................................................... 129
5.7 UDL/Digi Options.............................................. 83 Warranty ........................................................................... 129
Reset Digi ...........................................................................83 Notes: ............................................................................... 130
Start Test Call .....................................................................83 Notes ................................................................................ 131
MSN/Pre-Dial No. ...............................................................83
Program Digi ......................................................................84
Digi Options ........................................................................88
Area Accounts 24/48/88/168 ..............................................88
Area Accounts 640 .............................................................89
UDL Options .......................................................................90
Setup Modules ...................................................................92
Com Port Setup ..................................................................94
DualCom® Inside (48 Only)...............................................95
EMIZON 21 TCD .................................................................96
WebWayOne .......................................................................97
Chiron IRIS .........................................................................99
Zone Alarm Reporting Codes .......................................... 100
5.8 Setup Users .................................................... 107

Default User Codes .......................................................... 108
Programming New Users ................................................. 108
User Types........................................................................ 108
User Functions and Options ............................................ 109
User Options 1.................................................................. 110
User Options 2.................................................................. 110
User Config....................................................................... 110
User Time Lock ................................................................ 110
User Name Text ................................................................ 111
Door Control ..................................................................... 111
Adding Tags ..................................................................... 111
Deleting Users .................................................................. 111
Adding SmartKey™ .......................................................... 111
5.9 Engineer Utilities ............................................ 112

View Event Log ................................................................. 112
Do Bell Test ...................................................................... 115
Do Walk Test 24/48/88/168 .............................................. 115
Do Walk Test 640.............................................................. 116
View Zone Status .............................................................. 116
Do System Tests .............................................................. 117
Confirm Devices ............................................................... 117
View RKP Status ............................................................... 118
View Exp. Status ............................................................... 118
Set System Time............................................................... 118
Set System Date ............................................................... 118
INS176-9 3

System Overview Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
1. System Overview
System Architecture
8 to 24 zones ( Pre mie r 24 ) 4 ke ypads ( Pre mie r 2 4) 1 Output Module ( Pre mie r 2 4) 2 E xpande rs ( Pre mie r 2 4)
8 to 4 8 Zone s ( Pre mie r 4 8) 4 K ey pa ds (P remi er 48 ) 2 O utput Module s ( P remie r 4 8) 4 E xpande rs ( Pre mie r 4 8)
8 to 8 8 Zone s ( Pre mie r 8 8) 8 K ey pa ds (P remi er 88 ) 4 O utput Module s ( P remie r 8 8) 8 E xpande rs ( Pre mie r 8 8)
8 to 16 8 Zone s ( Pre mie r 1 68 ) 16 K ey pa ds (P remi er 16 8) 8 Output Modules ( Pre mie r 1 68 ) 1 6 E xpande rs ( Pre mie r 1 68 )
0 to 64 0 Zone s ( Pre mie r 6 40 ) 64 K ey pa ds (P remi er 64 0) 3 2 O utput Module s ( P remie r 6 40 ) 6 4 E xpande rs ( P remie r 6 40 )
16 Programmable
10 0mA Outputs 8 Zone Inputs
2 Zone 1 Programmable 2 Zone 1 Programmable
8 Zone Inputs Inputs 100 mA Output Inputs 100 mA Output
8 Programmable
10 0mA Outputs
P r emier
8 Programmable S pea ker
10 0mA Outputs 24/48/88/168/640* Output S pe aker Output
Auxiliary Input
4 Wire Data Network 1

Pre mi er LC D/LC DP Pre mie r LC DL /LC DLP Premier O P16 Premie r 8XP
5 Programmable Outputs
(4 x 5 00m A & 1 R elay)
( Premie r 8 8,168 & 640 only)
Additional Wire a s Network 1
4 Wire Data Ne twork
Be ll/S trobe Outputs Plug on Digimode m

Bell Ta mper Input (Com30 0, Com24 00)
GS M Module
We bwayOne, E mizon
Auxiliary Ta mper Input or C hiron Iris
PC and Modem for

R emote U pload/Download
Mod em
PC and PC -Com for

Local U ploa d/Download Ala rm R eceiving
Centre
PC -C om
* No Onboard Zones
Control Panel
Premier Elite 24 Premier Elite 24-W & 48-W

• 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones • 4 Onboard Zones
• Expandable to 24 zones via keypads and zone expanders • 8 wireless device Ricochet™ enabled receiver onboard (24-W)
• 1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable) • 32 wireless device Ricochet™ enabled receiver onboard (48-W)
• Up to 4 keypads and 2 zone expanders • Expandable to 24/48 zones via keypads and zone expanders
• Up to 1 output module • 1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
• 2 independent areas each with 3 part arms • Up to 4 keypads and 2/3 zone expanders
• 2 area arm suites • Up to 2 output modules
• 25 programmable User codes • 2 or 4 independent areas each with 3 part arms
• 500 Event Log (time & date stamped) • 2 or 4 area arm suites
• 1 programmable panel outputs (1 x 100mA ) • 25 or 50 programmable User codes
• 1.5 Amp power supply (plastic Case) • 500 Event Log (time & date stamped)
• 1 or 2 programmable panel outputs (2 x 500mA )
Premier Elite 48
• 1.5 Amp power supply
• 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones
• Expandable to 48 zones via keypads and zone expanders
Premier Elite 88
• 1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
• 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones
• Up to 4 keypads and 4 zone expanders

• Expandable to 88 zones via keypads and zone expanders
• Up to 2 output modules • 1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
• 4 independent areas each with 3 part arms • Up to 8 keypads and 8 zone expanders
• 4 area arm suites • Up to 4 output modules
• 50 programmable User codes • 8 independent areas each with 3 part arms
• 500 Event Log (time & date stamped)

• 8 area arm suites
• 2 programmable panel outputs (2 x 1A )

• 100 programmable User codes
• 2.5 Amp power supply • 1000 Event Log (time & date stamped)
• 5 programmable panel outputs (4 x 1A & 3A relay)
4 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual System Overview
• 2.5 Amp power supply LCDLP

Premier Elite 168 • LCDL with a built in Proximity Tag Reader
• 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones FMK/SMK

• Expandable to 168 zones via keypads and zone expanders • LCDLP Metal Flush or Surface Mount
• 2 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable) • Various finishes available
• Up to 16 keypads and 16 zone expanders (8 per network)
RKP8/16Plus
• Up to 8 output modules (4 per network)
• LED Arming keypad
• 16 independent areas each with 3 part arms
• 2 fully programmable EOL zones
• 16 area arm suites
• CANNOT be used for Programming
• 200 programmable User codes
• 2000 Event Log (time & date stamped) Icon Guide
Premier Elite 640

• 0 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones English UK Po wer
Keypad
Info.
• Expandable to 640 zones via keypads and zone expanders R eady

O mit S ervice
• 8 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
• Up to 64 keypads and 64 zone expanders (8 per network)
• Up to 64 output modules (8 per network)
1 2 3 O R
• 64 independent areas each with 3 part arms
• 64 area arm suites 4 5 6 C
• 500 programmable User codes 7 8 9 P
• 5000 Event Log (time & date stamped)
y 0 n A N
Premier Elite 24, 24-W, 48, 48-W, 88, 168 &

640
• 32 Event Alarm Log Iconic b
P
• 500 Event Mandatory Log Keypad

• 8 programmable digicom outputs (100mA each) PR X F e
• 32 character zone text

•
•
Facility for Plug-on Digimodem (Com300/2400/)
Facility for Plug-on IP Module (ComIP/Chiron/WebWayOne/Emizon)
1 2 3 B R
• Facility for a plug-on RedCARE/RM8 Relay Module (Not Premier 4 5 6 C
24)
• PC-Com/printer port
7 8 9 s
y 0 n A N
Remote Keypads
LCD
• 32 character text display
• 2 fully programmable DP or EOL zones
• 1 fully programmable output (100mA -ve applied)
English b
P
• Fully adjustable back-lighting, normally bright, dim or off, changing to

PR X
Keypad
bright during entry or following a key press F e
• Built in piezo sounder

• Programmable ‘Info.’ LED
1 2 3 B R
LCDL
ALL the features of the LCD plus: 4 5 6 C
• Larger 32 character text display 7 8 9 s
• Speaker output
y 0 n A N
LCDP
• LCD with a built in Proximity Tag Reader
INS176-9 5

System Overview Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Keys • For use with an analogue telephone line (REN = 1)

ICONS UK English English
Com2400
 =  =  • Multi-protocol communicator supporting Fast Format, Contact
 =  =  ID, SIA Level II and EasyCom Pager and SMS Messaging
protocols
 =  =  • 2400-baud modem for remote uploading and downloading
 =  =  using the Wintex UDL software and a PC
= = • Sends SMS text messages to mobile phones

  
• For use with an analogue telephone line (REN = 1)
 =  = 
= = ComIP
  
• Multi-protocol communicator supporting Fast Format, Contact ID
 =  =  and SIA Level II protocols via TCP/IP
 =  =  • High speed modem for remote uploading and downloading using
LED's the Wintex UDL software and a PC
• For use with ADSL/DSL/Broadband/WAN/LAN etc.
= Power = Ready
ComGSM
• Provides a GSM telephone path for Com300 & Com2400 Digital
= Armed/Info OK = Ready Communicators
• Sends SMS text messages to mobile phones
= Omit = Service • Arm, Disarm, Reset the alarm, turn outputs on and off, omit
zones and send messages to the control panel using SMS text
messages
• 9600-baud modem for remote uploading and downloading
using the Wintex UDL software and a PC
Zone Expanders
8XP Other Devices
• 8 fully programmable DP or EOL zones
PC-Com
• 8 fully programmable outputs (100mA -ve applied each)
• For connecting a PC to the control panel via an RS232 Serial
• Speaker output port allowing local uploading and downloading using Wintex
• Programmable auxiliary input UDL software
• Remotely wired USB-Com

• For connecting a PC to the control panel via a USB 1.0 or 2.0
60iXD port allowing local uploading and downloading using Wintex
• 2 loops x 30 fully programmable iD zones UDL software
• iD biscuit technology
PRINT-Com
• Plug-on • For connecting a serial printer to the control panel
“iD” is a registered trade mark of Chloride Safety System Limited.
Memory Module (not 640)
Output Expanders
OP16
 Fits onto the expansion port to provide a 10,000 event log.
• 16 fully programmable outputs (100mA each) Battery Splitter

• 1 fault output (100mA -ve applied)
• Can be connected to mimic panels to give zone indication  Allows two backup batteries to be connected to a single set of
battery terminals, and will provide appropriate monitoring and
• Can be connected to relays and sounders
charging for each.
RM8 Relay Module
• Plug-on relay card (RedCARE footprint) External Sounders
• 8 separate inputs for standalone operation
• 8 x 3Amp relay outputs (n/o, n/c, com)  Texecom supply a range of external sounders
• Output ‘ON’ LED indication
Communicators
Com300
• Multi-protocol communicator supporting Fast Format, Contact
ID, SIA Level II and EasyCom Pager protocols
• 300-baud modem for remote uploading and downloading using
the Wintex UDL software and a PC
6 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Installation
3. Installation
Installation Sequence Control Panel
Before attempting to install the alarm system, read this section. Once
you have an overall understanding of the installation sequence, Mounting
carefully work through each step. Mount the control panel on a flat, plumb wall using at least three
screws of appropriate size.
1: Design the Layout
Make a rough sketch of the premises to get an idea of where the
alarm detection devices, keypads, zone expanders etc. are to be
located.
 It is essential to ensure that none of the fixing slots or cable
entries are accessible after fixing.
Mains cabling must be secured (e.g. with a cable tie) to one of
2: Mounting the Panel the anchor points provided.
The control panel should be mounted in a dry area close to an
unswitched AC power source and the incoming telephone line (if
using a communicator). Wiring the Control Panel
WARNING: ELECTRICITY CAN KILL
 You must complete all wiring before connecting the battery or
applying AC mains to the control panel. BEFORE connecting the control panel ALWAYS
3: Install the Keypads and Zone Expanders disconnect the supply at the consumer unit.
Mount and connect the keypads, zone expanders and output
modules to the control panel (see page 20 for wiring details).
If in ANY doubt consult a qualified electrician.
4: Install the Alarm Detection Devices

Install the detection devices, PIR’s, Contacts, PA Buttons etc. and
connect them to the control panel (see page 31 for wiring details).
 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION. HAZARDOUS
VOLTAGES INSIDE, NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS, NO
USER ACCESS.
5: Install the External Sounder
Install the external sounder and connect to the control panel (see
page 33 for wiring details).
6: Other Wiring
Complete all other wiring including speakers, telephone line and
 ONLY connect the mains supply to the mains terminal block,
NEVER connect the mains supply directly to the PCB.
output connections etc. (see pages 33 - 34 for details).
ALWAYS refer to National Wiring Regulations when conducting
7: Applying Power to the Control Panel installation.
Once steps 1 to 6 are completed, power can be applied to the An appropriate and readily accessible disconnection device
control panel. (e.g. an unswitched fused spur) MUST be provided as part of
When applying power for the first time, the factory default settings the installation.
must be loaded (see page 42 for details). Power should always be
connected in the following order: The disconnection device must NOT be fitted in a flexible cord.
• Connect the red battery lead to the positive terminal of the Where identification of the neutral in the mains supply is NOT
battery and then connect the black battery lead to the negative possible a two-pole disconnection device MUST be used.
terminal
Use mains cable of adequate carrying capacity for the rated
current (i.e. at least 0.75mm2).
 The panel will only become ‘live’ when the AC Mains is
connected or the ‘Battery Kick-start’ button is pressed.
• Connect the AC mains

For a complete list of factory default settings, see the Quick
Reference Guide supplied with your panel.
8: Programming the Control Panel

Please refer to section 5 for instruction on programming the control
panel.
9: Testing the System

Test the system thoroughly to ensure that all features and functions
operate as required (see page 112 for details).
INS176-9 7

Installation Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Premier Elite 24 Control Panel Layout Polymer
E x pan s io n
C om 1
Audio
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L/M R /R
L o ad D e fau lts
! 0 . 75 A 0 . 3A
Digi Modem
U S E W IT H
T E XE C O M P S U B att C h ar g e C om 1
O NLY
F9
K ic k S tar t
Flash P ort
B AR C ODE Plug-on
C ontrol Panel Digimodem
C ircuit B oard
F6 B att B ell Network
F3
Aux 12V
( C om300,
C om 2
F2
C om2400 )
DC
F4 F1
+ B a tt - DC + DC -
E n g in e er
R e m ote
F8
Tx Rx
2 W ire
S m o ke B ell + 12 V N etwork
E n able E na ble
+ - T R + Aux -
R1
T1
T
S trb 0 V Tamp B ell+ 1 2V P g 1 S pk - 12V
Aux/F ault Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8
Mains Terminal C able

B lock & C able E ntry E ntries
1.5A
Nouser serviceablepartsinside. Do not open!
1.5 Amp Mains
POWER SUPPLY
Rated Input: 100V – 240V @ 50/60Hz; 1A
Rated Output Cur rent@ 55°C: 1.5A MAX
S pace for
PS U Rated Output Voltage: 13.7Vdc +/- 2%
Mains Terminal Block Fuse:
DANGER
1 x 7Ah Battery
250Vac; 3A-3.15A Slow/Medium Blow LAB784 HIGHVOLTAGE
Premier Elite 24-W & 48-W Control Panel Layout
B AR
J p1
Di gi
Ta mper Modem
D is abl e
F2
+ Batt- L/M R /R DC + DC -
0. 7 5A 0 .3 A
F it for
F1 J p4 Comm is sion
L ED1
Ri coc he t M oni tor
F8 B a tt C harge J p2 Mode
J p6
J p7
Plug-on
C ontrol Panel
Ki ck Sta rt
C om 1
Digimodem
( C om300,
F3
C ircuit B oard 1 J p3
C om 2
C om2400 )
2 Ex pans ion ON
J p9
3 N etwork Aux 12V Bell 12V Tx Rx
12 3 4
4 OPTION S
Di gic om O /P ’s
5 Engineer R EM
Tx R x F4 F5 F6 !
6
E na ble
S mok e
R1
T1
US E W ITH
7 TE XE C O M P S U
O NLY
L oad Defa ults F7
8
+ - T R AUX 12 V AUX 0V S trb 0V Tam p B e ll + 1 2v AUX F ault S pk+ S p k- O P 1- O P 2- Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4
Mains Terminal C able

B lock & C able E ntry E ntries
1.5A
Nouser ser viceable parts inside. Donot open! POWER SUPPLY
R ate d Inpu t: 1 00 V – 24 0V @ 50/ 60Hz; 1A
1.5 Amp Mains S pace for

R ate d O ut pu t Cu r ren t @ 5 5°C: 1 .5 A M AX
R ate d O ut pu t V o ltag e: 1 3.7 Vdc +/ - 2%
Ma ins Ter min al B lo ck Fu s e:
DANGER
PS U 25 0Vac; 3A-3. 15A Slow/M edium Blow LAB784 HIGHVOLTAGE
1 x 7Ah Battery
8 INS176-9

Control Panel Layout Metal All Models (168 shown)

Tamper Mains Terminal
S witch B lock & C able E ntry
BT
C able
2.5 Amp Mains E ntry
PS U 2. 3A /2.5A
T
R
POWERSUPPLY Nouser serviceable parts inside. Donot open!
Rated Input: 220V – 240V @ 50/60Hz;1A Audio T1
Rated Output Current @ 40°C: 2.5AMAX
R1
Rated Input: 100V – 120V @ 50/60Hz;1A
Plug-on
Rated Output Current @ 40°C: 2.3AMAX
DANGER Rated Output Voltage: 13.7Vdc +/- 2%

Ma ins Terminal Block Fuse: 250Vac; 3A-3.15ASlow/MediumBlow
Com 1
HIGHVOLTAGE
Digimodem
(C om300,
C om2400)
! Progra mming
Port
N /O C OM N /C
+ -
OP5
B AT T
F7
F6
L/M F2 O P 4+
E nable
S m ok e
R /R O P 3+
DC+ O P 2-
DC - O P 1-
-
1 F9 S pk
C om 2 C om 1
2 S pk +
DIG IC OM OU TP UT S
B AR C ODE
3 F8
Au x/
4 F ault
C ontrol Panel 5 + 12 v
6 B ell -
C ircuit B oard 7 F3 F5 F1 Ta mp
8 0v
Expans ion
S trb -
V
Be ll/S trb - 1A mp
Tx 1 R x1 Tx 2 R x2
F4
+ - T R + - T R + - A T A T A T A T A T A T A T A T
N E TWOR K 1 N E TWOR K 2 Au x 12 v Zo ne 1 Zo ne 2 Zo ne 3 Zo ne 4 Zo ne 5 Zo ne 6 Zo ne 7 Zo ne 8
C able
E ntries
C able
S pace for
E ntries
1 x 7Ah Battery
2 x 7Ah B atteries
or 1 x 17Ah Battery
INS176-9 9

Premier Elite 24 PCB Layout
E xpans ion
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L /M R /R
Tamper
Tamper
Dis able
L oa d D efa ults
! 0. 75 A 0 .3 A
Digi Modem
U S E WIT H
T E XE C O M PS U B att C harge C om1
ON LY
Flash Port F9
K ick S ta rt B AR C ODE
F6 Batt B ell Network Aux 12V

F3
C om2
F2 DC
F4 F1
+ B att - DC + DC -
E ngine er
R emote
F8
Tx Rx
2 Wire
S moke B ell + 12V Network
E nable E nable
Strb 0V Tamp B ell+ 12V + - T R Op1 S pk - + Aux

12V
- Aux/Fa ult Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8
1: Texecom PSU Connection

Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply.
DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO ANY TERMINALS ON 12: Programmable Zones 1 - 8
THE PCB. These terminals provide the connections for the zones (see page 31
for wiring details). Each zone is fully programmable (see page 48 for
2: Battery Kick-start Button details).
When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
must be pressed in order to connect the battery. 13: Expander Port
The expansion port is used for plugging on a local zone expander (see
page 23 for details).
 If AC Mains is present this button does not need to be
pressed.
14: Com Port 2
Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for
3: Earth Connection connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
Connects the PCB to earth control panel (see page 94 for details).
4: Battery Connections 15: Plug-on Communicator Connections
A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in This socket provides connection for the plug-on communicator (see
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC page 36 for details).
Mains failure (see page 19 for details).
16: Digicom Outputs
5: Digicom Power Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would
These terminals provide power; and are normally used for connecting a normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to
stand-alone communicator to the control panel (see page 34 for details). the control panel (see page 34 for details). Each output is fully
6: External Sounder Connections programmable (see page 77 for details). A remote reset input and a
These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit line fault input are also provided.
(see page 33 for details). 17: Flash Upgrade Port
7: Network Data Connections & LED’s For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware.
Networks provide connection for the keypads and zone expanders 18: Box Tamper Connection
The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’ transmits data The micro switch provides tamper protection for the main control panel in
and ‘R’ receives data (see page 20 for details). The red LED indicates case of unauthorised access.
that data is flowing out of the control panel and normally flashes very
quickly. The green LED indicates that data is flowing into the control 19: Com Port 1
panel and normally flashes slowly, the green LED flashes faster as Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for
more devices are connected (see page 20 for details). connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 94 for details).
8: Panel Output 1
OP1 is a low current (500mA ‘-ve’ applied) output (see page 34 for 20: Tamper Disable Link
wiring details). The output is also fully programmable (see page 77 This can be used to disable the box tamper when working with the
for programming details). box lid removed.
9: SPK- Loudspeaker Connection

These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16Ω or two
8Ω loudspeakers (see page 33 for wiring details).
10: Auxiliary 12V Power
These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power
(protected by a 1A fuse).
11: Auxiliary/ Fault Connections
These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an
auxiliary device (see page 33 for details).
10 INS176-9

21: Load Defaults Button

Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel
to load the factory default settings. Press and hold this button for 7
seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer
code to the factory setting of .
 Loading the factory defaults can take up to 30 seconds to
complete.
Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been
locked (see page 64 for details).
For a complete list of factory defaults, see the Quick
Reference Guide section of this manual.
22: Expansion
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone
Expander (see page 32 for details) or an AV Module (see page 40 for
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module.
23: Heartbeat LED/Power Light
Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning
correctly. If the light is ON or OFF all the time, then there could be a
problem (see page 42 for details).
24: Battery Charge Current Selector
When using a 7Ah standby battery the charge current selector should
be set to 300mA. If a 17Ah battery is connected (metal cabinet only)
the selector should be set to the 750mA position.
25: Engineers Keypad
A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier
access for programming and testing.
 When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad, the address

must be set to ‘10’ (see page 22 for details). The keypad zones
and lid tamper are not monitored.
F1 – F6: Protection Fuses (electronic PTC)
The following fuses are provided:
• F1 (900mA) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse (electronic PTC)
• F2 (900mA) Digicom Power (electronic PTC)
• F3 (900mA) Network 1 fuse (electronic PTC)
• F4 (900mA) Bell/Strobe fuse (electronic PTC)
• F6 (1.6 Amp) Battery fuse (electronic PTC)
INS176-9 11

Premier Elite 24-W & 48-W PCB Layout

33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
B AR C ODE
J p1
D igi
Ta m per Mode m
D is a ble
F2
22
1
+ B att- L/M R /R DC + DC -
0 .7 5A 0. 3A
F it f or
F1 J p4 C omm is si on
LED1
R ic ochet Monitor
F8 B a tt Ch a rg e J p2 M ode
J p6
J p7 21
2 Ki ck S ta rt
20
Wi reless E ng Kpd
C om 1
F3
1 J p3
C om 2
2 E x pans ion ON
19
J p9
3 N etwork Aux 12V Be l l 12V Tx Rx 18
1 2 3 4
4 O PT I O NS
D igic om O/P’ s
3 5 E ngi neer RE M
Tx Rx F4 F5 F6 !
6 17
E na ble
S m oke
US E W IT H
7 T E XE C O M P S U
O NLY
L oa d D ef a ults F7
8
+ - T R AUX 12V AUX 0V S trb 0V Tam p Be ll + 1 2v AU X F au lt S pk + S pk- O P 1 - O P 2 - Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1: Battery Connections 10: External Sounder Connections

A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit.
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC
Mains failure. (protected by 1.6 Amp PTC Fuse) 11: Load Defaults Button
2: Digicom Power & Inputs to load the factory default settings. Press and hold this button for 7
These terminals provide un-fused power; remote reset and line fault seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer
inputs and are normally used for connecting a stand-alone
communicator to the control panel.
3: Digicom Outputs
Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would
normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to
complete.
the control panel. Each output is fully programmable. Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been
locked.
4: Engineers Keypad
A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier For a complete list of factory defaults, see the Quick Reference
access for programming and testing. Guide supplied on the enclosed CD.
12: Auxiliary/Fault Connections
must be set to ‘10’. The keypad zones and lid tamper
These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an
are not monitored.
13: Loudspeaker Connections
5: Network Data Connections These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 8Ω or two
Network 1 provides connection for the keypads and zone expanders. 16Ω loudspeakers.
The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’ transmits data
and ‘R’ receives data. 14: Panel Outputs
Outputs 1 & 2 are 500mA ‘-ve’. These outputs are all fully
6: Network Data Indicators programmable. (24-W only output 1)
The red LED indicates that data is flowing out of the control panel
and normally flashes very quickly. The green LED indicates that data 15: Zone Connections
is flowing into the control panel and normally flashes slowly, the 4 Fully programmable zone inputs
green LED flashes faster as more devices are connected.
16: Ricochet™ Network LED’s
7: Communication Ports Green LED = Data received by the expander from the panel Red LED
Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for = Data transmitted by the expander to the panel. (The flash rate
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the depends on the mode and RF activity)
control panel. 17: Enable 2 wire smoke
Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for Panel Output 1 can be used for connecting up to 10, 12V 2-Wire
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the smoke detectors.
control panel.
18: Options Switch
8: Auxiliary 12V Power Use to select the receiver functionality.
(protected by a 0.9A PTC fuse). Switch 1 OFF =not used on 48-W.
Switch 2 OFF = 24-W & 48-W RICOCHET™Mode
9: Expansion ON = Not Used
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone Switch 3 ON = Impaq Contact-W Wired Input 2 will report as Tamper
Expander (see page 32 for details) or an AV Module (see page 40 for (default)
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module. OFF = input 2 will report as an Alarm.
Switch 4 OFF Walk test
12 INS176-9

19: RICOCHET™ Eng keypad connection

An engineer’s keypad (LCD keypad and interface lead) can be
temporarily plugged onto this connector to allow system
programming and testing. Set the keypad address switches to all
ON.
20: RICOCHET™Firmware Flash Port
Connections for flasher interface to update RICOCHET™ receiver
firmware.
21: Commission Mode Jumper
Fit when learning and placing devices, remove once complete.
22: Antenna
RF antenna
23: RF LED’s
Left = RED Transmit, Middle = GREEN Receive, Right = RED
Wireless Network Tick.
24: Plug-on Communicator Connections
This socket provides connection for COM300/COM2400 plug-on
communicators via the lead provided.
25: Ricochet™ Comm. Port Connection
Serial communications port for connecting to a PC via PC Com/USB
Com or Com IP for use with RICOCHET™ Monitor Software.
26: Cover Tamper
Provides tamper protection for the control panel.
problem.
28: Cover Tamper Disable
Disables the lid tamper
29: Flash Programming Port
For upgrading the panel firmware.
30: Battery Charge Selection
Select .03A or 0.75A battery charging current
31: Current Reading Pads
To calculate the current draw of the control panel, measure the
voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i.e. Reading = 34mV
(x10) = 340mV = 340mA.
32: Battery Kick-start Button
When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
must be pressed in order to connect the battery. If AC Mains is
present this button does not need to be pressed.
33: Power Supply Connection

Only for use with the Texecom PSU.
DO NOT CONNECT ANY OTHER MAINS SUPPLY TO THESE
TERMINALS
PTC Protection Fuses
F6 PTC (0.9A) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse
F4 PTC (0.9 A) Network 1 fuse
F5 PTC (0.9 A) Bell/Strobe fuse
INS176-9 13

Premier Elite 48/88/168 PCB Layout
Box
Tamp
! Programming
Po rt
N/O C O M N /C
US E W IT H
T E XE C O M P S U
O NLY
+ -
O P5
B AT T
F7
JP10
F6
L /M F2 O P4+
E nable
S moke
R /R O P3+
DC+ O P2-
DC - O P1-
-
1 F9 S pk
C om 2 C om 1
2 S pk+
D IG IC OM OUTP U TS
3
B AR CODE F8
Aux/
4 Fault
5 + 12v
Ne two rk 1
Ne two rk 2
-
1Am p
1Am p
6 B ell
7 F3 F5 F1 Tamp
8 0v
Aux 1 2v
1Am p
10 0m V = 1 Am p S trb -
E x p ans ion
E ng K ey pa d
JP7 He ar tbe at
V
B e ll/S tr b - 1Amp
Tx 1 R x1 Tx 2 R x2
F4
+ - T R + - T R + - A T A T A T A T A T A T A T A T
N ET WOR K 1 N ET WOR K 2 Aux 12 v Zon e 1 Zon e 2 Zon e 3 Zon e 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8
1: Texecom PSU Connection 10: Auxiliary/Fault Connections

Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply. These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an
DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO THE AC INPUT auxiliary device (see page 33 for details).
TERMINALS ON THE PCB.
2: Battery Connections These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16Ω or two
A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in 8Ω loudspeakers (see page 33 for details).
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC
Mains failure (see page 19 for details). 12: Panel Outputs
Outputs 1 & 2 are 500mA ‘-ve’ applied, outputs 3 & 4 are 500mA
3: Digicom Power & Inputs ‘+ve’ applied and output 5 is a clean contact relay (see page 34 for
These terminals provide unfused power; remote reset and line fault inputs wiring details). These outputs are all fully programmable (see page
and are normally used for connecting a stand-alone communicator to the 76 for details).
4: Digicom Outputs
Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would
 Panel outputs 3, 4 and 5 are only available on the 88 and 168.
normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to 13: Plug-on Communicator Connections
the control panel (see page 34 for details). Each output is fully This socket provides connection for the plug-on communicator (see
programmable (see page 77 for details). page 36 for details).
5: Engineers Keypad 14: Box Tamper Connection

A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier The box tamper micro switch is connected here. The micro switch
access for programming and testing. provides tamper protection for the main control panel in case of
unauthorised access. To disable the box tamper, remove the micro
switch lead and fit a jumper link across the two pins.
must be set to ‘10’ (see page 22 for details). The keypad zones 15: Plug-on RedCARE/Dualcom Connections
and lid tamper are not monitored. These pins provide connections for a plug-on RedCARE, Dualcom,
Digicom or RM8 Relay module. Each output is fully programmable
6: Network Data Connections (see page 77 for details).
Networks provide connection for the keypads and zone expanders.
The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’ transmits data
and ‘R’ receives data (see page 20 for details).  When a device is plugged on to these pins, not all outputs may
be available, please refer to the relevant documentation for
7: Auxiliary 12V Power details.
(protected by a 1A fuse). 16: Flash Upgrade Port
For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware.
8: Programmable Zones 1 - 8
These terminals provide the connections for the zones (see page 31 17: Battery Kick-start Button
for wiring details). Each zone is fully programmable (see page 48 for When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
details). must be pressed in order to connect the battery.
9: External Sounder Connections

These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit
(see page 33 for details).
pressed.
14 INS176-9

18: Communication Ports

connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
19: Network Data Indicators
The red LED indicates that data is flowing out of the control panel
and normally flashes very quickly. The green LED indicates that data
is flowing into the control panel and normally flashes slowly, the
green LED flashes faster as more devices are connected (see page
20 for details).
 For a complete list of factory defaults, see the Quick

Reference Guide supplied with your panel.
20: Load Defaults Button
seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer
complete.
Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been
21: Expansion
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone
Expander (see page 32 for details) or an AV Module (see page 40 for
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module.
23: Current Reading Pads
To calculate the current draw of the control panel, measure the
voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i.e. Reading = 34mV
(x10) = 340mV = 340mA.
24: NVM 1 & 2
All system programming data and the event log is stored in one or
two non-volatile memory devices.
F1 - F5: Protection Fuses (48, 88 and 168)
• F1 (1Amp) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse
• F2 (1.6 Amp) Battery fuse (electronic PTC)
• F3 (1 Amp) Network 1 fuse
• F4 (1 Amp) Bell/Strobe fuse
• F5 (1 Amp) Network 2 fuse (168 only)
INS176-9 15

Premier Elite 640 PCB Layout
C om 3
Box
Tamp
13. 7V D C
2.5A m ax
J p1
! J p2
N/O C O M N /C
US E W IT H 1 00 mV = 1 Am p
T E XE C O M P S U
O NLY V
+ -
O P5
B AT T
F1
F3
F15
B AR C ODE
L /M F2 O P4+
R /R
JP10
O P3+
K ick
S ta rt
DC+ O P2-
E nable
S moke
DC - C om 1
O P1-
F9 P rogramming
Aux 12V
1 Po rt
-
C om 2
2
+
D IG IC OM OUTP U TS
-
3 J p9
F4 S pk
He ar tbe at
4 S pk+
E x p ans ion
5 Aux/
6 Lo ad
Defaults
Fault
7 + 12v
8 B ell -
F6
Tamp
F5
Bell 12V
E na ble
0v
F ault Tx Rx F ault Tx Rx F ault Tx Rx F ault Tx Rx F ault Tx Rx F ault Tx Rx F ault Tx Rx F ault Tx Rx S trb -
E ng ine ers
K e ypa d F14
F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13
+ - T R + - T R + - T R + - T R + - T R + - T R + - T R + - T R
Bell/S pk Aux 12V
N ET WOR K 1 N ET WOR K 2 N ET WOR K 3 N ET WOR K 4 N ET WOR K 5 N ET WOR K 6 N ET WOR K 7 N ET WOR K 8 Fa ult Fa ult
1: Texecom PSU Connection 10: Auxiliary 12V Power

Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply. These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power
DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO THE AC INPUT (protected by a 1A fuse).
TERMINALS ON THE PCB.
11: Panel Outputs
2: Battery Connections Outputs 1 & 2 are 500mA ‘-ve’ applied, outputs 3 & 4 are 500mA
A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in ‘+ve’ applied and output 5 is a clean contact relay (see page 34 for
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC wiring details). These outputs are all fully programmable (see page
Mains failure (see page 19 for details). 76 for details).
3: Digicom Power & Inputs 12: Plug-on Communicator Connections
These terminals provide unfused power; remote reset and line fault inputs This socket provides connection for the plug-on communicator (see
and are normally used for connecting a stand-alone communicator to the page 36 for details).
13: Box Tamper Connection
4: Digicom Outputs The box tamper micro switch is connected here. The micro switch
Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would provides tamper protection for the main control panel in case of
normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to unauthorised access. To disable the box tamper, remove the micro
the control panel (see page 34 for details). Each output is fully switch lead and fit a jumper link across the two pins.
programmable (see page 77 for details).
14: Com Port 3
5: Engineers Keypad Com Port 3 is a serial communications port and can be used for
A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
access for programming and testing. control panel (see page 94 for details).
15: Plug-on RedCARE/Dualcom Connections
must be set to ‘10’ (see page 22 for details). The keypad zones
These pins provide connections for a plug-on RedCARE, Dualcom,
Digicom or RM8 Relay module. Each output is fully programmable
and lid tamper are not monitored. (see page 77 for details).
6: Network Data Connections

Networks 1 - 8 provide connection for the keypads and zone
expanders. The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’
 When a device is plugged on to these pins, not all outputs may
be available, please refer to the relevant documentation for
transmits data and ‘R’ receives data (see page 20 for details). details.
7: External Sounder Connections 16: NVM 1 & 2
These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit All system programming data and the event log is stored in one or
(see page 33 for details). two non-volatile memory devices.
8: Auxiliary/Fault Connections 17: Flash Upgrade Port
These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware.
These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16Ω or two 8Ω
loudspeakers (see page 33 for details).
16 INS176-9

18: Communication Ports 1&2 22: Battery Kick-start Button

Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the must be pressed in order to connect the battery.
pressed.
control panel (see page 94 for details). 23: Current Reading Pads
19: Expansion To calculate the current draw of the control panel, measure the
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i.e. Reading = 34mV
Expander (see page 32 for details) or an AV Module (see page 40 for (x10) = 340mV = 340mA.
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module. F1 – F14: Protection Fuses
20: Load Defaults Button The following electronic fuses are provided:
Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel • F3 (1600 mA) Battery
seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer • F4 (250mA) Speaker
code to the factory setting of  . • F5 (900mA) Network 1
• F6 (900mA) Bell/Strobe

complete.
•
•
F7 (900mA) Network 2
Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been • F9 (900mA) Network 4
• F10 (900mA) Network 5
correctly. If the light is ON or OFF all the time, then there could be a • F12 (900mA) Network 7
• F14 (900mA) Auxiliary 12V
INS176-9 17

Power Supply Ratings

If installing to EN50131 or PD6662, the system standby times in the event of a mains power failure vary depending on the grade and how AC fail is
signalled:
 When calculating the current consumption of the system you must include the current taken by the control panel and all the devices that it
powers. If the total current exceeds the “Rated Output” for the grade you are installing to then an additional power supply is required
Premier Elite 24 (Metal) Standby and Recharge Times

EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
Current Minimum Standby 12h 12h 30h *
Current Consumption 95mA Period
Maximum Current Available Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs
0.75A charge 1.0A Time
0.3A charge 1.9A PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs **
Rated Output Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs
Battery Battery Rated Output (Amps) Time
Arrangement Charge 12h 24h 30h 60h *30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h
1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.48A 0.19A 0.13A 0.021A
0.3A 1.32A 0.61A 0.47A 0.18A **This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
1 x 17Ah
0.75A 1.0A 0.61A 0.47A 0.18A
Jumper Settings
Standby and Recharge Times Battery Recharge
Battery Charge Selector
EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Arrangement Time
Minimum Standby 12h 12h 30h * 1 x 7Ah < 24Hrs 0.3 A
Period < 24Hrs 0.75 A
1 x 17Ah
Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs < 72Hrs 0.3 A
Time
PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs ** Premier Elite 640
Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Current
Time
Current Consumption 125mA
*30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h Maximum Current Available
0.75A charge 1.0A
**This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
Jumper Settings Rated Output

Battery Battery Rated Output (Amps)
Battery Recharge
Battery Charge Selector Arrangement Charge 12h 24h 30h 60h
Arrangement Time
1 x 17Ah 0.75A 1.0A 0.558A 0.416A 0.133A
1 x 7Ah < 24Hrs 0.3 A
< 24Hrs 0.75 A
1 x 17Ah
< 72Hrs 0.3 A
Standby and Recharge Times
EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
Minimum Standby 12h 12h 30h *
Premier Elite 24 (Polymer) Period
Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs
Current Time
Current Consumption 95mA PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
Maximum Current Available Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs **
0.3A charge 1.1A Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs
Time
Rated Output *30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h
Arrangement Charge 12h **This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.48A
Standby and Recharge Times Premier Elite 24-W & 48-W

EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Current
Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h Current Consumption 150mA
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Maximum Current Available
PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 0.3A charge 1.0A
Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Rated Output
Arrangement Charge 12h
Premier Elite 48/88/168 1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.433A
Current
Current Consumption 125mA Standby and Recharge Times
Maximum Current Available EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2
0.75A charge 1.0A Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h
0.3A charge 1.9A Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs
PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2
Rated Output Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs
Battery Battery Rated Output (Amps) Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs
Arrangement Charge 12h 24h 30h 60h
1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.458A 0.166A 0.108A
0.3A 1.29A 0.583A 0.441A 0.158A
1 x 17Ah
0.75A 1.0A 0.583A 0.441A 0.1588A
18 INS176-9

Connecting AC Mains
The AC Mains supply is connected to a 3 way ‘Euro Type’ fused
terminal block, which is fitted with a 3.15A medium/slow blow fuse.
 All other wiring MUST be carried out before AC mains is

connected to the control panel.
After connecting the AC Mains, fit the mains cover, this can be
found in the spares bag.
F US E 3.15A
L
E
To P S U
N
Connecting Batteries
If installing to PD6662: 2004 then only One 12V 7Ah battery or 12V
17Ah battery can be fitted inside the control panel to provide
continued operation in the event of an AC mains failure, otherwise,
two 12V 7Ah batteries can be connected.
 All other wiring MUST be carried out before the battery is

connected to the control panel.
Connect the red battery lead to the positive terminal of the battery
and then connect the black battery lead to the negative terminal.
 The panel will only become ‘live’ when the AC Mains is

connected or the ‘Battery Kick-start’ button is pressed.
 Two batteries can be fitted and still comply with PD6662:2004

if the Battery Splitter is used.
INS176-9 19

Whichever method of wiring configuration is used, ensure that the

Connecting Devices to the Network voltage between the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals at each device is no lower
than 10.0V when the system is running on the standby battery.
Before connecting keypads, zone expanders and output modules,
isolate ALL power from the control panel (AC Mains & Battery). Do The table below shows maximum cable runs when one keypad or
not continue if there is still power present on the control panel. expander is installed using standard 7/0.2 alarm cable with various
loads:
 Connecting devices with power still present on the control

panel may damage the device or control panel and invalidate Configuration Max. Cable Run
any warranty. 1. Keypad + 2 PIR’s @15mA 250m
Keypads, zone expanders and output modules are all connected to the 2. Expander + 2 PIR’s @15mA 250m
same network terminals located at the bottom left hand corner of the 3. Expander + 8 PIR’s @15mA 100m
control panel and may be connected serially (daisy chain), in parallel
(star) or any combination of the two (see Figure 1, page 21 for details). 4. As No. 3 + 16Ω Speaker 30m
Distances of up to 1km can be achieved between the control panel and

 No more than 8 zone expanders, 8 keypads and 4 output modules
can be connected to each network.
a device. However, a power supply must be installed close to the
device to power it locally, this will help to overcome voltage drop
caused by the long cable run.
The maximum number of devices that can be connected in total
will depend on the control panel fitted.
Overcoming Voltage Drop
Whenever new devices are connected to the networks, they must be There are several ways to overcome voltage drop:
confirmed onto the system using the ‘Confirm Devices’ menu option
(see page 117 for details). • Use thicker lower resistance cable. Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable
has a resistance of 8Ω per 100m
Wiring the Network • Double up on the power connections – this will require using a 6
The networks are made up of four terminals incorporating power and or 8-core cable rather than a 4-core cable
data. To ensure correct operation, all four terminals on the device
must be connected to the corresponding terminals on the control • Install a power supply to power the device locally, remember to
panel, or previous device (see Figure 1, page 21 for details). The common the two negative connections
table below shows each terminal and its description:
Installing a Power Supply
Terminal Description When a power supply is installed, the 0V connections on the power
+ +12V Supply supply must be connected through to 0V on the control panel and
the +12V connection between the control panel and the device must
- 0V Supply be disconnected (see Figure 2, page 21 for details).
T Transmit Data
R Receive Data Network Diagnostics
Devices can be connected using 4-core cable. However, it is recommended Each network has two LED’s to indicate data flow. The red LED
that 6 or 8-core cable is used as the spare cores can be used to ‘Double Up’ indicates data flowing out of the ‘T’ terminal and the green LED
on the power connections if needed. indicates data flowing into the ‘R’ terminal. The table below shows
each LED status and its meaning:
 Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable can be used for most installations.

However, under certain conditions it may be necessary to use
LED Status ‘T’ Wire OUT ‘T’ Wire IN
screened cable. Red LED Flashing Normal Normal

Red LED On Panel Fault Cable Short
Cable Distances Red LED Off Panel Fault Panel Fault
The maximum recommended distance for devices when using
standard 7/0.2 alarm cable is:
LED Status ‘R’ Wire OUT ‘R’ Wire IN
• 250m for each branch when using the star (parallel) Green LED Flashing Panel Fault Normal
configuration
Green LED On Panel Fault Cable Short
• When using a daisy chain (series) configuration the maximum
Green LED Off Normal No Data From Devices
distance will depend on the number of devices connected on
the chain. The more devices that are connected, the shorter the
distance to the last device (this is due to voltage drop in the
cable)  The LED’s are provided as an aid for fault finding and therefore
should not be completely relied upon to indicate that there is a
fault.
20 INS176-9

Figure 1: Network Connections (250m without additional power supply).

250 m
Premier Premier Premier Premier

K eypad K eypad Zone E xpander K eypad
+ - tw or k
Ne + - tw or k
Ne + - + - + - tw or k
Ne
T R T R T R T R T R
C ontrol Pa nel
Ne twork 1 or 2
R
Ne tw or k
T
+-
To a dditional
+ - T R Ke ypa ds, Zone
Ne tw or k
E xpa nders or
Premier Output Module s
Output Module
Figure 2: Network Connections (1km with additional power supply).

250 m 1 km
Premier Premier Premier Premier

K eypad K eypad Zone E xpander K eypad
+ - tw or k
Ne + - tw or k
Ne + NET-WOR K IN +NET -WOR K OUT + - tw or k
Ne
T R T R T R T R T R
C ontrol Pa nel
Ne twork 1 or 2
R
Ne tw or k
T
+-
D isco nne ct
+ 12 V fro m
c ontro l panel
To a dditional
+ - T R + - Ke ypa ds, Zone
Ne tw or k
E xpa nders or
Premier Power Output Module s
Output Module S uppl y
INS176-9 21

Remote Keypads Zone Numbering

The table below shows the zone allocation when the keypads are
Keypad Layout installed:
Tamp er Ou tput
S witc h S peak er N etwor k Zones Zones
Ou tput Address
Terminals (Network 1) (Network 2)
1 Unmapped Unmapped
2 Unmapped Unmapped
3 Unmapped Unmapped
A dd res s
S witc h 4 Unmapped Unmapped
P iez o
- S ound er 5* Unmapped Unmapped
6* Unmapped Unmapped
Zon es
Address Zones Zones
(Network 3,4 & 5) (Network 6 7 & 8)
1-8 ** Unmapped Unmapped
Connecting Keypads
Keypads are connected to the network terminals located at the
bottom left hand corner of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21 for
 The zones inside the keypads are not seen by the system until
they have been mapped to a zone number (see page 73 for
details). details).
* 88 168 only
Keypad Addressing
Each keypad must be assigned a different address using the DIL ** 640 only
switches located on the left hand side of the PCB. The table below
shows the keypad addressing: Keypad Output
The remote keypad has one programmable output, which can be
Address DIL 1 DIL 2 DIL 3 DIL 4 used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc.
Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34 (see page 76 for
1 On or off Off Off Off
details). The electrical characteristics for the output are shown below:
1 2 3 4
2 Off On Off Off 1 2 3 4
3 Off Off On Off 1 2 3 4 Output Max Current Type

4 Off Off Off On 1 2 3 4 1 100mA Switched -ve
5* On Off Off On 1 2 3 4
6* Off On Off On 1 2 3 4
Keypad Speaker Output (LCDL/LCDLP Only)
7* Off Off On On The LCDL and LCDLP keypads have an output that can be used for
1 2 3 4
driving up to one 16Ω or two 8Ω loudspeakers (see page 33 for

8* On Off On On 1 2 3 4
details).
Engineers On On On On 1 2 3 4
 The speaker volume is also fully adjustable (see page 73 for
 Never set two keypads on the same network to the same

address.
details).
Programmable ‘Info.’ LED

When using a keypad as an Engineer’s keypad, the DIL
switches must all be ‘On’. The ‘Info.’ LED on the front of the keypad can be programmed to
mimic the keypad output or show the armed status of an area (see
* 88 168 & 640 only page 73 for details).
Keypad Zones Adjustable Backlighting

The keypad has two programmable zones (see page 31 for details). To adjust the keypad backlighting press the YES key for 5 seconds,
Each zone is also fully programmable (see page 48 for details). then with the YES key still pressed use  to increase or decrease
the backlighting until the required brightness is achieved, then
release both keys.
 The backlight can only be adjusted when the keypad is not in a

menu.
Keypad Lid Tamper

The lid tamper of each keypad can be disabled if required using the
relevant keypad option in the Keypad Setup menu (see page 73 for
details).
22 INS176-9

established correctly. Please refer to the relevant section in this

8XP-W & 32XP-W V2.xx> document to Learn Devices to the system.
Ricochet MT2 Learning Premier Elite SmartKey™

The Premier Elite Series™ of control panels have been upgraded to On Ricochet MT2 systems Premier Elite SmartKey™ should only be
V2.xx firmware which now contains Ricochet™ MT2 capability. This learned AFTER all devices and expanders are in their final location,
new technology adds additional features and functions for this is critical on larger systems where multiple expanders are being
Ricochet™ enabled security systems. The Expanders used must be used
Premier Elite XP-W V2.xx.
 Devices should be at least 30cm’s away from the receiver when being
 DO NOT mix V1 & MT2 expanders on the same Premier Elite panel learned.
Multiple Expander Support Placing Devices

It is now possible to add multiple expanders to the system allowing
for greater flexibility in system design, and also taking wireless Once all of the devices have been learnt, they will need placing in
capability to new levels. Additional device modes and diagnostics their desired location, this should be done by installing devices
functions also give more information about the system status, and closest to the expander first and then working outwards so that the
allow greater control over devices modes of operation. last devices installed are those furthest away from the expander.
Make sure to install devices with the expander in Commission mode.
Control Panel Capacity See INS467 for details
The table below details the maximum number of expanders, devices
and Premier Elite SmartKey™ that may be used on the different Devices also have a commission mode which will indicate a secure
control panels, other configurations may be possible by mixing and valid path of communication to the receiver. See INS467 for
Premier Elite 32XP-W & Premier Elite 8XP-W. details
32XP-W 8XP-W
 You should wait at least 15 minutes after installing the last device to
make sure routing has been correctly established between all system
Expanders
Expanders
Devices
Devices
Panel Premier Elite Premier Elite devices.

SmartKey™ SmartKey™
 For maximum reliability and system integrity avoid long and thin set-ups.
Premier Elite
24™
Premier Elite
1 16 16 2 16 25
 Devices are capable of hopping through up to two other devices, or a
maximum of three hops.
1 32 16 4 32 50
48™
Premier Elite
48-W™
N/A 32 16 N/A N/A N/A PCB Layout
Premier Elite
2 64 32 8 64 100
88™
Premier Elite
4 128 64 16 128 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
168™
Premier Elite
16 512 256 16 128 256
640™
1 2341 234
 Premier Elite 32XP-W take 4 address slots on the network, Premier Elite
8XP-W take one address
To enable all of the advanced functionality and diagnostics capability

Ricochet™ MT2 the following are minimum requirements:-
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
• Wintex™ Version 6 Build 16 or later

• Ricochet Monitor™ 0.2.15.00 or later
• Premier Elite™ Series V2.xx or later
• Premier Elite™ 32XP-W & 8-W Expanders V2.xx or later
System Design Considerations

To ensure correct setup and operation of the Wireless Network it is
important that the following procedures are used when learning and
placing devices.
Multiple Expander Systems Ricochet MT2

When using multiple expanders great care should be taken when
designing the system. Each expander should be treated as its own
wireless network; it is not possible for devices to hop from one
wireless network to the other, it is also not possible for expanders to
pass wireless signals from devices not assigned to them and nor can
the expanders talk to each other.
Learning Devices
All devices should be learnt before they are placed in their final
location. The expander should be in commission mode, please see
INS467 for details. This will ensure that they are registered on the
receiver or control panel, and that Mesh Networks and routing are
INS176-9 23

1: Engineers Keypad Connection 9: Heartbeat LED
An engineer’s keypad (Premier/Elite LCD keypad and interface lead) Flashes steadily to indicate that the receiver is functioning correctly. If
can be temporarily plugged onto this connector to allow system the light is ON or OFF all the time, then there could be a hardware
programming and testing. (Functions dependent on Panel firmware problem.
version) Set the keypad address switches to all on.
10: Learn Switch
2: Network Connection To be used with programming LED’s to learn devices directly to the
The + and – terminals provide power whilst the T and R terminals are receiver.
transmit and receive data.
11: Options Switch
3: For Future Use Use to select the receiver functionality depending on panel firmware.
4: Comm. Port Connection
Serial communications port for connecting the 8 XP-W & 32XP-W to a Switch 1 ON =firmware dependant, please see the relevant
PC via PC Com/USB Com or Com IP for use with RICOCHET™ programming section.
Monitor Software. Switch 2 ON = Legacy Mode
5: Lid Tamper OFF = RICOCHET™
When open puts the system into commission mode and digitally Switch 3 ON = Impaq Contact-W Wired Input 2 will report as Tamper
attenuates the receiver signal by 15Db. (default)
6: Programming LED’s OFF = input 2 will report as an Alarm.
Allows programming of devices directly to the receiver, in Switch 4 Walk test
conjunction with the learn switch.
7: Antenna 12: Address Switch
RF Antenna. Used to assign the address of the receiver on the premier network
Premier 32XP-W = 2 x Antenna 13: RF LED
Flashes when transmitting or receiving RF data
Premier 8XP-W = 1 x Antenna 14: Tamper Disable
8: Network LED's Disables the lid and rear tamper
Green LED = Data received by the expander from the panel Red LED 15: Engineer’s Keypad LED's
= Data transmitted by the expander to the panel. (The flash rate Red LED flashes constantly, the flash rate increases when data is
depends on the mode and RF activity) being transmitted.
16: Flash Programming Port
Variant dependent, for flashing the expander with updated firmware.
Ricochet MT2 Expander Addressing
Introduction
The address range and switch position will depend on which combination of expanders are being used. Each 32XP-W takes up 4 address slots on
the control panel network, however the network slots are virtual until devices are assigned to available zones. It is possible that if a 32XP-W is being
used at Address 1, but only 16 devices have been used, Address 3 & 4 are available for hardwired 8XP's or 8XP-W's.
Please see some examples of mixing different types of Expanders on various Elite panels and the addressing requirements.
Example 1 Totally wireless system(s)

32XP-W
Panel
Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Network 5 Network 6 Network 7 Network 8
Expanders 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(Max)
Premier Elite
Exp 1 Exp 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
88™
Expander
1 5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Address
Premier Elite
Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
168™
Expander
1 5 1 5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Address
Premier Elite
Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2
640™
Expander
1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5
Address
Example 2 Premier Elite 168™, + 32XP-W, 8XP-W's & 8XP's mix

Network 1 Network 2
Panel
Expanders (Wireless) Expanders (Mixed)
Premier Elite 168™ 32XP-W 2 x 8XP-W 8XP-W 8XP-W 8XP 8XP
Expander Address 1 5&6 1 2 3 4
Devices (Max) 32 16 8 8 8 8
Premier Elite SmartKey™(Max) 16 16 16 16 N/A N/A
Example 3 Premier Elite™48, 32XP-W + 8XP's

Network 1
Panel
Expanders (Mixed)
Premier Elite 48™ 32XP-W 2 x 8XP
Expander Address 1 5&6
Devices Used 16 16
Premier Elite SmartKey™(Max) 16 N/A
24 INS176-9

8XE Zone Expander (24 Only) 8XP Zone Expander

The 8XE Zone Expander has: Expander Layout
• 8 fully programmable zones E ngineers
Tamper K eypad Network
• Aux 12V Output S witc h Interface Terminals Power LE D
Expander Layout
+ - T R + - T R
C onnector for
plugging on J P 5
T
A
Z on e 5
control panel
Z on e
D S
1
Zones
A
T
Zones
1& 2 5& 6
T
A
Z on e 6
Z on e
2
A
T
Aux Aux
-
+
12V 12V
Z16 + -
-
Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z15
A ux 12
T
A
Z on e 7
Z on e 3
Zones
A
Zones
T
Zones 9-16 or Aux 12V 7& 8
3& 4
Tampers 1-8 (1 Amp)
T
A
Z on e 8
Z on e 4
Connecting Expanders
A
T
The 8XE local zone expander plugs directly on to the terminals located - -
on the right hand side of the control panel (see below for details). To
install the local zone expander proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that all power is removed from the control panel (mains and
battery) before attempting to fit the expander.
Addres s
Com P ort
2. Push the four support pillars (supplied) into the four locating Aux S peaker Outputs S witc h
Input Output 1 to 8
holes on the control panel PCB.
3. Align the local expander connector with the 8 way plug (JP5) on
the control panel. Push expander into place, ensuring that all Connecting Expanders
four pillars clip into the four locating holes on the local Expanders are connected to the network terminals located at the
expander. bottom of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21 for details).
Expander Addressing
Each Expander must be assigned a different address using the DIL
switches located in the centre of the PCB. The table below shows the
expander addressing:
Address DIL 1 DIL 2 DIL 3 DIL 4

1* On or off Off Off Off 1 2 3 4
2* Off On Off Off 1 2 3 4
3** Off Off On Off 1 2 3 4
4** Off Off Off On 1 2 3 4
5*** On Off Off On

Zone Numbering 1 2 3 4
6*** Off On Off On

The table below shows the zone allocation when the expanders are
1 2 3 4
installed: 7*** Off Off On On 1 2 3 4
8*** On Off On On 1 2 3 4
Configuration Panel Zones Expander Zones

8XE = Zones
8XE= Tampers
1 to 8
1 to 8
9 to 16
Tampers 1 to 8  Never set two expanders on the same network to the same
address.
* 24/48/88/168/640
Expander Zones ** 48/88/168/640 only
The expander has eight programmable zones (see page 31 for wiring
details). Each zone is also fully programmable (see page 48 for *** 88 168 & 640 only
programming details).
Expander Zones
The expander has eight programmable zones (see page 31 for wiring
details). Each zone is also fully programmable (see page 48 for
details).
INS176-9 25

Star and Daisy Jumper Option Zone Numbering (24/48/88/168)

The table below shows the zone allocation when the expanders are
The PCB has a jumper JP3 which allows you to select either STAR installed:
(S) or DAISY (D) wiring configuration. The jumper should be set as
follows:
Zones Zones
Address
If the network IN connection is wired in parallel with any other (Network 1) (Network 2)
device the jumper MUST be set to the S position. All previous
versions of the expander operated in this mode and for
1* 9 - 16 73 - 80
backward compatibility the unit is supplied with the jumper in 2* 17 - 24 81 - 88
this position.
3** 25 - 32 89 - 96
If the network IN connection is only wired to one device the
jumper should be set to the D position. 4** 33 - 40 97 - 104
5*** 41 - 48 105 - 112
When the jumper is set to the STAR position the network data signals
6*** 49 - 56 113 - 120
are not boosted between expander and the previous device. In this
mode the network cabling MUST not exceed 100m between devices. 7*** 57 - 64 121 - 128
When the jumper is set to the DAISY position the network data 8*** 65 - 72 129 - 136
signals are boosted between the expander and the previous device.
This mode will allow expanders on the network to be connected up to
250m apart and MUST only be selected if the expander has one
device connected to the network “IN” connections.  Network 2 can only be used on the 168.
Star wiring example

 For 640 see page 30
* 24/48/88/168/640
** 48/88/168/640 only
*** 88 168 & 640 only
Expander Auxiliary Input

The expander has one programmable input. This auxiliary input can be
used to monitor auxiliary devices such as tamper loops etc. Wire as per
Aux Tamper shown on page 32 (see page 75 for details). The system
will respond as follows:
Input Status System Response

0V Applied Input Secure
Daisy chain wiring example 0V Removed Input Active
EOL Various *
 For further details on how the input status affects the system
please refer to page 75.
* For wiring details, see page 35.
Combined Wiring example
Expander Outputs
The zone expander has eight programmable outputs, which can be
used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc.
details). The electrical characteristics for the outputs are shown
below:
Outputs Max Current Type

1 to 8 100mA Switched -ve
Expander Speaker Output

The expander has an output that can be used for driving up to one 16Ω
or two 8Ω loudspeakers (see page 33 for details).
Expander Com Port

The Com Port can be used to connect a PSU200 or amonitored
power supply.
Expander Lid Tamper

The lid tamper of each expander can be disabled if required by fitting
a jumper link across the centre and right hand pins of the ‘Enable
Tamper’ pins (JP2) leaving the left hand pin free. These pins are
located to the left of the address DIL switch just beneath the fuse.
26 INS176-9

iProx Module OP16 Output Expander

iProx Layout Output Module Layout
O ptio n & Ad dre s s S witches
Tamper Internal Sounder Aux 12V

Off Networ k Networ k
and Tam per
On Terminals Ou tput Terminals
ON
RTE N /C N/O Com

S pe aker
Spk
Rel ay 1
Termin als 1 2 3 4 Do or S trike
Address R elay
ON Eng ineer s
+
+ - T R - - + + + - T R
R eq ue st to
W ieg and
E xit Input
Key pad
Interfa ce 1 2 3 4 Interfac e
D0
Co nn ectio ns Options
L1- L2- L+
Rem ote LED’s
D1
R emo te
B an k 1 B an k 2
Ext Int Ext Int

O utputs
+
P rox Co il O utputs
Co nn ectio ns
1 to 8 1 to 8
C2
Ne twork
Ext Coil
Termin als
T
C1
R
Tamp er
+
P IP01 23456
S witc h BAR C ODE
S pe aker
Vo lu me Adj
Po wer LE D
Connection
The iProx Module is connected to the network terminals located at
the bottom of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21 for details).
Addressing
The iProx Module is addressed as a keypad and will occupy a
keypad slot on the network. The unit must have a unique address, Connecting Output Modules
which must not conflict with keypad or any other iProx Module on
the same network Output modules are connected to the network terminals located at
the bottom left hand corner of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21
The following table shows the addressing: for details).

Output Module Addressing
1 On or off Off Off Off 1 2 3 4
Each output module must be assigned a different address using the
2 Off On Off Off 1 2 3 4
DIL switches located in the centre of the PCB.
3 Off Off On Off 1 2 3 4 The table below shows the expander addressing:
4 Off Off Off On
1 2 3 4
5* On Off Off On 1 2 3 4
1 On or off Off Off Off 1 2 3 4
6* Off On Off On
2 Off On Off Off
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
7* Off Off On On
3* Off Off On Off
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
8* On Off On On
4* Off Off Off On
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5 ** On Off Off On
 Never set two modules on the same network to the same
address.
6 ** Off On Off On
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
7 ** Off Off On On
*88/168 & 640 only
1 2 3 4
8 ** On Off On On 1 2 3 4
Refer to the iProx Module manual for programming and operating

instructions. * 88 and 168 only
** 168 only
60iXD Zone Expander
The 60iXD expander provides the following facilities:
• Two iD loops each supporting up to 30 biscuits

 In order for an output module to mimic zone expander outputs,
the output module must be addressed the same as the zone
expander that it is mimicking.
• Fused 12V output for powering detectors
Any combination of addresses can be used on each output
• Engineer’s keypad port for local iD diagnostics module i.e. Bank 1 can be addressed to mimic expander 3
and Bank 2 can be addressed to mimic expander 8.
Bank 1 switch sets the address of the device that Bank 1
outputs 1 to 8 will mimic.
Bank 2 switch sets the address of the device that Bank 2
outputs 1 to 8 will mimic.
INS176-9 27

Output Module Numbering Installation

The table below shows the output allocation when the output Before attempting to install the RM8 Relay Module, isolate ALL power
modules are installed, from the control panel (AC Mains and Battery). Do not continue if
there is power still present on the control panel.
Outputs Outputs
Address
1
(Network 1)
Expander 1, 1 - 8
(Network 2) **
Expander 1, 1 - 8
 Plugging on the Relay Module with power still present on
the control panel may damage the Relay Module, control
panel or both and invalidate any warranty.
2 Expander 2, 1 - 8 Expander 2, 1 - 8
Plugging on the Relay Module
3* Expander 3, 1 - 8 Expander 3, 1 - 8 1. Ensure that the Relay Module is the correct way up (see
4* Expander 4, 1 - 8 Expander 4, 1 - 8 page Error! Bookmark not defined.).
5 ** Expander 5, 1 - 8 Expander 5, 1 - 8 2. Gently press down on the Relay Module until the relay
Module is seated correctly.
6 ** Expander 6, 1 - 8 Expander 6, 1 - 8 3. Reconnect power to the control panel.
7 ** Expander 7, 1 - 8 Expander 7, 1 - 8 Testing on the Relay Module
8 ** Expander 8, 1 - 8 Expander 8, 1 - 8 1. For plug on operation, test the Relay Module in accordance
with the control panel instructions.
2. To test the auxiliary inputs, apply 0V to each input in turn
 Network 2 can only be used on the 168 and ensure that the correct LED illuminates and a click is
heard from the relay.
* 88 and 168 only
** 168 only
Connecting Outputs
for 640 see page 30 The RM8 Relay Module has 8 outputs. These outputs can be used to
drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or communicators etc.
Outputs Each output is a clean contact relay rated at 3A @ 12V. The diagram
below shows typical wiring examples for the outputs:
The output module has 16 programmable outputs, which can be
used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc. P remie r R M8 R elay Module
details). The electrical characteristics for the outputs are shown below:
Bank Outputs Max Current Type

1 1 to 8 100mA Switched -ve
2 1 to 8 100mA Switched -ve
Tamper Output
The tamper switch on the output module is connected to the tamper Connecting Inputs
output at the top of the module. If monitoring of the lid tamper is The RM8 Relay Module has 8 auxiliary inputs. These inputs can be
required, this output must be connected to a suitable input on the used to activate the relays from an external source. Each input is -Ve
control panel or zone expander. applied and draws up to 30mA. The diagram below shows typical
wiring examples for the inputs:
RM8 Relay Module
1
The Premier Elite RM8 Relay Module is compatible with any control
panels that have a plug on RedCARE/Dualcom footprint. 3
Features 4
-Ve Outputs
from external
• 8 relay outputs (12V, 3Amp each) 5 S ource Outputs
6
• 8 Auxiliary inputs (-ve applied) 7
• Auxiliary 12V output (protected by a 1 Amp fuse) P remier R M8 R elay Module
8
• Relay ON indication via LED’s
PCB Layout
Auxiliary Inputs 1 - 8 (-ve applied)
F1
1 Amp
R elay ON
Aux 12V
Indicators
Fus e
LE D1 LE D2 LE D3 LE D4 LE D5 LE D6 LE D7 LE D8
1 Amp
R LY1 R LY2 R LY3 R LY4 R LY5 R LY6 R LY7 R LY8
R elay Outputs 1 - 8 Aux 12V
28 INS176-9

Zone and Output Numbering 24/48/88/168

Expander Zones Keypad Zones
Zones Zones Address Zones Zones
Address
(Network 1) (Network 2) Network 1 Network 2
1 9 - 16 73 - 80 1 Unmapped Unmapped
Keypad Zones
Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones

Address
1 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped
Expander/OP16 Outputs
Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs

Address
1 Exp. 1, 1-8 Exp. 1, 1-8 Exp. 1, 1-8 Exp. 1, 1-8 Exp. 1, 1-8 Exp. 1, 1-8 Exp. 1, 1-8 Exp. 1, 1-8
INS176-9 29

Zone and Output Numbering 640

Expander Zones

Address
1 1-8 65 - 72 129 - 136 193 - 200 257 - 264 321 - 328 385 - 392 449 - 456
2 9 - 16 73 - 80 137 - 144 201 - 208 265 - 272 329 - 336 393 - 400 457 - 464
3 17 - 24 81 - 88 145 - 152 209 - 216 273 - 280 337 - 344 401 - 408 465 - 472
4 25 - 32 89 - 96 153 - 160 217 - 224 281 - 288 345 - 352 409 - 416 473 - 480
5 33 - 40 97 - 104 161 - 168 225 - 232 289 - 296 353 - 360 417 - 424 481 - 488
6 41 - 48 105 - 112 169 - 176 233 - 240 297 - 304 361 - 368 425 - 432 489 - 496
7 49 - 56 113 - 120 177 - 184 241 - 248 305 - 312 369 - 376 433 - 440 497 - 504
8 57 - 64 121 - 128 185 - 192 249 - 256 313 - 320 377 - 384 441 - 448 505 - 512
Keypad Zones

Address
Expander/OP16 Outputs
Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs

Address
30 INS176-9

Zone Connections Triple End Of Line (TEOL)

Use this wiring configuration when connecting PIR devices with that
Any zones that are not being used must be linked out or require Anti Mask and Fault detection. Several zone wiring
programmed as ‘Not Used’ (see page 48 for details). programming options are available for this, Triple EOL is illustrated
below. See Zone Wiring on page 53.
When using End Of Line wiring, only 1 device should normally be
connected to each zone.
A zone short can be programmed for ‘Active’ or ‘Tamper’ response
End Of Line (EOL)

Use this wiring configuration when connecting normally closed
detection devices to the zone using 2-Wires. Zone wiring should be
programmed as Double Pole/EOL (see Zone Wiring page 53)
 When using this configuration, only 1 detector can be connected

to each zone.
 When using this configuration, no more than 3 detectors can be

connected to each zone.
 Alternative resistor values are available – see Zone Wiring on
page 53 for more details.
Double Pole
Use this wiring configuration when connecting normally closed or
normally open detection devices to the zone using 4-Wires. Zone Normally Open Or Normally Closed Circuits
wiring should be programmed as Double Pole/EOL (see Zone Wiring This wiring configuration is normally used for key switches with a N/O
page 53)
or N/C contact. Zone wiring options are provided for each.
Testing Zones
 When using this configuration, no more than 10 detectors can
be connected to each zone.
To test zones prior to commissioning, use the View Zone Status
option in Engineers Utilities see page 116.
INS176-9 31

60IXD Zone Expander Cable Length Maximum Number of Biscuits

100m 30
The 60iXD expander provides the following facilities:
200m 15
• Two iD loops each supporting up to 30 biscuits
400m 7
• Fused 12V output for powering detectors
800m 3
• Engineer’s keypad port for local iD diagnostics
If a different type of cable is used, the distances should be re-
calculated. e.g., if 7/0.4mm cable is used, a single run of 200m would
Installation support 30 devices on the end as the resistance of the cable is
Before connecting the 60iXD expander module, isolate ALL power halved.
from the control panel (AC mains and battery), do not continue if
there is still power present on the control panel. When installing the iD loop it is usually more practical to run several
cables from the expander module to the different areas of protection.
1. Connect the iD expander to the control panel, see 60iXD This effectively reduces any distance problems and makes fault
installation manual (INS261) for details. finding much easier.
2. Connect the iD devices to the expander module, see “iD To reduce the risk of induced interference and wherever possible,
Connections”. cables should not be positioned along side mains power, telephone
or other data transmission cables, or run within the same ducting or
3. Reapply power to the control panel and program the
necessary options on the panel see 60IXD installation trunking as any other cables.
manual (INS261) for details. The wiring for the system’s internal sounders (loudspeakers) should
not be connected in the same multi-core as the iD loop.
iD Connections
Each iD biscuit is connected across a two-wire detector loop. Apart
from observing the correct polarity, any wiring configuration can be
Biscuit Connections
used, as shown in the diagram below: Each iD biscuit is identified by its own number 01 to 30 and contains
its own internal sensor that is continuously monitored by the
60iXD expander module. The diagram below shows the connections to the
biscuit for monitoring both tamper and alarm contacts.
LOOP 1 LOOP 2
+ - + - LOOP +
As LOOP 1
iD Biscuit
Tamper 01 Biscuit iD
09 10 11 12 13 14
08 Yellow White
07
Blue
Alarm
01 02 03 04 05 06
LOOP -
When the tamper switch is opened, the iD biscuit is taken offline and
* The 60iXD expander module is supplied with 4 off 10nF capacitors
a tamper condition is generated by the control panel. If the alarm
in the spares pack. It is recommended that you connect a 10nF
switch is opened the biscuit's internal sensor changes state and the
capacitor approximately at the half way point of each iD spur. It is
control panel will see this as an active condition and will respond as
especially important to do this on iD spurs that are less than 30
appropriate.
metres.
The diagram below shows the typical wiring of a biscuit to a standard
Cabling Considerations PIR.
The iD loop can be wired using standard 4-core alarm cable, this
allows 2 cores to be used for the iD biscuit and 2 cores for supplying
12V power for PIR's etc.
The number of biscuits that can be connected per cable run is
determined by the impedance of the cable used. Standard 4-core
alarm cable (7/0.2mm) has a resistance of approximately 8 Ohms per
100 metres. The following table shows the maximum number of
biscuits that can be connected at the end of a single cable run using
standard 4-core alarm cable:
32 INS176-9

(S) Strb –
Auxiliary/Fault Connections Strobe output, switches to 0V in alarm and is rated at 500mA.
Normally connected to strobe -ve on the sounder (where applicable,
The Aux/Fault terminals allow the control panel to monitor the tamper
connect the strobe +ve to +12V).
& fault loops of external devices such as power supplies etc.
 For EN50131 & INCERT installations the Bell & Aux Tamper must be wired to
a zone.
Au x/
Fault
Au x/
Fault
Grade 2 Installation
C ontrol Texecom Premier
Panel S ounder
(A) + 12V + 12V (A)
-
(B ) B ell Trigger -ve (B )
(C ) Tamp Tamper (C )
(D ) 0V 0V (D)
(S ) S trb - S trobe -ve (S )
2 Normally 1 Normally
C losed Conta cts C losed Conta ct Grade 3 Installation
Texecom
C ontrol P remier E lite
 If the ‘Aux/Fault’ terminals are not being used they must be
linked out.
Panel
(A) + 12V
S ounder
Bell + 12V
A
-
(B) Bell
B
(C) Tamp
T mp
C
Speaker Connections
(D) 0V
0V
D
C T E XE C OM 2010
(S) Strb -
S trb
S
Aux/
This output can be used for driving up to one 16Ω or two 8Ω
1
MS W
Fault
loudspeakers as shown below:
2
OP?
Tes t
T
Tamper
Relay
Ma de In E ngland
Relay
F ault
OF F S C B OF F
J P1 J P2 J P3
ON S AB ON
LC
= O ptional
B AT T
 The Aux/Fault relay should be programmed as Fault
Grade 3 Installation (Using a Zone)

Texecom
C ontrol P remier E lite
Panel S ounder
(A) + 12V
Bell + 12V
A
-
(B) Bell
B
(C) Tamp
T mp
C
(D) 0V
0V
D
C T E XE C OM 2010
(S) Strb -
S trb
S
Aux/
1
MS W
Fault
2
 OP?
Tes t
For details on testing Speaker outputs, see page 113.

T
Tamper
Relay
T
External Sounder Connections

Ma de In E ngland
Zone ?
Relay
F ault
A
The following terminals have been provided for connection to an

OF F S C B OF F
J P1 J P2 J P3
ON S AB ON
LC
external sounder:
= O ptional
B AT T
(A)+12V
12V supply (protected by a 1A fuse F4). Normally connected to
‘+12V’ on the sounder.
Aux/Fault –
(B) Bell – Wire the Sounder Tamper Relay to these terminals
Sounder output, switches to 0V in alarm (SAB) and is rated at 500mA.
Zone ? –
Normally connected to Trigger -ve on
Wire the Sounder Fault Relay to any Zone, looping out the Tamper
the sounder. This output can also be programmed for SCB operation (see
connection. The zone should be programmed as “Auxiliary” see
page 63 for details).
page 50 and the wiring type set as “WD Monitor” see page 53
(C) Tamp
OP ? (Optional)
Negative tamper return. Normally connected to ‘Tamper Out’ on the
Use a panel output wired to the Test terminal and programmed as
sounder. If this terminal is not being used, it must be connected to
“WD Test Active” see page 78.This will allow activation of the Test
‘0V’.
Mode remotely from the Diagnostics function in Wintex.
(D) 0V
0V supply. Normally connected to ‘0V’ on the sounder.
INS176-9
 For details on testing the ‘Bell’ outputs, see page 113
33

Panel Outputs Digicom Outputs 1 - 8

The control panel has five programmable outputs, which can be used The control panel has eight programmable outputs, which can be
to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc. (see used for connecting to a stand-alone communicator (see page 77 for
page 76 for details). The table below shows the electrical details). The table below shows the electrical characteristics for each
characteristics for each output: output:
No Max Current Type Terminal Max Current Operation

1 500mA Switched -ve 1 100mA Switched 0V
2 100mA Switched 0V
2 500mA Switched -ve
3 100mA Switched 0V
3 ** 500mA Switched +ve
4 100mA Switched 0V
4 ** 500mA Switched +ve
5 100mA Switched 0V
5 ** 3A Relay
6 100mA Switched 0V
7 100mA Switched 0V
 ** 88/168 & 640 only

8
L/M
100mA
N/A
Switched 0V
12V applied = Line Fault *
R/R N/A 0V applied to reset
Wiring Outputs
DC+ N/A +12V Power (unfused)
The diagram below shows some typical wiring examples:
DC- N/A 0V Power
* Control Panel Line Fault Input (L/M)

In accordance with BSIA form 175, the line fault input on the control
can detect a single or a dual line fault for use with the ATS Remote
Test output type
Wiring a Stand Alone Communicator

The diagram below shows a typical wiring example:
S ta nd Alo ne C ontrol
C ommun ica tor P a nel
NC
Line Fa ult C L /M
NO R /R
12 V DC +
Power
0V DC -
1 1
2 2
3 3
C hannel Inputs
Programmed 4 4 Digic om
as Positive 5 5 Outputs
Removed 6 6
7 7
8 8
 For details on testing outputs, see page 113

 For details on testing the digicom outputs, see page 113
34 INS176-9

2-Wire Smoke Detector

Panel Output 1 can be used for connecting up to 10, 12V 2-Wire smoke detectors.
Remote LED
C ontrol (Optional)
Panel
+ V In + V In
-RLED -RLED -RLED

+ V In
E nable + V Out + V Out + V Out

S moke
1k EOL
OV OV OV
To enable 2-Wire smoke detection on panel output 1, a jumper link must be fitted across the bottom two pins of JP10. The Area Option ‘2-Wire
Smoke’ also needs to be enabled (see page 60).
 2-Wire smoke detectors can only be connected to panel output 1
Expander Auxiliary Input

This input can be used for monitoring a remote power supply that has a voltage free output for the following three conditions: AC Mains Fail, Battery Fail,
12V Fail and Tamper.
Aux
Input
When the Auxiliary Input is programmed as ‘PSU Monitor’ the system will respond as follows:
Tamper 12V Fail Battery Fail A/C Fail Resistance Response

Closed Closed Closed Closed 0R No Faults
Closed Closed Closed Open 2K2 AC Fail
Closed Closed Open Closed 4K7 Battery Fail
Closed Closed Open Open 6K9 Battery Fail + AC Fail
Closed Open Closed Closed 10K 12V Fail
Closed Open Closed Open 12K2 AC Fail + 12V Fail
Closed Open Open Closed 14K7 Battery Fail + 12V Fail
Closed Open Open Open 16K9 AC Fail + Battery Fail + 12V fail
Open - - - O/C Lid Tamper
INS176-9 35

The control panel end of the connector should be attached with the
Plug-on Communicators red lead on the left most pin of the digi modem connector.
The Com300 is a multi format 8-channel digital communicator/300-
baud modem for use with a standard analogue telephone line.
The Com2400 is a multi format 8-channel digital communicator/2400-
baud modem for use with a standard analogue telephone line in
addition, this modem can also send Short Message Service (SMS)
text messages to a mobile phone.
These Communicators can be used to report system events to an
Alarm Receiving Centre using Fast Format, Contact ID or SIA Level II
or to upload/download control panel information using the Wintex UDL
software and a PC.
Plugging on the Communicator
R1
T1
R
T
Ensure that the board is the correct way up (see below). Locate the
plug into the communicator socket on the control panel and line up
the mounting holes with the pillars in the base. Once all the holes Standard Telephone Line Connections
line up, press down gently until the pillars snap into the holes.
A standard telephone line must be connected to the Com300 or
Com2400 communicator as shown below:
Master 6
5
S ocket 4
3
T = 5 or A - White/Blue ring
2 R = 2 or B - B lue/White ring
1
Telephone cable
Type 1/0.5mm C W1308
This terminal mus t be connected to

the incoming AC Mains earth supply
C om300 T
or R
Box
C om2400 T1 To other telephone
Ta mp
R1 extens ion sockets
Com GSM
The Premier Elite Com GSM is a 2G module that can be connected
to any Premier Elite control panel; however functionality differs
depending on the type of Premier panel installed and the type of
SIM card that is used. The tables below show which features are
available and the type of SIM card required to enable the services.
48-W Connection
Carefully lift the control panel PCB and fix the COM unit into the Premier Elite 24/48/88/168 & 640 SIM Type Panel Port Type
space provided with the connection lead attached. Dynamic GSM
Feature Fixed IP Com IP
IP Module
Report system events (alarms,
arm, disarm etc.) via text    
messaging to mobile telephones
Remotely arm, disarm and obtain
Com 1
Audio
current status of the alarm system    

via text messaging
Upload/Download Via GSM    
Alarm reporting to IP enabled
receivers (Montex for example)    
GPRS
Upload/Download Via IP GPRS    
 A secondary form of communications should be used as back up

where possible.
 When using Alarm reporting over IP with Montex, SIA, Contact ID

or, Fast Format may be used, however if using Texbase SIA is NOT
supported. Some receivers may require a Fixed IP address, please
R1
T1
R
check with your provider.
The red lead should be positioned on the uppermost pin of the

COM unit.  The Com port type must be programmed as one or the other, it is
not possible to use both GSM and GPRS (IP Only) functionality at
the same time.
INS176-9 36

SIM Card Types Premier Elite ComGSM Layout

SIM cards are split into two types:
• Dynamic IP SIM cards – the ‘everyday’ kind of SIM card
used in mobile phones. GSM units that use this kind of
SIM card can access any data on the internet but cannot
be contacted from the internet. This type of SIM card
should be used for SMS text messaging &
Upload/Download via GSM. A data number will be
required to uses Upload/Download.
• Fixed IP SIM cards – specialist SIM cards that have a
fixed, internet public IP address which means that in
addition to being able to access any data on the internet
they can be contacted from the internet. For Premier Elite
ComGSM this means they can be used for both alarm
reporting and upload/download via IP (GPRS) If a data
number is also available, it is possible to use
upload/download via the data number (GSM) instead of
the IP address.
SIM cards can have two different phone numbers:
• Voice Number: used for voice calls and SMS
• Data Number: used for GSM data calls
(Upload/Download)
Either of these facilities can be enabled/disabled by the operator.
 Antenna connection
 Care should be taken when using Pay as you go SIM
cards, make sure you have the ability to Top Up. Pay as  Tamper switch
You Go SIM cards generally DO NOT have data numbers,
please check with your service provider.  Com1 data connection to Premier control panel
SIM cards purchase  Engineer keypad connector (only used to power the Premier Elite ComGSM
when using APNProgrammer)
Texecom DO NOT supply SIM cards. These will need to be sourced
locally, and care should be taken to source SIM cards in the country  Option switches (see table below)
where the unit is to be used. This will help reduce costs and avoid
excessive data charges. When using GSM as the communication  Status LED’s (see table below)
method, Data services will need to be enabled for upload/download,
this may or may not be the same Telephone number.  Audio connector (for future use)
GPRS SIM card setup  Heartbeat LED
In order to use GPRS, the Premier Elite ComGSM must be  SIM card socket
programmed with certain parameters which are dictated by the SIM
card used. This is no different from mobile phones (often called the
‘GPRS Setup’) except that mobile phones are often supplied pre- Option Switches
configured.
The option switches () function as follows:
The configuration consists of the following:
Switch Function Off On
• APN (Access Point Name) Tamper GSM will not communicate GSM will communicate
1
Comms if the unit is in tamper. regardless of the tamper.
• Username GPRS Accepts connections on port
• Password 2 server Normal GSM operation 10001 and allows reporting over
GPRS
GSM/IP IP mode (19200 baud) GSM mode (9600 baud)
These parameters are entered into the Premier Elite ComGSM 3
V1.65 and earlier only V1.65 and earlier only
using a Texecom PC program called ‘APNProgrammer’ (on the 4 N/A For future use – leave in OFF position
Texecom CD supplied with the panel) with the Premier Elite ComGSM
powered and connected to a PC via a Texecom USBCom.
Status LEDs
To power the Premier Elite ComGSM whilst programming connect
the supplied harness to the control panel com port, and the other The three status LED’s () indicate the following:
end to the Engineers Keypad port on the Premier Elite ComGSM.
LED Off On Flashing
The Texecom USBCom should be connected to the com port on
1 GSM NOT Ready GSM Ready GSM Communicating
the Premier Elite ComGSM. 2 Panel NOT Ready Panel Ready Panel Communicating
No Signal (less than Good (better than 66% Marginal (between
Use APNProgrammer to upload the required information to the 3 40% Signal Strength or - Signal Strength or - 40%-66% or -88 ~ -
Premier Elite ComGSM. 88dBm) 77dBm or better) 77dBm)
The supplier of the SIM card should provide the information

required.  The signal strength LED works for both GSM and GPRS
modes; however the dBm reading is only seen on the
keypad in GSM mode.
INS176-9 37

Aerial Siting  You should check and confirm that the signal strength is
ALWAYS do a site survey to find an area of strong signal before still the same as recorded during the site survey.
installation. Installing a Com GSM with a weak signal is bad
installation practice.
Panel Configuration
The aerial should be mounted vertically at the point of strongest
signal. This is usually the highest point in the building (often the loft Text Messaging and Upload Download via
area). GSM
Avoid installing the aerial directly under metal roofs or within metal GSM Mode (panel port programmed as GSM Module, Dynamic
skinned buildings because this will reduce the signal strength and IP SIM card)
may inhibit operation completely. If this is unavoidable, the 1. Enter “Engineers Programming” mode and select “UDL/Digi
strongest signal will be found away from the metal roof or close to Options”, then select “Com Port Setup”. Ensure Com Port is
large external windows or skylights. programmed as “GSM Module”.
Avoid installing the aerial close (2 metres) to cable runs, ducting, 2. Now select the “Digi Options” menu and make sure that
structural metalwork, metal pipes, water tanks and electronic “Digi Option 1” is programmed for “Digi is Enabled”.
equipment, e.g. photocopiers, fax machines etc. These can have
3. Now select “Program Digi” and ensure the following
similar effects to metal roofs.
options are programmed for one of the ARC options:
Reliable operation is unlikely with a low signal strength. If the display
shows that the signal strength is 40% (-88dBm) or lower, you should a) Protocol: “SMS Messaging”.
improve the signal strength. This may be achieved by repositioning b) Primary No: The number of the recipient’s mobile
the aerial. The GPRS aerial lead should not be cut, therefore telephone.
repositioning the aerial may require that the Com GSM is also
c) Secondary No: Secondary mobile telephone number (if
repositioned.
required).
A mobile phone may be used to locate the point of strongest signal.
d) Account No: Leave blank.
The signal strength indicator is normally a bar or line at the side of
the display on the mobile telephone. e) Dialling Attempts: Program as required.
f) Report Areas: Program as required.
The ‘mobile phone’ method cannot provide information on the
availability, signal strength and interference status of all radio Base g) Reports: Program as required.
Stations in the surrounding area. h) Config.: Program as required.
The signal strength reading is indicated on the Com GSM unit by i) Protocol Options : Program as required.
use of LED's and can also be read from the keypad in the "Setup j) UDL Options : Change rings before answer to 1 if using
Modules" menu of UDL/Digi Options.
GSM Upload/Download.
When you have identified the point of the strongest signal, make a 4. All three status LED’s should now be on, if status LED 3 is
note of this point and use it when installing the Premier Elite Com off or flashing, this indicates a low GSM signal level. If the
GSM aerial. signal level is low, try moving the antenna to improve the
reception.
Installation
Using the SMS Control Commands
The Premier Elite Com GSM module should be installed as close
to the control panel as possible, so that the harness lead supplied Control commands can be sent to allow remote control and
with the unit is able to plug onto the control panel communication interrogation of the alarm system.
port.
1. Select the send text message option on your mobile
 The connection harness cannot be extended. 2.
telephone.
Enter the telephone number of the Premier Elite ComGSM
Route the harness lead into the module housing using the top left module.
cable entry and plug the connector onto COM1 () 3. Enter the text command, see SMS Control Commands.
1. Install the module in the required location using suitable 4. Select send on your mobile telephone.
fixings.
When using the SMS Control Commands shown in the tables below
2. Route the other end of the harness lead into the control panel the following should be noted:
housing. DO NOT CONNECT at this point.
???? = User code, this must proceed all commands.
3. Connect the GSM antenna to the antenna connector on the
[areas] = Areas 1 to 8 or A to P. If the areas are not specified then
module () and site the antenna as high as possible.
all areas will be selected.
4. Unlock the SIM socket by sliding the locking tab downwards. [s] = Send back status report
Insert the SIM card into the holder with the chamfered corner to (zones) = List of zones, each zone must separated by a space e.g.
the top left. Push the holder back into position and lock the 1 12 167 etc.
SIM by sliding the locking tab upwards.
(outputs) = List of outputs, e.g. 1234 etc.
 The SIM card must be inserted before connecting the

Premier Elite ComGSM module to the control panel, and
(message) = A maximum of 32 characters.
must not be removed until after the power supply to the

Premier Elite ComGSM module has been deactivated.
5. Set the option switches as required, see page 37.
6. Now connect the harness lead onto the control panel
communication port (COM 1 or 2 ).
The module should now be powered and the heartbeat LED ()
should be flashing.
38 INS176-9

Premier 48/88/168/640 & Premier Elite 24/48/88/168/640 SMS Control Commands h) For Upload/Download via Wintex edit the Account/Panel
Operation Command Example
“5678 arm s” = arm all areas and report
Details and fill in the IP address you have been given and
Arm System ???? arm [areas][s]
back status. Port number.
“5678 parm 1” = part arm 1 all areas (no
Part Arm System ???? parm (1/2/3)[s]
status) All three status LED’s should now be on, if status LED 3 is dim, this
“5678 darm abcs” = disarm areas abc and indicates a low GSM signal level. If the signal level is low, try moving
Disarm System ???? darm [areas][s]
report back status. the antenna to improve the reception.
Reset System ???? reset [areas] “5678 reset” = reset all areas
Omit Zone(s) ???? omit (zones) “5678 omit 1 5 12” = omit zones 1, 5 and 12
Unomit Zone(s) ???? uomit (zones) “5678 uomit 12” = reinstate zone 12
???? op on “5678 op on 134” = turn PC outputs 1, 3
Turn Outputs On
(outputs)[s] and 4 on.
???? op off “5678 op off 4s” = turn PC output 4 off and
Turn Outputs Off
(outputs)[s] report back status.
???? op on (outputs) “5678 op on p” = pulse PC output 2 on.
Pulse Outputs On
[p]
???? op off (outputs) “5678 op off p” = pulse PC output 2 off.
Pulse Outputs Off
[p]
“5678 mess How Are You” = Displays How
Send Message ???? mess (message)
Are You on all keypads.
“5678 status” =
Armed: (1 - 8 or A - P)
Alarm: (1 - 8 or A - P)
System Status ???? status Output: (1 - 8)
Mains: (OK or Fault)
Battery: (OK or Fault)
Phone Line: (OK or Fault)
“5678 status O” =
Armed: (1 - 8 or A - P)
Alarm: (A - P)
Channels: (1 - 8)
Output Status ???? status O Digi: (1 - 8)
Panel: (1 - 5)
Mains: (OK or Fault)
Battery: (OK or Fault)
Phone Line: (OK or Fault)
“5678 status R” =
Serial: ####### (only if Radio-Pad
fitted)
NUA: ###### (only if Radio-Pad
fitted)
GSM/Radio-Pad FSS: ### (only if Radio-Pad fitted)
???? status R
Status RSS: ### (only if Radio-Pad fitted)
BER: ### (only if Radio-Pad fitted)
CRC: ### (only if Radio-Pad fitted)
GSM-Signal: ###
GSM-BER: ###
What will be sent in the Text Message

The following information will be received in the text message:
My Home N a m e p r o g r a m m e d i n to p h o n e
3 Western Road U p to 1 6 c h a r a c te r s o f te x t ( th i s i s th e P r i n te r H e a d e r )
12:45.58 01/12 T i m e a n d D a te
Zone 003 Alarm E v e n t Ty p e
The Detector in
Z o n e /U s e r n a m e te x t
the Lounge
Area: A....... A r e a th a t c a u s e d th e e v e n t
Alarm Reporting & Upload/Download via IP

IP Mode (panel port programmed as ComIP, fixed
IP SIM card)
1. Enter “Engineers Programming” mode and select “UDL/Digi
Options”, then select “Com Port Setup”. Ensure Com Port is
programmed as “ComIP”. Leave the IP address, port &
gateway blank.
2. Now select the “Digi Options” menu and make sure that
“Digi Option 1” is programmed for “Digi is Enabled”.
3. Now select “Program Digi” and ensure the following options
are programmed for one of the ARC options:
a) Protocol:Program as required.
b) Account No: Program as required
c) Dialling Attempts: Program as required.
d) Report Areas: Program as required.
e) Reports: Program as required.
f) Config.: Program as required.
g) Protocol Options : Program as required.
INS176-9 39

AV Module Installation
General
Before connecting the AV Module, isolate ALL power from the control The installation of the ComIP module requires a basic understanding
panel (AC mains and battery), do not continue if there is still power of networking and TCP/IP protocol. If you are not familiar with these
present on the control panel. concepts, you may require assistance from an IT professional before
To install the AV Module onto the control panel: attempting to install the module.
The ComIP module is designed to be fitted inside the control panel
• Connect one end of the patch lead on to the Expansion Port of
and is powered via the harness connection. A suitable network cable
the AV Module
should be fed into the control panel to allow connection the module.
• Connect one other end of the patch lead on to the Expansion
Port of the control panel PCB Layout
Programming the AV Module
• Program the Expansion Port for AV Module operation (see page
94 for details)
• Refer to the AV Module installation guide for full programming
details.
ComIP Module
The ComIP module allows the Premier Elite control panels to be
connected to either a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area
Network (WAN). The internet is considered as a WAN. Once the
control panel is connected to a network the following features can be
achieved:
 5-way harness connection to control panel
• Upload/Download via Wintex UDL  ComIP Status LEDs
• Signal alarms to an Alarm Receiving Centre  Network status LED (Left)
• High security polling by Alarm Receiving Centre  Network status LED (Right)
Typical LAN configuration  RJ45 network Connection
 MAC address
Installation
1. Select “Engineers” mode on the control panel then remove
the control panel lid.
2. Choose a suitable location for the module. Remember to
allow enough space to plug in the network cable and
connect the harness lead (supplied).
3. Fit the 4 self adhesive feet supplied to the four mounting
holes. Remove the self adhesive backing paper and secure
to the base of the control panel.
4. Connect the 5-way end of the harness to the 5-way
connector on the module.
5. Connect the other end onto a control panel communication
port.
6. Connect the network cable to the RJ45 connection on the
module. The network status LED’s indicate the following:
Left LED Right LED Meaning
Off Off No Link

Typical WAN configuration Off Solid Amber 100BASE-T Half Duplex Link
Off Blinking Amber 100BASE-T Half Duplex; Activity
Off Solid Green 100BASE-T Full Duplex Link
Off Blinking Green 100BASE-T Full Duplex; Activity
Solid Amber Off 10BASE-T Half Duplex Link
Blinking Amber Off 10BASE-T Half Duplex; Activity
Solid Green Off 10BASE-T Full Duplex Link
Blinking Green Off 10BASE-T Full Duplex; Activity
40 INS176-9

Commissioning PRINT-Com
The control panel must be programmed correctly in order for the The PRINT-Com has two connectors. The 25-way D-type connector
module to function as expected. The following section covers the connects to a Serial Printer and the Molex connector plugs onto Com
items that need to be configured on the control panel in order to 1 on the control panel.
make the ComIP module operate correctly.
The actual details on how to program the following items can be
found in the relevant control panel installation manual.
ComIP Address
Each TCP/IP node on a network host has a unique IP address. This
address provides the information needed to forward packets on the
local network and across multiple networks if necessary.
Connecting a Computer
IP addresses are specified as x.x.x.x, where each x is a number from The 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 all support local uploading and
1 to 254; for example, 192.168.0.200. The ComIP must be assigned a downloading between the control panel and a PC running Wintex
unique IP address to use on a TCP/IP network. If the address is left UDL software. Uploading and Downloading can be used to program
blank or is programmed as 0.0.0.0 the ComIP module will try to and interrogate the control panel.
automatically obtain an IP address from a DHCP server (if one is In order for the computer to work correctly, ensure that it is set to the
running on the network). following:
• UDL Password (see page 91 for details)
ComIP Port
The port number used to identify the channel for remote initiated
connections. The default setting is 10001. The range for port settings
is: 1-65535 except for the following reserved ports:
Box
T am p
!
US E W IT H
T E XE CO M P S U
O NL Y
F7
J P10
F6
F2
K ic k
S ta rt
F9
C om 2 C o m 1
F8
Port Numbers Reserved for
Ne two r k 1
Ne two r k 2
1A m p
1A m p
F3 F5 F1
Au x 1 2v
1A mp
L o ad 1 0 0 m V = 1A m p
E xpa ns io n
E n g K ey pa d
De fa ults
J P7
V
B ell/S trb - 1Am p

He a r tbe a t
Tx 1 R x1 Tx 2 R x2
PC -C om
F4
1-1024 Reserved (well known ports)

9999 Telnet setup
14000-14009 Reserved
30718 Reserved
10000 - 10999 Recommended for raw socket connections
 In order to upload and download to the control panel locally, a
USB/PC-Com lead is required.
ComIP Gateway
The gateway address, or router, allows communication to other
LAN/WAN segments. The gateway address should be the IP address Connecting a Printer
of the router connected to the same LAN segment as the ComIP. The
gateway address must be within the local network. The 24, 48, 88,168 & 640 all support printer facilities. The printer is
connected to the Com 1 connector located on the control panel and
can be used to print the control panel event log.
ComIP Netmask
In order for the printer to work correctly, ensure that it is set to the
A netmask defines the number of bits taken from the IP address that following:
are assigned for the host section. The default mask is 255.255.255.0
(8 bits). • Baud Rate = 4800
• Parity = None
USB-Com • Start Bits =1
The USB-Com has two connectors. The USB connector is for connection
• Stop Bits =2
to a USB port on a computer and the Molex connector plugs onto a Com • Data Bits =8
port on the control panel. • DTR = Normal
• Columns = 40 or 80 (see page 65)
 In order to connect a printer to the control panel, a PRINT-Com

lead is required.
PC-Com
The PC-Com has two connectors. The 9-way D-type connector is for
connection to a serial port on a computer and the Molex connector plugs PRINT-Com
onto a Com port on the control panel. RS232 Data
Connect to
COM1
DATAC or RS232 printer
INS176-9 41

Commissioning and Troubleshooting Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
4. Commissioning and Troubleshooting

Commissioning Trouble-Shooting
Once ALL connections have been made to the control panel and Control Panel
power is ready to be applied, you should read this section before
continuing. No Power to unit (mains only)
When applying power for the first time, the factory default • Check the mains block fuse and replace if blown
settings must be loaded. The default settings ensure that the
control panel software is reset and all programming information
• Check for loose wires at the mains block, the transformer and
the AC terminals on the PCB
is loaded into memory. For a complete list of factory default
settings, see separate Quick Reference Guide. • Check the mains block is connected correctly; live to live
(brown), neutral to neutral (blue)
The factory default settings are loaded by applying power to the
control panel whilst at the same time, holding down the Factory No Power to unit (battery only)
Default button.
• Don’t forget to press the battery kick-start button
To default the control panel, proceed as follows:
• Check for loose wires at the BATT terminals on the PCB
• Connect the black battery lead to the negative (–) terminal of the • Check that the battery wires are connected correctly; red from
standby battery and the red battery lead to the positive (+) BATT+ to the battery positive (+), black from BATT- to the
terminal of the standby battery battery negative (-)
• Press and hold the Factory Default button
Heartbeat LED is not flashing
• Press the battery kick-start button to connect the battery and
• Remove ALL power (AC Mains and Battery) and then reapply
ensure that the green heartbeat light illuminates power again
• After the heartbeat light has illuminated, let go of the Factory
Default button (the heartbeat light will continue to flash whilst Network Data LED’s are not flashing
the factory default settings are being loaded, this can take up to • Remove ALL power (AC Mains and Battery) and remove ALL
30 seconds) wires from the network terminals. Then
re-apply power again before referring to the Network
• If the system goes into alarm, enter the default Engineer code
Diagnostics table on page 20
 , and the alarm tone will stop
• To access the Engineer Programming Menu, enter the default Keypads
Engineer code  Keypad does not operate
• The "Confirm Devices" menu will appear check and make sure • Check that the keypad is wired correctly from the control panel
all installed Keypads and Expanders are showing , press Yes (see page 20 for wiring details)
and Yes again to confirm.
• Check the network fuses F3 and F5 and replace if blown*
• Program the system as described in section 5 (Programming the
Control Panel) • Use the network diagnostics (see page 20 for details)
• Perform a zone test as described on page 115. Remember that
some powered detectors (e.g. PIR’s and combined technology
detectors) take up to 180 seconds to warm up and become
 *Only on 48/88/168
operational Keypad does not accept codes
• Test the internal sounder, external sounder and strobe as • If the system has more than one keypad check that each keypad is
described on page 115 addressed differently, see page 22 for details
• Replace the lid and secure with the lid screw supplied • If the keypad is on a long cable run, check the voltage between
the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals at the keypad and ensure that it
• Press  followed by YES to leave the programming menu, measures no less than 10.0V
the system will return to normal
• Check that you are using the correct User codes. The default
• The display will be showing that there is a ‘Mains Power Off’
condition. Switch on the AC mains supply to the control panel Engineer code is  and the default
• The normal banner message (if programmed) will now be Master User code is 
displayed • Check that the User code you are using is not ‘Time Locked’, if
the User code is time locked then the access code will only be
accepted when Control Timer 1 is off (see pages 68 and 110 for
Installation is now complete and the system is details)
ready for use.
Keypad zones do not operate
• Each keypad zone has to be mapped onto the system before it
can be used (see page 73 for details)
• The zone is not programmed (see page 48 for details)
Keypad emergency keys do not operate

• Each keypad can be configured so that the emergency keys PA,
FIRE and MEDICAL can be enabled or disabled. Check that the
keypad has been programmed correctly (see page 73 for
details)
42 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Commissioning and Troubleshooting
Expander Operation
Expander does not operate at all The system will not allow me to arm
• Check that the expander is wired correctly from the control • Check that there are no outstanding problems (see page 44 for
panel (see page 20 for wiring details) details)
• Check the network fuses F3 and F5 and replace if blown* • Check that there are no outstanding alarms that require resetting
• Check that the User code has been programmed to allow
 *Only on 48/88/168
•
arming (see page 110 for details)
Check that the User code has been assigned to the correct
System does not recognise zones areas (see page 107 for details)
• If the expander is on a long cable run, check the voltage • If a ‘Local’ User code is being used (see page 110 for details)
between the + and – terminals at the expander and ensure that ensure that the keypad being used is assigned to the correct
it measures no less than 10.0V area (see page 72 for details)
The speaker output does not work The system will not allow me to disarm
• The expander can be configured so that Alarm, Entry, Exit, • Check that the User code has been programmed to allow
Chime tones etc. can be enabled or disabled. Check that the disarming (see page 110 for details)
expander has been programmed correctly (see page 75 for
details) • Check that the User code has been assigned to the correct
area(s) (see page 107 for details)
• The speaker volume on the expander is electronically
adjustable. Check the volume is set to the desired level (see • If a ‘Local’ User code is being used (see page 110 for details)
page 75 for details) ensure that the keypad being used is assigned to the correct
area (see page 72 for details)
Zones
One or more zones show an alarm
• Check that the zone is wired correctly (see page 31 for wiring
details)
Communicator
The Communicator will not dial
• By default the communicator is disabled, check that the
communicator is enabled (see page 88 for details)
• Check that the telephone line has been correctly wired to the
communicator (see page 36 for wiring details)
• Check that the telephone numbers are programmed correctly
(see page 84 for details)
• Check that the account numbers are programmed correctly (see
page 84 for details)
• Check that the dial attempts are not programmed as zero (see
page 84 for details)
• Check that the reporting areas have been programmed correctly
• Check that the reporting options have been programmed
correctly (see page 78 for details)
Communicator dials but does not communicate

• Check that the telephone numbers are programmed correctly
• Check that the correct protocol is programmed (see page 87 for
details)
INS176-9 43

Commissioning and Troubleshooting Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
There are no ATS (Alarm Transmission

Reset and Service Messages 
 System) paths available.
When the system requires attention because of a potential problem,
The Standby Battery has not been
the display will show one of three service messages. These 
 connected,
messages can also be accessed at any time, allowing the user to
view installer information. There is a fault with the control panel

 standby battery or it is not connected.
 These messages would normally be programmed with the
telephone numbers of the installer or the Alarm Receiving 

Zones that have been placed on test
have failed the test.
Centre (see page 69 for details).
To display the service messages, proceed as follows:  There is a fault with the control panel lid
 tamper.
The display will normally show the time and date:
 There is a fault with the bell tamper on
  the control panel.

 There is a fault with the auxiliary tamper

Press  followed by  for the Service message:  on the control panel.

  The bell fuse on the control panel has
  blown.
The Auxiliary fuse on the control panel

Press  followed by  for the Reset message: 
 has blown.


  There is a fault with the lid tamper of
 Keypad X,X.
Press  followed by  for the Anti-code message:  Keypad X,X has been lost off of the
  system.


 There is a fault with the lid tamper of
 Expander X,X
Press  to exit from the message, the display will then return to
normal.  Expander X,X has been lost off of the
 system.
When alarm information is being displayed, pressing the SCROLL
key will slow down the display and also allow manual scrolling The voltage at expander X,X is very low.

through the events. 
Fault Warning Tones The expander’s Auxiliary input (that is


When a fault condition occurs i.e. mains fail, line fault etc. the internal  programmed as bell tamper) is in fault.
sounders will chime every 30 seconds for 3 minutes. The chiming will
automatically stop when a valid User code is entered, when  is  The expander’s Auxiliary input (that is
pressed or after 3 minutes (whichever occurs first). The fault
 programmed as aux tamper) is in fault.
indication will only be cleared from the display when the fault has
 The service timer has expired indicating
been rectified i.e. power, telephone line has been restored.  that the system requires a service (the
system can normally still be used).
Fault Messages
 There are system faults waiting to be  The user code is locked out (normally
 viewed, enter a valid user code to view
 during entry). The system must be
the faults. After entering a code faults will disarmed using a Prox TAG.
be displayed for 30 seconds. If the fault is
 To many invalid code attempts have
not reset within 30 seconds, this  caused the keypad to lock out. The
message will be displayed again.
keypad will remain like this for 5 minutes.
 The number of devices connected to the
  The keypad has been disabled to prevent
networks has changed from the last time  unauthorised access. The display will
a ‘Confirm Devices’ was done.
automatically clear when it is re-enabled.
 Engineer access is programmed for
  Areas are being armed using one of the
Engineer code + User code (see page  control timers (enter a valid User code to
64 for details).
defer the arming for 30 minutes).
 The Engineers code was entered when the
 system was fully armed (access to the
programming menu can only be gained
when the system is not fully armed.
 The alarm engineer has logged into the

 programming menu and is working on
site (this message will clear when the
engineer logs off or the system is armed).
 There has been an AC Mains failure.


 There is a fault with the ATS (Alarm

 Transmission System).
44 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Programming
5. Programming the Control Panel

Introduction
Sat 01 Jan 2000
All engineers should read this section carefully so as to familiarise
E nter En gineer s C ode
themselves with the programming of the control panel.
To access the Programming menu, enter the factory default YES to Select:-
Engineer code  . 1 Zone Setup
If a mistake is made whilst entering the Engineer code, simply YES to Select:-
re-enter the correct code. 2 Area Programming
YES to Select:-
WARNING 3 Global Options
YES to Select:-
When an Engineers code is entered to gain 4 Keypad Setup
access to the Programming menu, by default YES to Select:-

ALL zones and tampers are disabled. 5 Expander Setup
YES to Select:-
6 System Outputs
A menu option can then be selected by pressing one of the keys YES to Select:-
shown or by using the  key to search. Once selected, press 7 UDL/Digi Options
YES to access that option.
YES to Select:-
To leave the selected menu option and return to the main 8 Setup Users
programming menu, press . YES to Select:-

To exit from the Main Programming menu but still remain ‘Logged’ 9 Engineer Utils
onto the system (zones and tampers still disabled), press  and YES to Select:-
the display will show ‘Alarm Engineer Working On Site’. 0 Log off ENGINEER y
To log the Engineer off the system, press  followed by YES YES to Select:-
and the system will revert to its normal condition. P Part Arm Zones
The table below shows the menu options available: Do you want
N to EXIT & LOGOFF y
Key Menu Option Page Do you want
Zone Setup 48
N Arming Menu ?

Area Programming 54 Do you want
 N User Menu ?
Global Options 62
 YES to Select:-
 Keypad Setup 72 R Log off ENGINEER y

Expander Setup 74 Alarm Engineer
 R Working On Site.
System Outputs 76

UDL/Digi Options 83 O ut of P r ogr amm in g Menu
 ( Eng ineer S till Lo gg ed O n)
Setup Users 107

Engineer Utils 112

Alter Part Arms 123

The Arming Menu -

The User Menu -

Log Off Engineer 47

Exit programming mode 47

INS176-9 45

Programming the Control Panel Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Programming Menu Guide

Key Main Menu Key Sub Menu Key Main Menu Key Sub Menu
Zone Setup Learn/Delete Ricochet Engineer Utils View Event Log
  Device  
 Do Bell Test
 Zone Types
 
Zone Attributes 1 Do Walk Test
   
Zone Attributes 2 View Zone Status
   
Zone Areas
    System Tests
Zone Text
  Confirm Devices
  Zone Chime  
Remote Test View RKP Status
   
Zone Wiring View Exp. Status
   
Ricochet Device Mode Set System Time
   
Area Programming Timers
    Set System Date
Arming Modes
  Location Text
  Area Arm Suites  
Area Suite Text Print Log Data
   
Suite Arm Modes Soak Test Areas
   
Area Options Change Eng. Code
   
Time Arm Areas
    Adjust Volumes
Area Text
  Default NVM Data
 Global Options
 System Timers  
System Config. View iD Data
   
System Options Configure Radio
   
Monitor Hardware Ricochet Diag
   
Control Timers
   Part Arms
 Part Arm 1
System Text
  Part Arm 2
  Part Arm Text  
Holiday Dates Part Arm 3
   
Speaker Tones Arming Menu Exit Menu
   
PC Output Text Arm System
   
Custom O/P Text
    Part Arm System
Keypad Setup Areas
  Silent Arming
  Zone Mapping  
Options Omit Zones
   
Speaker Volume Cancel Exit
   
Sounder Options Disarm Areas
   
Expander Setup Areas
    Use Anti-code
Location Text
  View Zone Status
  Auxiliary Input  
Speaker Volume Omit 24Hr Zones
   
Sounder Options Set Chime Areas
   
System Outputs Panel Outputs View Act. Faults
   
Digi Outputs
    View Act. Counts
Com? Channels
  Send SMS Text
  RedCARE Pins  
Keypad Outputs Defer Arming
   
Expander Outputs User Menu Exit Menu
   
Custom Outputs View Event Log
   
X-10 Outputs
    Change Code
UDL/Digi Options Reset Digi
  Edit Chime Zones
  Test Com?  
Set Call Waiting System Tests
   
Program Digi Walk Test
   
Digi Options Enable Engineer
   
UDL Options
    Set System Time
Area Accounts
  Set System Date
  Radio/SMS Options  
Com Port Setup Override Timers
   
Setup Users Learn/Delete SmartKey Alter Timers
   
Assign SmartKey Routing Setup Users
  
 User Code Alter Part Arms
User Areas
 
    Call Remote PC
User Type
  Alter Hol. Dates
 (not always available)
 User Options  
(not always available) User Config. Adjust Volumes
   
User Time Lock Print Event Log
   
User Text Edit Phone No’s
   
(not always available) Door Control
   Exit programming menu (engineer still logged on)
Add TAG
  Log Off Engineer
  Add SmartKey™ 
46 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Programming the Control Panel
Programming Text Log Off Engineer

Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones. Characters
are selected by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate Whenever the Engineer Programming menu is exited by pressing
number of times (to select a character on the same key, press   twice, the display will look like this:
to move the cursor along).
 
The table below shows the keys to use and the characters that are  
assigned to them:
This message will remain on the display until the Engineer logs out of
the Programming menu.
Key Character
 _ 0  To log out of Engineer Programming menu, proceed as follows:
 . , ? ! 1 @ “ - & % / + = $ : ;
 A B C 2 a b c
Enter an Engineer code , the display should
look like this:
 D E F 3 d e f 
 G H I 4 g h i 
 J K L 5 j k l
 M N O 6 m n o
Press  or , the display should look like this:

 P Q R S 7 p q r s 
 T U V 8 t u V
 W X Y Z 9 w x y z Press  to return to normal, the display will look something like
this:
 Move Cursor 

 Backspace (delete)
 Copy Text The Engineer is now logged out of the Programming menu.
 Paste Text
 Predictive Text
 Upper/Lowercase, Predictive text and Clear Screen  The Engineer will be automatically logged out when the
Engineer Logoff Delay Timer Expires (See Page 63)
The control panel also features Predictive text. This can be used to
make inserting words easier, i.e. when spelling the word PIR, instead Resetting the Engineers Code (User 00)
of typing 7444777, all that you need to do is type 747 and the word is
If the Engineer code (User 00) has been lost or forgotten, it can
automatically selected.
normally be reset back to the factory default of
 . However, this can only be done if the NVM
 This feature can be turned on and off as required by pressing has not been locked (see page 64 for details).
the  key and can also be automatically selected every
To Reset the Engineer code (User 00):
time text mode is entered (see page 64 for details).
ENSURE THAT THE LID TAMPER IS CLOSED

Copying and Pasting
Hold down the ‘Factory Default’ button for 6 seconds (with the
When programming any items i.e. Zones, Timers, Options etc. control panel still powered), after 6 seconds, the sounders/keypads
pressing CHIME at any point will ‘Copy’ the information that has just will bleep to indicate that the Engineer code has been reset.
been programmed into memory. To program another item using the
information in memory, select the item and press PART to ‘Paste’ the
information.  NO other codes/programming will be affected, it is just the
User 00 Engineer code that will be reset.
 Copying and Pasting can only be performed whilst in the same

option i.e. if a zone has just been programmed as Guard
The Engineer (User 00) code can only be reset, if the NVM has not
been locked (see page 64 for details).
1/Omit/Access/Areas-ABC, ALL of that information can be
copied into memory so that when another zone is selected, the Other Things to Know
same information can then be quickly pasted to the other zone.
The  key will always return to the previous menu level. This is
The information held in memory after programming an item can only often the only way to exit an option after programming it. Pressing
be pasted into an item of the same type and cannot be used once
another option is selected i.e. Zone programming information cannot  several times will always return to the top level menu and the
be pasted into Timers etc. logout screen.
The ,,, and  keys often provide shortcuts or

extended functions, refer to individual programming options for
details.
INS176-9 47

Zone Setup Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5.1 Zone Setup

YES to Select:-
Zone Setup
y
Zone 001 Panel 1 E nter zone number
Entry/Exit 1 e.g. 004 = Zone 004
? Use hotkeys 1 - 8 to s elec t

a zone type or us e the
Pres s NO to edit S C R OL L key to s earc h
the zone type e.g. 3 = G uard
Zone 004 Panel 4 Zone 004 Panel 4 Zone 004 Panel 4

Entry/Exit 1 n Entry/Exit 1 < 3 Guard <
y
R
y
Pres s NO to Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t Pres s NO to
edit the zone an a ttribute or us e the s elect/des elect
a ttributes 1 S C R OL L key to s earc h the a ttribute
Zone 004 Attrib1 OMITTABLE

* * * * * * * * n >* * * * * * * * U ENTRY/EXIT 2
* * * * * *>* * n ENTRY/EXIT 2
* * * * * *>E *
y
R
y Pres s NO to Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t Pres s NO to
edit the zone an a ttribute or us e the s elect/des elect
a ttributes 2 S C R OL L key to s earc h the a ttribute
Zone 004 Attrib2

* * * * * * * * n DOUBLE KNOCK
>* * * * * * * * U AUTO RE-ARM
* * * * *>* * * n AUTO RE-ARM
* * * * *>A * *
y
Ry Pres s N O
to edit the Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elect a n a rea e.g. 2 = B . Us e the
zone areas ARE A key to toggle between a reas A to H and I to P.
For Premier 640 s ee below
Zone 004 Areas: Zone 004 Areas: Zone 004 Areas:

A....... n > A******* < 2 > AB****** <
y
R Us e keys 0 - 9 to progra m
y Pres s NO to text the sa me way tha t a
edit the mobile phone works
zone text e.g. 7, 444, 777 = P IR
Zone 004 Text:

n ^ 7 PIR
^
y
R
y Pres s N O
to C hange the
C hime type
Zone 001 Areas1 Us e the A k ey to s witch
Zone 004 Chime: A............... A between Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4
Silent n Zone 004
Chime
^ 1
Chime:
n
y U se the C hime &
R
Zone 001 Areas1
ABCDEFGH< ******* C/P Part keys
to sc roll between
Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4
Pres s N O
y to C hange the
Tes t type
Zone 004 Test: A Us e the Area key to s elect either

Remote Test On n Zone 004 Test:
Remote Test Off A-H or I-P a rea s .
Us e the numeric buttons 1-8 to
Zone 001 Areas1
toggle the required areas on or off
y *******>IJKLMNOP
y
48 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Zone Setup
Ricochet Devices MT2
Option Switches
In this mode only option switch 3 should be on.
Introduction
The firmware upgrade now requires that Ricochet™ devices are learned through the Zone Setup Menu, and Premier Elite SmartKey™ are learned
through the User Setup menu, the "Configure Radio" menu in Engineer's Utilities is now redundant and should not be used on MT2 systems.
Learning Devices
To learn a device to a Zone select the Zone from the Zone Setup Menu, Zones that are capable of having a Ricochet™ device learnt to them will
be displayed as follows:-
  

 
Fig 1
Fig 1indicates the pre-assigned zone number, the expander being used and the device slot on the expander.
Once a device has been learnt the display will be as Fig 2:-
  

 
Fig 2
If you are unsure if a zone already has a device learned to it, you can go to the menu as in Fig 1, press  and then  if a device is already
learnt the display will look like Fig 2, if not then it will look like Fig 3
  

 
Fig 3
Deleting Devices
To delete devices from the expander is the same as learning them; choose the zone you wish to delete, and follow the procedure to learn the
device, when the screen shows “Learning” press .
Learning Devices
Yes to Select:-
Zone Setup
Zone 009 Text:
y n*
Zone 001 Panel01 E nter zone number y
Not Used e.g 009 = Zone 009
Zone 009 Chime:
? Silent n*
Zone 009 XP01,01 y
Not Used n* Zone 009 Test:
R Remote Test Off n*
Zone 009 Learn: y
Learning... 20s
Zone 009 Mode:
nnR Hybrid n*
Zone 009 Learn: y
PIR XP-W01,01
Zone 009 Group:
y 00 n*
Zone 009 XP01,01 y
Not Used n*
Zone 009 Learn:
y PIR XP-W01,01
Us e the s c roll key
Zone 009 Attrib1
* * * * * * * * n* n R U to s elect the next
zone to learn a device too
y Zone 010 Learn:

Free XP-W01,02
Zone 009 Attrib2
* * * * * A * * n* n R y
y
Zone 009 Areas:
A....... n*
y
* Please refer to previous page for details on programming these

options
INS176-9 49

9 - Fire
Zone Types Normally used for monitoring smoke detectors. This zone type will
cause a Fire alarm with distinctive fire tone if it is activated when the
Each zone must be programmed before it is recognised by the
system/area is armed or disarmed. In addition, the bell output will
system.
pulse.
Zone numbers are entered as a three digit number i.e. Zone 1 would
10 - Medical
be entered as 001. Each zone consists of a zone type, attributes,
This zone type will cause a Silent alarm if it is activated when the
areas and zone text.
system/area is armed or disarmed. The panel will also report a
When programming zones, first select a zone type then select any Medical alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using ‘Contact ID’
required attributes, assign the zone to an area and then program any reporting.
required zone text.
11 - 24Hr Gas
Zone Type + Zone Attributes + Zone Areas + Zone Text = Zone This zone type will cause an Audible alarm if it is activated when the
Programmed. system/area is armed or disarmed. The panel will also report a 24-
Hour Gas alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using ‘Contact
The following zone types are available: ID’ reporting.
0 - Not used 12 - Auxiliary
A zone that is not monitored by the system, unused zones should be This zone type will cause a Silent alarm if it is activated when the
programmed as ‘Not Used’ or linked out. system/area is armed or disarmed. The panel will also report an
1 - Entry/Exit 1 Auxiliary alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using ‘Contact
Normally used for the main entry/exit door i.e. Front Door. The zone can ID’ reporting.
be activated during the exit mode without causing a ‘Fault’. Once the 13 - Tamper
system/area is armed, activation of the zone will start the ‘Entry 1 Delay’ This zone type will cause an Internal alarm if it is activated when the
timer for the selected area. system/area is disarmed and will cause an Intruder alarm when the
2 - Entry/Exit 2 system/area is armed.
Normally used for another entry/exit door that requires a different 14 - Exit Terminator
entry delay i.e. Back Door, Garage Door etc. The zone can be This zone type is used to finalise the arming procedure when arming
activated during the exit mode without causing a ‘Fault’. Once the the system/area (see page 55 for details).
system/area is armed, activation of the zone will start the ‘Entry 2
Delay’ timer for the selected area. 15 - Moment Key
This zone type can be used to arm and disarm one or more areas.
When the zone is activated and then secured the areas assigned to the
 If any Entry/Exit zone remains active at the end of the entry time, it will
automatically be omitted until the system has been unset and re-set.
zone will arm. When the zone is subsequently activated and then
secured the system will disarm the areas assigned to the zone. Tamper
faults will not arm or disarm anything, but will cause a Tamper alarm.
If an Entry/Exit zone type is locked out, ‘Guard Access’ zones in the
same area as the omitted Entry/Exit zone will automatically become 16 - Latch Key
‘Entry/Exit 1’ zones to allow access into the premises without causing This zone type can be used to arm and disarm one or more areas.
an alarm. When the zone is activated, the areas assigned to the zone will arm.
If an ‘Entry/Exit 1 or 2’ zone type is assigned the ‘Entry/Exit 2’ attribute (see When the zone is secured, areas assigned to the zone will disarm.
page 51), when a zone with the ‘Guard’ attribute activates and causes an Tamper faults will not arm or disarm anything, but will cause a
alarm (when the area is fully armed), the zone will become a ‘Guard’ zone for Tamper alarm.
the duration of the ‘Abort’ timer.
17 - Security
3 - Guard This zone type can be used to Lockout keypads. When the zone is
Normally used for detection devices such as PIR’s, Door Contacts etc. activated, keypads assigned to the same area will not accept any key
This zone type will cause an Intruder alarm if it is activated when the presses. When the zone is secured, all keypads respond as normal.
system/area is armed. This zone type will also activate any output
programmed as ‘Guard Alarm’. 18 - Omit Key
This zone type will isolate any zone assigned to the same area as
4 - Guard Access long as it has the ‘Omit’ attribute.
Normally used for detection devices along the entry/exit route. This
zone type will allow the user to walk past the detector without causing a 19 - Custom
‘Fault’ during the exit mode or an Intruder alarm during the entry mode, This zone type can be programmed to operate as required using its
however, the zone will cause an immediate Intruder alarm if activated at own set of attributes (see page 52 for details).
any other time. This zone type will also start the entry mode when the 20 - Conf PA audible
system/area is part armed and activate any output programmed as This zone type is for use with multi action PA buttons, or where a
‘Guard Access Alarm’. confirmed PA is required, and will activate local sounders.
5 - 24Hr Audible 21 - Conf PA silent
This zone type will cause an internal alarm if it is activated when the This zone type is for use with multi action PA buttons, or where a
system/area is disarmed and will cause an Intruder alarm when the confirmed PA is required, and will not activate local sounders.
system/area is armed. The panel will also report a ‘24-Hour’ alarm to
the Alarm Receiving Centre when using ‘Contact ID’ reporting.
6 - 24Hr Silent
This zone type will cause a silent alarm if it is activated when the
system/area is disarmed and will cause an Intruder alarm when the
system/area is armed. The panel will also report a ‘24-Hour’ Alarm to
the Alarm Receiving Centre when using ‘Contact ID’ reporting.
7 - PA Audible
Normally used for monitoring Panic or hold-up alarms. This zone
type will cause a Panic alarm if it is activated when the system/area is
armed or disarmed.
8 - PA Silent
Normally used for monitoring Panic or hold-up alarms. This zone
type will cause a silent Panic alarm if it is activated when the
system/area is armed or disarmed.
50 INS176-9

Zone Attributes 1 Zone Attributes 2

Attributes can be assigned to a zone to alter its operation i.e. a Guard Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display
zone with the ‘Access’ attribute will allow the user to walk past the means the attribute is selected, a Dot on the display means the
detector without causing a ‘Fault’ during the exit mode or an Intruder attribute is not selected).
alarm during the entry mode.
The following attributes are available:
Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display
means the attribute is selected, a Dot on the display means the D - DOUBLE KNOCK
attribute is not selected). Zones with this attribute will only cause an alarm if it is activated twice
within the ‘Double Knock’ time window or for the duration of the time
The following attributes are available: window.
O - OMITTABLE Zones without this attribute will respond as normal.
Zones with this attribute can be manually omitted. B - BEAM PAIR
Zones without this attribute cannot be manually omitted. Zones with this attribute will only cause an alarm if two zones
F - FORCE OMIT (assigned to the same area) with this attribute are activated within the
‘Beam Pair’ time window.
Zones with this attribute will be omitted if they are not secure at the
end of the exit mode. Zones without this attribute will respond as normal.
Zones without this attribute will cause an ‘Arm Fail’ if they are not T - ON TEST
secure at the end of the exit mode. Zones with this attribute will be put on soak test for the duration of
1 - PART 1 OMIT the soak test timer (see page 62), when the area soak test option is
selected (see page 120)
Zones with this attribute will be omitted when ‘Part Arm 1’ is selected.
Zones without this attribute will respond as normal.
A - ACTIVITY
2 - PART 2 OMIT
Zones with this attribute will cause an activity fault to be displayed at
Zones with this attribute will be omitted when ‘Part Arm 2’ is selected. the time of arming if they have not been activated during the ‘Activity
Zones without this attribute will respond as normal. Delay’ period. If ‘Config. option 14’ (see page 64 for details) has been
set to ‘Activity Fault Bar’ the system/area cannot be armed until the
3 - PART 3 OMIT
zone has been activated (forced walk test).
Zones with this attribute will be omitted when ‘Part Arm 3’ is selected.
R - RESET
A - ACCESS
Zones with this attribute will not be monitored during the ‘Detector
Zones with this attribute will not cause a ‘Fault’ during the exit mode Reset’ period i.e. when the exit mode is started and power is
or an Intruder alarm during the entry mode. However, if the zone is removed from certain detectors (to reset them) the ‘Fault’ on the zone
activated at any other time an Intruder alarm will occur. is ignored.
Zones without this attribute will respond as normal. Zones without this attribute will be monitored as normal.
E - ENTRY/EXIT 2 A - AUTO RE-ARM
Zones with this attribute will start the ‘Entry Delay 2’ timer for the Zones with this attribute will only re-arm at the end of the bell
selected area when the area is part armed. duration providing that the ‘Re-arm’ limit has not been reached (see
page 67 for details). Once this limit has been reached, the zone will
 ‘Entry/Exit 1 or 2’ zones with this attribute will become a ‘Guard’

zone for the duration of the ‘Abort’ timer if a zone with the
lock out and not cause any further Intruder alarms.
Zones without this attribute will always re-arm at the end of the bell
‘Guard’ attribute activates and cause an alarm (when the area is duration.
fully armed). Q - QUICK RESPONSE.
Zones without this attribute will respond as normal. The response time of the zones with this attribute is governed by the
G - GUARD ‘Zone Loop’ response Timer (see page 62 for details).
Zones with this attribute will cause an Intruder alarm when the area is The response time of a zone without this attribute is fixed at 250mS.
part armed (this would normally be used on ‘Entry/Exit 1 or 2’ zone E – ENGINEER ALARM
types).
Zones with this attribute will cause an Intruder alarm when activated if
the engineer arms the system/area.
 When the area is fully armed, activation of a zone with this
attribute will cause any ‘Entry/Exit 1 or 2’ zone with the
Zones without this attribute will not cause an Intruder alarm when
activated if the engineer arms the system/area.
Entry/Exit 2 attribute to become a ‘Guard’ zone for the duration
of the ‘Forced Entry’ timer.
INS176-9 51

Attributes for Moment or Latch Keys Zone Areas 24/48/88/168

Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display The 24 can be divided into two separate areas of protection, the 48 can
means the attribute is selected, a Dot on the display means the be divided into four separate areas of protection, the 88 can be divided
attribute is not selected). into eight separate areas of protection, and the 168 can be divided into
sixteen separate areas of protection. This allows different parts of a
The following attributes are only available for ‘Moment Key’ or ‘Latch building to be armed and disarmed independently from each other. By
Key’ zone types. default all zones are assigned to area A, but if required, a zone can be
I - INSTANT ARM assigned to any number of areas.
When using a key switch, the area will arm instantly.
P - PART ARMING  If a zone is assigned to more than one area, it will only be
recognised by the system when all areas it is assigned to, are
When using a key switch, the area will ‘Part’ arm. armed.
F – FULL ARM DISABLE
When using a key switch to ‘Full’ arm an area, the key switch is Zone Areas 640
disabled once the area is armed. The 640 can be divided into sixty four separate areas of protection. This
D - DISARM ONLY allows different parts of a building to be armed and disarmed
independently from each other. By default all zones are assigned to area
The key switch cannot be used for ‘Arming’ (it can only be used for
A, but if required, a zone can be assigned to any number of areas.
‘Disarming’).
F - SILENTARMING
When arming using a key switch, the selected areas will arm silently.
 If a zone is assigned to more than one area, it will only be
recognised by the system when all areas it is assigned to, are
armed.
T - TIME ARM DISABLE
Activation of the key switch will override the ‘Time Arming’ feature on Programming of Zone Areas for the 640 has additional requirements.
the control panel and prevent it from operating until the zone is
Areas on the 640 are divided into 4 sets of 16 areas identified by the
reinstated.
table below.
K - KEY TUBE
Area Groups Area's
A key switch zone type with this attribute will log when the zone is
1 A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,
activated and also when the zone is restored.
Attributes for Custom Zones
means the attribute is selected, a Dot on the display means the Zone 001 Areas1
A............... A Us e the A k ey to s witch
between Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4
attribute is not selected).
The following attributes are only available for ‘Custom’ zone types. n
Us e the C hime &
I - INTERNAL Zone 001 Areas1
to s croll between
Activation of this zone (when armed) will cause the internal sounders Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4
to activate.
B - BELL/STROBE
Activation of this zone (when armed) will cause the external A Us e the Area k ey to s elect either
A-H or I-P a rea s .
sounder/strobe to activate. Zone 001 Areas1 Us e the numeric buttons 1-8 to
*******>IJKLMNOP toggle the required areas on or off
M - MONITOR 24Hr
The zone is armed at all times.
Zone Text
C - ENABLE COMS
Activation of this zone (when armed) will cause the area ‘Alarm’ Each zone can have up to 32 characters of descriptive text assigned to it.
output to activate. Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones. Select characters
by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times (to
 Any Custom zone with this attribute will activate both the
internal and external sounders even if they are not enabled
select a character on the same key, press
along).
 to move the cursor
above. For a more information, see page 47.
W - WARNING REQ. The control panel also features Predictive text. This can be used to
If the zone remains Active for the duration of the ‘Warning Delay’ make inserting words easier, i.e. when spelling the word PIR, instead
timer (see page 63), a warning tone will occur every 30 seconds for 3 of typing 7444777, all that you need to do is type 747 and the word is
automatically selected.
minutes (or until a code is entered or  is pressed).
 If MONITOR 24Hr is enabled, an internal alarm will occur after  This feature can be turned off if required by pressing the
key and can also be automatically selected every time text

the Warning Delay. mode is entered.
Zone Chime
Each zone can be programmed to chime the internal sounders using one
of the available chime tones when activated.
52 INS176-9

• Exp O/P 1-2*

Remote Test Enable • Exp O/P 3-4*
Any zone with this attribute will be tested when the remote test • Exp O/P 5-6*
function is initiated from Wintex. Any detector on a zone with the • Exp O/P 7-8*
remote test attribute will be expected to go into alarm during the • Exp O/P 1-3*
remote test, if it does not go into alarm, the detector will be reported • Exp O/P 4-6*
as faulty. * For Future Use
Zone Groups
 This facility is only to be used in conjunction with system
output type 47 ‘Detector Test’ see page 78.
Zone groups allow multiple zones to be assigned to a Zone Group
Output. Once assigned triggering any of the zones assigned to the
group will trigger the output.
Zone Wiring The default option for each Zone is 0 and means the Zone is not
assigned to any group.
Zone wiring connections are shown on page 31 the following
programming options are available. Please see page 82 for the programming options for the Zone Group
Output Type.
0 - Normally Closed
For use on normally closed devices without tamper protection.
Normally used for keyswitches. See Normally Closed wiring diagram
Panel Output Groups
on page 31 24 2
1 - Normally Open 48 4
For use on normally closed devices without tamper protection.
Normally used for keyswitches. See Normally Open wiring diagram 88 8
on page 31
168 16
2 - Double Pole/EOL
Default zone wiring configuration. 640 64
3 - Triple EOL
Standard Texecom TEOL, use this wiring type for all Texecom anti
masking detectors. DD 243
4 - 1K/1K/(3K) To comply with DD 243, during the normal entry delay, the control
Alternative TEOL configuration with 1K alarm resistor, 3K fault resistor panel must prevent a Confirmed Intruder Alarm from being reported
and 1K EOL resistor to the Alarm Receiving Centre.
5 - 4K7/6k8/(12K)
Alternative TEOL configuration with 6K8 alarm resistor, 12K fault
resistor and 4K7 EOL resistor. WARNING
6 - 2K2/4K7/(6k8) Owing to the ability to disable ALL of the
Alternative TEOL configuration with 4K7 alarm resistor, 6K8 fault confirmation facilities, the customer should be
resistor and 2K2 EOL resistor advised in writing by the alarm company that ALL
7 - 4K7/4k7 means of alarm confirmation are disabled when the
Alternative EOL configuration with 4K7 alarm resistor and 4K7 EOL initial entry door is opened. The alarm company
resistor. should then obtain written acceptance from the
8 - WD Monitor customer of the disabling of the means of alarm
Specialised wiring configuration for monitoring warning devices with confirmation.
fault reporting capability. Only use this wiring type on zones types
programmed as Auxiliary. Normally wired as a Normally Closed
circuit.
Ricochet Device Mode
Ricochet Device Mode determines how wireless devices will operate
on the system. This option only appears in the menu after a device
has been learned to the zone, and replaces the wiring type options.
• Always Awake
o This mode should only be used on devices which are
required to signal at all times and is the default setting
for the Impaq Contact-W and Impaq Plus-W.
• Hybrid
o Hybrid mode is used to control the reporting functions
for devices. When in the mode devices are asleep
when the system is set, and are woken up by the
control panel at the point of arming. When the system
is disarmed the devices will be put back to sleep. This
mode of operation is the default mode for XT-W, QD-
W & DT-W.
• Auto
o When in Auto Mode, devices poll at 15 minute
intervals. Following activation, devices will not
transmit the same activation again for a period of 3
minutes.
INS176-9 53

Area Programming Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5.2 Area Programming

Timers
 The area bell timers in options 5, 6 and 8 below are only active
when system config option 5 is switched to ‘Area Bell Time’.
YES to Select:-
Area Programming Timers listed are for Areas A to B (A to D) (A to H) (A to P)
(1,2,3,4, A-P) depending on the panel being used.
y
1 - Exit Delay
Area Programming When the area exit mode is programmed as ‘Timed’ this timer
Timers
controls the delay between the user initiating the exit mode for the
y selected area and the area actually.
2 - Entry 1 Delay
A> Exit Delay If the area is armed and an ‘Entry/Exit 1’ zone is activated, this timer
030 Second(s)
Us e the S C RO LL key to will start and the entry tone will be heard. If the area is not disarmed
s elect an a rea
U F or 640 s ee below
before this timer expires, the ‘2nd Entry Delay’ timer will start.
3 - Entry 2 Delay
B> Exit Delay
030 Second(s) If the area is armed and an ‘Entry/Exit 2’ zone is activated, this timer
Pres s YE S to move to will start and the entry tone will be heard. If the area is not disarmed
the required timer group
Ry or pres s RE S E T to move
ba ckwa rds e.g. YE S
before this timer expires, the ‘2nd Entry Delay’ timer will start.
4 - 2nd Entry Dly
B> Entry 1 Delay
020 Second(s) When the area ‘Entry Delay 1 or 2’ timer expires, this timer will start
E nter a new timer value and an Internal alarm will occur. If the area is still not disarmed before
? e.g. 025 = 25 S econds this timer expires, an Intruder alarm will then occur.
B> Entry 1 Delay 5 - Bell Delay

>025 Second(s) This timer controls the delay between an Intruder alarm occurring in
the selected area and the ‘Bell/Strobe’ output activating.
y
6 - Bell Duration
This timer controls the duration of the ‘Bell’ output after an Intruder alarm
has occurred in the selected area and any programmed ‘Bell Delay’ has
Us e the S C R O LL key
expired.
1A> Exit Delay to s elect areas between
030 Second(s) 1A - 4P
7 - Coms Delay.
This timer controls the delay between an Intruder alarm occurring in the
selected area and the communicator reporting to the Alarm Receiving
Centre.
These groups of ‘Area’ timers control timing and delay functions for
areas A - B (24) A - D (48), A - H (88) and 8 - Part Bell Dly. for Areas A to D (A to H) (A to P)
A - P (168) & groups 1-4 Area A-P (640) Each timer can be When the selected area is ‘Part Armed’ this timer controls the delay
programmed for any value between 000 and 999. between an Intruder alarm occurring in the selected area and the
‘Bell/Strobe’ output activating, the internal sounders will also sound
during this time as a warning.
9 – Confirm PA Timer, for Areas A to B (A to D) (A to H) (A to P)
(1A to 4P)
When a Panic Alarm is raised in any area a confirm PA timer is
started for that specific area. If a second PA alarm (including tamper
from any other device in the same area) is raised while the PA timer
is active a Confirmed PA Alarm is raised.
54 INS176-9

P Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Area Programming
Arming Modes Area Arm Suites 24/48/88/168
YES to Select:- YES to Select:-

Area Programming Area Programming
y y
Timers Timers
1 2
Arming Modes Area Arm Suites
y y
Area A Arm by: Area Arm Suite 1
Timed exit A.......
Us e keys 1 - 8 to select a n
U to s elect a n area 4 Area Arm S uite or us e the
S C R O LL key to search e.g. 4
Area B Arm by: Area Arm Suite 4

Timed exit ...D....
Us e keys 1 - 5 to s elect Pres s NO to edit
1 an a rming mode
e.g. 1 = E ntry/E xit
n the Pa rt Arm S uite
Area Arm Suite 4

Area B Arm by: > ***D**** <
> Entry/Exit Us e keys 1 - 8 to select a n
a rea e.g. 3 = C . Us e the
y 3 AR E A key to toggle between

area s A to H a nd I to P
Area Arm Suite 4
> **CD**** <
The way that an area arms can be configured for any of the following
options: y
1 - Entry/Exit
The area will arm after the ‘Entry/Exit’ door has been closed and the
‘Exit Settle’ timer has expired. The 24 has 2 Area Arm Suites the 48 has 4 Area Arm Suites the 88
has 8 Area Arm Suites the 168 has 16 Area Arm Suites. Any number
2 - Exit Term. of areas can be assigned to each suite. Areas assigned to an Area
The area will arm after the ‘Entry/Exit’ door has been closed, the ‘Exit Arm Suite will be armed when the suite is selected, making it easier
Terminator’ button has been pressed and the ‘Exit Settle’ timer has for the user to select multiple areas if required.
expired.
Example
3 - Timed Exit Area Arm Suites could be useful in a domestic situation where the
The area will arm after the programmed ‘Exit Time’ has expired. user wants to arm areas A and B at night but does not want to select
each area individually.
 If an ‘Exit Terminator’ zone is activated at any point during the

exit mode, any remaining exit time is cancelled and the area
• Areas ‘A and B ‘ would be assigned to ‘Area Arm Suite 1’
will arm immediately. • When the user wants to arm the system at night, ‘Area Arm Suite
1’ would be selected
4 - Instant
The area will arm instantly. • Areas A and B are automatically selected for arming
5 - Deferred
The area will arm after the programmed ‘Exit Time’ has expired.
However, if any zones not on the exit route are activated during the
 Descriptive text may also be assigned to the Area Arm Suite
exit mode, the ‘Exit Time’ is restarted.
Area Arm Suite Controller
The suites can be assigned to keypads so that different combinations
of areas can be armed or disarmed depending on which keypad is
used (see page 73 for details) and operates as follows:
• Keypad 1 = Area Arm Suite 1, Keypad 2 = Area Arm Suite 2,
Keypad 3 = Area Arm Suite 3 etc.
• When a User code is entered at a keypad, one of the ‘Area Arm
Suites’ is selected (depending on which keypad was used) and
the areas contained within that suite arm using the arming mode
for that suite, the keypad sounder will also follow the areas
defined by the suite.
INS176-9 55

Area Arm Suites 640 Area Suite Text

y y
Timers Timers
2 3
Area Arm Suites Area Suite Text
y y
Suite01 ArmArea1 SUITE 1
................ Area Arm Suite 1
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t
Us e the Area key to s elect
A the Arm Area 1-4 4 a n Area Arm S uite or us e the

................ Area Arm Suite 4
Pres s NO to edit P res s NO to edit the
n the Part Arm S uite n Area Arm S uite text

ABCDEFGH<....... Êdit Text >ABC
Us e the C hime & Pa rt keys
to s elect the Arm Area. Us e keys 0 - 9 to progra m
? Us e the Area key to toggle ? text the sa me way tha t a
mobile phone works
between Areas A to H
Suite01 ArmArea4 and I to P. Us e the 1-8 keys to
ABCDEFG>........ toggle the Area s on & off Bedtime Setting
Edit Text >A^C
y y
The 640 has 4 groups of 16 Arm suites. Any number of areas can be Text may be assigned to the Area Arm Suites to allow the user to select
assigned to each suite. Areas assigned to an Area Arm Suite will be the suites by description instead of number. Up to 16 characters of text
armed when the suite is selected, making it easier for the user to can be programmed for each suite.
select multiple areas if required.
Example
Example Text descriptions for the Area Arm Suites could be useful where more
Area Arm Suites could be useful in a domestic situation where the than one suite has been defined. The user wishes to arm areas A and
user wants to arm areas A and B at night but does not want to select B at night but is not too sure which suite to select.
each area individually.
• Areas ‘A and B’ would be assigned to ‘Area Arm Suite 1’ (see
• Areas ‘A and B ‘ would be assigned to ‘Area Arm Suite 1’ page 55 for details)
• When the user wants to arm the system at night, ‘Area Arm Suite • When the user wants to arm the system at night, ‘Area Arm Suite
1’ would be selected 1’ would be selected
• Areas A and B are automatically selected for arming • Text will be displayed to confirm that the selected suite is correct
i.e. ‘Bedtime Setting’
 Descriptive text may also be assigned to the Area Arm Suite

• Areas A and B are automatically selected for armed
Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones. Select

Area Arm Suite Controller characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate
The suites can be assigned to keypads so that different combinations
of areas can be armed or disarmed depending on which keypad is
number of times (to select a character on the same key, press 
to move the cursor along).
used (see page 73 for details) and operates as follows:
• Keypad 1 = Area Arm Suite 1, Keypad 2 = Area Arm Suite 2,
When a User code is entered at a keypad, one of the ‘Area Arm
Suites’ is selected (depending on which keypad was used) and the
areas contained within that suite arm using the arming mode for that
suite, the keypad sounder will also follow the areas defined by the
suite.
56 INS176-9

Suite Arm Modes Area Options 24/48/88/168

y y
Timers Timers
4 5
Suite Arm Modes Area Options
y y
Suite 1 Arm by: Auto Part Arm
Timed exit A.......
Us e the S C RO LL
U to s elect a suite U key to s elect an
area option
Suite 2 Arm by: Remote Arm

Timed exit A.......
Us e keys 1 - 5 to s elect
Pres s NO to cha nge
1 an a rming mode
e.g. 1 = E ntry/E xit
n the a rea option
Suite 2 Arm by: Remote Arm

> Entry/Exit > A******* <
Us e keys 1 - 8
y 4 to s elect a n a rea
e.g. 4 = D
Remote Arm
> A**D**** <
The way that an Area Arm Suite arms when selected, can be
configured for any of the following options:
y
1 - Entry/Exit
The suite will arm after the ‘Entry/Exit’ door has been closed and the
‘Exit Settle’ timer has expired. Area Options 640
2 - Exit Term.
The suite will arm after the ‘Entry/Exit’ door has been closed, the ‘Exit YES to Select:-
Area Programming
Terminator’ button has been pressed and the ‘Exit Settle’ timer has
expired. y
3 - Timed Exit (Default for All Areas) Area Programming
The suite will arm after the programmed ‘Exit Time’ has expired. Timers
5
 If an ‘Exit Terminator’ zone is activated at any point during the
exit mode, any remaining exit time is cancelled and the area Area Programming
Area Options
will arm immediately.
4 - Instant y
The suite will arm instantly.
Auto Part Arm 1
A...............
5 - Deferred Us e the S c roll Key to s elect
The suite will arm after the programmed ‘Exit Time’ has expired. ? the option.
However, if any zones not on the exit route are activated during the Us e the Area key to s elect
the Arm Area 1-4
exit mode, the ‘Exit Time’ is restarted. Auto Part Arm 1
A...............
Pres s NO to edit
n the option
Auto Part Arm 1

A.......<....... Us e the C hime & Part keys
to s elect the Arm Area .
Us e the Area key to toggle
4 between Areas A to H
and I to P. Us e the 1-8 keys to
Auto Part Arm 1 toggle the Area s on & off
ABC.............
INS176-9 57

These options control how various features affect each area. Any
number of areas can be assigned to each option.
1 - Auto Part Arm
 If ‘Anti-code Reset’ is enabled (option 14) the assigned areas
can also be reset using the Anti-code
Areas assigned to ‘Auto Part Arm’ will fully arm if an ‘Entry/Exit’ zone
is activated during the exit mode and will ‘Part Arm 1’ if an ‘Entry/Exit’ Areas not assigned to ‘Confirmed Reset’ can only be reset with any
zone is not activated during the exit mode. User code that is valid for those areas providing that ‘Alarms Eng
Reset’ (option 14) is also programmed for user reset.
Areas not assigned to ‘Auto Part’ will always fully arm.
13 - Tamper Eng Reset
2 - Part Arm Instant Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following a
Areas assigned to ‘Part Arm Instant’ will arm instantly when part Tamper alarm (when the area is unarmed). Areas assigned to ‘Tamper
arming. Eng Reset’ will respond as follows:
Areas not assigned to ‘Part Arm Instant’ will use the area exit timer
when part arming. • The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code
3 - Part Arm Silent

• If ‘Anti-code Reset’ is enabled (option 14) the assigned areas
Areas assigned to ‘Part Arm Silent’ will never generate Exit tones
when part arming. Areas not assigned to ‘Tamper Eng Reset’ can be reset with any User
code that is valid for those areas.
Areas not assigned to ‘Part Arm Silent’ will always generate Exit
tones when part arming. 14 - Anti-code Reset
Each area can be programmed for Anti-code Reset following an
4 - Remote Arm
Intruder or Tamper alarm. Areas assigned to ‘Anti-code Reset’ will
Areas assigned to ‘Remote Arm’ can be armed remotely using the
respond as follows:
Wintex UDL software and a PC.
Areas not assigned cannot be armed remotely. • The assigned areas can be reset using the Anti-code as well as
an Engineer code
5 - Remote Disarm
Areas not assigned to ‘Anti-code Reset’ can only be reset using an
Areas assigned to ‘Remote Disarm’ can be disarmed remotely using
Engineer code or User code.
the Wintex UDL software and a PC.
Areas not assigned to ‘Remote Arming’ cannot be disarmed
remotely.  Areas can only be assigned to ‘Anti-code Reset’ if they are
also assigned to ‘Alarms Eng Reset’.
6 - Panel Tamper
Areas assigned to ‘Panel Tamper’ will cause a Tamper alarm when 15 - ATS Path Faults
the control panel cover is removed. Areas assigned to ‘ATS Path Faults’ (ATS = Alarm Transmission
System) will respond as follows when an ATS fault occurs.
Areas not assigned to ‘Panel Tamper’ will never cause a Tamper
alarm when the control panel cover is removed. • All keypads will display ‘ATS Path Fault’
7 - Bell Tamper • All keypads and speakers assigned to the same area as the
Areas assigned to ‘Bell Tamper’ will cause a Tamper alarm when the ‘ATS Path Fault’ will generate a Service tone every 30 Seconds
Bell tamper loop is broken. until the fault is acknowledged by the User entering a valid code
Areas not assigned to ‘Bell Tamper’ will never cause a Tamper alarm for that area
when the bell tamper loop is broken. • An assigned area can be armed, as long as ‘Arm With No ATS’ is
8 - Auxiliary Tamper also assigned to that area (see option 16). However, a warning will
Areas assigned to ‘Auxiliary Tamper’ will cause a Tamper alarm when be given to indicate the problem
the Auxiliary tamper loop is broken. Areas not assigned to ‘ATS Path Faults’ will never be affected by an
Areas not assigned to ‘Auxiliary Tamper’ will never cause a Tamper alarm ATS fault.
when the auxiliary tamper loop is broken. 16 - Arm With No ATS
Areas assigned to ‘Arm With No ATS’ (ATS = Alarm Transmission
9 - Panel Speaker System) can be armed when an ATS fault occurs in those areas (see
Areas assigned to ‘Panel Speaker’ will cause the control panel option 15).
speaker to activate when those areas are in alarm, entry and exit etc.
Areas not assigned to ‘Arm With No ATS’ can never be armed when
Areas not assigned to ‘Panel Speaker’ will never cause the control panel an ATS fault occurs in those areas (see option 15).
speaker to activate when those areas are in alarm, entry and exit etc.
17 - AC Mains Fail
10 - Bell & Strobe op Areas assigned to ‘AC Mains Fail’ will respond as follows when an AC
Areas assigned to ‘Bell & Strobe op’ will cause the ‘Bell/Strobe’ mains failure occurs.
output on the control panel to activate when an alarm occurs in those
areas. • All keypads will display ‘AC Mains Fail’
Areas not assigned to ‘Bell & Strobe op’ will never cause the • All keypads and speakers assigned to the same area as the ‘AC
‘Bell/Strobe’ output on the control panel to activate when an alarm Mains Fail’ will generate a Service tone every minute until the
occurs in those areas. fault is acknowledged by the User entering a valid code for that
area
11 - Alarms Eng Reset
Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following • An assigned area can be armed, as long as ‘Arm With AC Fail’ is
an Intruder alarm. Areas Assigned to ‘Alarms Eng Reset’ will respond also assigned to that area (see option 18). However, a warning will
as follows: be given to indicate the problem
• The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code Areas not assigned to ‘AC Mains Fail’ will never be affected by an AC
mains failure.
If ‘Anti-code Reset’ is enabled (option 14) the assigned areas
can also be reset using the Anti-code 18 - Arm with AC Fail
Areas assigned to ‘Arm With AC Fail’ can be armed when an AC Mains fail
Areas not assigned to ‘Alarms Eng Reset’ can be reset with any User
occurs in those areas (see option 17).
Areas not assigned to ‘Arm With AC Fail’ can never be armed when an AC
12 - Confirmed Reset Mains fail occurs in those areas (see option 17).
Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following a
Confirmed alarm. Areas Assigned to ‘Confirmed Reset’ will respond 19 - Full Arm Coms
as follows: Areas assigned to ‘Full Arm Coms’ will respond as follows:
• The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code

58 INS176-9

• If the selected area is fully armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in • Zones with the ‘Double Knock’ attribute will use the multiple
that area, Intruder alarm events (for that area) are reported to the knock value set up in system options for zone activations (see
Alarm Receiving Centre after any programmed ‘Digi delay’ has page 67 for details)
expired Areas not assigned to ‘Multi Knock Area’ will use the standard 2
Areas not assigned to ‘Full Arm Coms’ will never report Intruder alarm knocks for zone activations.
events to the Alarm Receiving Centre when they are fully armed. For the ‘Multi Knock Area’ feature to work, the zone must be
programmed with the ‘Double Knock’ attribute (see page 51 for
20 - Part Arm Coms details).
Areas assigned to ‘Part Arm Coms’ will respond as follows:
27 - UDL Keypad
• If an assigned area is part armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in
Areas assigned to ‘UDL Keypad’ can be controlled i.e. armed,
that area, Intruder alarm events (for that area) are reported to the
disarmed, reset etc. from the ‘On Line Keypad’ when using the
Alarm Receiving Centre after any programmed ‘Digi delay’ has
Wintex software and a PC.
expired
Areas not assigned to ‘UDL Keypad’ cannot be controlled i.e. armed,
Areas not assigned to ‘Part Arm Coms’ will never report Intruder alarm
disarmed, reset etc. from the ‘On Line Keypad’ when using the
events to the Alarm Receiving Centre when the area is Part armed.
Wintex software and a PC.
21 - Unarm Fire Coms
28 - Auto Chime (C2A)
Areas assigned to ‘Unarm Fire Coms’ will respond as follows:
Areas assigned to ‘Auto Chime’ will respond as follows:
• If an assigned area is unarmed and a Fire alarm occurs in that
• Zones assigned to the selected areas that have been
area, Fire alarm events (for that area) will be reported to the Alarm
programmed for ‘Chime’ will only chime when ‘Custom Output
Receiving Centre
1, Stage A’ is on
Areas not assigned to ‘Unarm Fire Coms’ will never report Fire alarm
Areas not assigned to ‘Auto Chime’ will only chime when chime for
events to the Alarm Receiving Centre when the area is unarmed.
that area is manually enabled by the user.
 Fire alarm events are always reported to the Alarm Receiving

Centre when the area is armed regardless of whether the area
DD 243 Options
To comply with DD 243, during the normal entry delay, the control
is assigned to this option or not.
panel must prevent a Confirmed Intruder Alarm from being reported
22 - Unarm Tamp. Coms to the Alarm Receiving Centre.
Areas assigned to ‘Unarm Tamp. Coms’ will respond as follows:
If a Portable ACE i.e. Electronic Keyswitch, Key Fob, Tag, Swipe Card etc
• If an assigned area is unarmed and a 24Hr or Tamper alarm or is being used for disarming, it is permissible for the Confirmed Intruder
reportable fault occurs in that area, the event will be reported to Alarm signal to be re-enabled after the entry delay has expired.
the Alarm Receiving Centre
The following two options have been provided to ensure that the
Areas not assigned to ‘Unarm Tamp. Coms’ will never report 24Hr or control panel can be programmed to comply with this standard if
Tamper alarm events or faults to the Alarm Receiving Centre when required.
the area is unarmed.
 24Hr and Tamper alarm events are always reported to the

Alarm Receiving Centre when the area is armed regardless of
WARNING
whether the area is assigned to this option or not. Owing to the ability to disable ALL of the
23 - Auto Arm Areas confirmation facilities, the customer should be
Areas assigned to ‘Auto Arm Areas’ will respond as follows:
advised in writing by the alarm company that ALL
• When an assigned area is disarmed, the ‘Auto Arm Delay’ timer
will start (see page 62 for details) means of alarm confirmation are disabled when the
• Every time a detector in that area is activated, the timer is initial entry door is opened. The alarm company
restarted should then obtain written acceptance from the
• If the timer is allowed to expire i.e. no detectors in the assigned customer of the disabling of the means of alarm
area are activated, the area will arm itself
confirmation.
Areas not assigned to ‘Auto Arm Areas’ will never try to arm
themselves.
24 - Area A Foyer
Area A can be used as a common area (automatically arms last and 29 - Confirm in Entry
disarms first). Areas assigned to ‘Area A Foyer’ will cause the panel Areas assigned to ‘Confirm in Entry’ will respond as follows:
to respond as follows: • If the entry mode is started for the selected area and a Confirmed
• When all assigned areas are armed, Area A will automatically Intruder alarm occurs in that area, Confirmed Intruder alarm events
arm itself (for that area) are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre
Areas not assigned to ‘Confirm in Entry’ will never report Confirmed
• When any one assigned area is disarmed, Area A will
Intruder alarm events to the Alarm Receiving Centre during the entry
automatically disarm itself
mode.
Areas not assigned to ‘Area A Foyer’ will not affect the automatic
arming of area A.
25 - Log Part Omits  To comply with DD 243, areas must NOT be assigned to this
option, thus preventing Confirmed Intruder Alarms from being
Areas assigned to ‘Log Part Omits’ respond as follows: reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre during the entry
• When an assigned area is part armed, all the zones that are mode.
omitted for that area are logged in the event log
Areas not assigned to ‘Log Part Omit’ will never log the zones that are 30 - Conf. after Entry
omitted in the event log when the area is part armed. Areas assigned to ‘Conf. After Entry’ will respond as follows:
26 - Multi Knock Area • Alarm confirmation is ONLY disabled for the duration of the Entry
Time and is RE-ENABLED once the Entry Time has expired, after
Areas assigned to ‘Multi Knock Area’ will respond as follows:
INS176-9 59

which activation of a further two zones that are not on the entry route 38 - AC Fail Eng Reset
must occur before the Alarm Confirmation output will activate Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following an
Areas not assigned to ‘Conf. After Entry’ will never report Confirmed AC Mains Fail. Areas assigned to ‘AC Fail Eng Reset’ will respond as
Intruder alarm events to the Alarm Receiving Centre after the entry follows:
delay has expired. • The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code
 To comply with DD 243, areas must NOT be assigned to this
option, thus preventing Confirmed Intruder Alarms from being
Areas not assigned to ‘AC Fail Eng Reset’ can be reset with any User
reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre after the entry delay code that is valid for those areas.
has expired.
39 - Mask When Armed
If a Portable ACE i.e. Electronic Keyswitch, Key fob, Tag, Swipe Areas assigned to ‘Mask When Armed’ will register a Masking fault
Card etc. is used to disarm the system, it is permissible for the when the selected areas are armed and a Masking Fault occurs.
Confirmed Intruder Alarm signal to be re-enabled after the
Areas not assigned ‘Mask When Armed’ will never register a Masking
entry delay has expired. In this case, areas CAN be assigned
fault when the selected areas are armed and a Masking Fault occurs
to ‘Conf. After Entry’.
31 - Part Arm Enabled
Areas assigned to ‘Part Arm Enabled’ can be Part Armed.
Areas not assigned to ‘Part Arm Enabled’ cannot be Part Armed.
32 - Bell Squawk
Areas assigned to ‘Bell Squawk’ will respond as follows:
• When all of the assigned areas are fully armed, the bell will activate
once for 2 seconds, when any one of the assigned areas are
disarmed, the bell will activate twice for 2 seconds and when any
one of the assigned areas are disarmed following an alarm, the bell
will activate five times for 2 seconds.
Areas not assigned to ‘Bell Squawk’ will not activate the Bell output
when arming or disarming.
33 - FOB After Entry
Areas assigned to ‘FOB After Entry’ can only be disarmed with a
Radio FOB once the Entry procedure has been started.
Areas not assigned to ‘FOB After Entry’ can be disarmed with a Radio
FOB at any time.
34 - Armed = Coms
When Areas are assigned to ‘Armed = Coms’ the system will respond
as follows:
• Communications and outputs (Alarm, Confirmed etc.) for ALL areas
will only operate when all of the assigned areas are armed.
When No Areas are assigned to ‘Armed = Coms’ the system will
respond as follows:
• Communications and outputs (Alarm, Confirmed etc.) for ALL areas
will operate as normal.
35 - 2-Wire Smoke
Areas assigned to ‘2-Wire Smoke’ will register a Fire Alarm when any
2-Wire Smoke detector activates.
Areas not assigned to ‘2-Wire Smoke’ will not register a Fire Alarm when
a 2-Wire Smoke detector activates.
36 - Faults Eng Reset
Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following
any Fault. Areas Assigned to ‘Faults Eng Reset’ will respond as
follows:
Areas not assigned to ‘Faults Eng Reset’ can be reset with any User
37 - No ATS Eng Reset
Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following a
“No ATS Available” fault (ATS = Alarm Transmission System). Areas
Assigned to ‘No ATS Eng Reset’ will respond as follows:
Areas not assigned to ‘No ATS Eng Rst’ can be reset with any User
60 INS176-9

Time Arm Area Area Text

y y
Timers Timers
6 7
Area Programming
Area Programming Area Text
Time Arm Areas
y y
Area A Armed by Text for Area A
timer Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t
U
to s elect a n a rea or
4 a n Area or us e the
Group & Area
Area B Armed by Text for Area D

timer
Pres s NO to edit
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t n the Area text
5 a timer e.g. 5 = T imer 5
Êdit Text >ABC

Area B Armed by
timer > 5 Us e keys 0 - 9 to program
? text the s a me way tha t a
mobile phone works
y Reception
Edit Tex^ >ABC
Area B Armed by
timer 5
Pres s YE S to s elect
y
y the dis a rmed by timer
and Disarm B by Text may be assigned to each of the areas on the system. This allows
timer the user to select the areas by description instead of a letter. A
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t maximum of 16 characters can be programmed for each of the areas.
3 a timer e.g. 3 = T imer 3
and Disarm B by characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate
timer > 3
number of times (to select a character on the same key, press 
y to move the cursor along).
and Disarm B by
timer 3
The alarm system as a whole or any number of individual areas can

be automatically armed or disarmed using the built in control timers.
The 24 has 2 independent control timers, the 48 has 4 independent
control timers the 88 168 have 8 independent control timers, and the
640 has 8 independent control timers for each of the 4 Area groups.
These may be configured to switch on and off at different points of
the day and operate on different days of the week (see page 68 for
INS176-9 61

Global Options Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5.3 Global Options

9 - Auto Arm Delay
System Timers When an area assigned to ‘Auto Arm Areas’ is disarmed (see page 59 for
details) this timer is started. Every time a detector in that area is activated,
the timer is restarted. If the timer is allowed to expire i.e. no detectors in
YES to Select:- the assigned area are activated, the area will arm itself.
Global Options
10 - Menu Time Out
y This timer controls the length of time that a user can remain in a
Global Options
menu before the system automatically returns to the normal day
System Timers mode.
y 11 - Pulse Period 1
This timer controls how long any output with the
Exit Settle Time ‘Pulse Period 1’ attribute assigned to it will activate for.
005 Second(s)
Us e the YE S key to move 12 - Pulse Period 2
y to the next timer or use
the S C RO LL key to s earch
This timer controls how long any output with the
‘Pulse Period 2’ attribute assigned to it will activate for.
Global Bell Dly.
000 Minute(s)
13 - Pulse Period 3
E nter a new timer va lue This timer controls how long any output with the
? e.g. 005 = 5 Minutes
‘Pulse Period 3’ attribute assigned to it will activate for.
Global Bell Dly.
> 005 Minute(s) 14 - ATS Fault Delay
This timer controls the delay between a line fault occurring and an
y audible indication being generated by the system.
15 - AC Off Delay
This timer controls the delay between an AC Mains failure occurring
These timers control various timing and delay functions. Each timer and an audible indication being generated by the
can be programmed for any value between 000 and 999.
16 - Batt Test Period
0 - Exit Settle Time This timer controls the frequency of the dynamic battery test.
When using the ‘Entry/Exit’ or ‘Exit Terminator’ arming mode, some
detectors along the exit route can remain active for a number of 17 - Batt Test Time
seconds following activation. This timer ensures that the detectors are This timer controls how long the dynamic battery test is carried out
given time to deactivate before the system/area arms. for.
1 - Global Bell Dly. 18 - Soak Test Time

This timer controls the delay between an Intruder This timer controls the number of days a zone with the ‘Test’ attribute
alarm occurring and the ‘Bell/Strobe’ output activating. will remain on test for.
2 - Global Bell Dur. 19 - Service Interval

This timer controls the duration of the ‘Bell’ output after an alarm has This timer controls the frequency of the ‘Service Required’ condition
occurred and any programmed ‘Global Bell Delay’ time has expired. occurring.
3 - Double Knock Dly 20 - Test Call Every

If a zone has the ‘Double Knock’ attribute an alarm will only occur if the This timer controls how often a test call is made to the monitoring
zone activates twice within this time window or once for the duration of this station. 024 = daily etc.
time window.
21 - Min. Random Time
This timer controls the minimum length of time
 If multi knocks has been set up (see page 67 for details) the
zone may have to be activated more than twice.
that the ‘Random’ output attribute will activate for.
22 - Max. Random Time
4 - Beam Pair Time This timer controls the maximum length of time that the ‘Random’
If a zone has the ‘Beam Pair’ attribute, an alarm will only occur if output attribute will activate for.
another zone with the ‘Beam Pair’ attribute (assigned to the same
23 - Door Strike Time
area) is activated within this time window.
This timer controls the length of time that the ‘Door Strike’ output will
5 - Activity Delay activate for whenever a code with the ‘Door Strike’ attribute is
If a zone has the ‘Activity’ attribute and it is not activated during this timer entered.
and ‘Config. option 14’ has been set to ‘View Act. Fault’ (see page 64 for
24 - Zone Response
details), it will be indicated to the user when they try to arm the
This timer controls the length of time that a zone with the ‘Quick
system/area.
Resp.’ attribute, has to be activated for, in order to be recognised by
6 - Abort Delay the control panel.
When an Intruder alarm occurs this timer is started, if the area is
disarmed within this time window an ‘Abort’ event will be reported to
the Alarm Receiving Centre. If the system is disarmed after this
period the ‘Abort’ event is not reported.
7 - Courtesy Time
This timer controls the duration of the ‘Courtesy’ output type. The
courtesy output activates whenever a keypad is being used and during
the entry mode.
8 - Defer Arming By
If an area tries to ‘Time Arm’ and a valid User code is entered, this timer
is started and the ‘Time Arming’ procedure is postponed. When this
timer expires, the system/area will try to arm itself again.
62 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Global Options
25 - Keypad PA Delay
When keypad ‘option 6’ is programmed as ‘PA Delayed’ (see page System Config.
73 for details), and a keypad PA alarm (1 & 3) is activated, this timer
starts. If a User code is entered before this timer expires, no PA alarm
will occur. However, if a User code is not entered before this timer YES to Select:-
Global Options
expires, a PA alarm will occur.
26 - Confirmation Dly y
When an Intruder alarm occurs, this timer starts. If a second
(different) zone is activated within this time window, the ‘Confirmed’ Global Options
System Timers
output will activate. When this timer
expires, the ‘Confirmed’ output will no longer activate. 1
27 - Warning Delay
Global Options
When a Custom zone with the ‘Warning Req’ attribute (see page 52 System Config.
for details) activates, this timer is started. If the zone is still active
when this timer expires a warning tone or alarm will occur and the y
Warning Output (see page 80 for details) will activate.
Configuration 00
28 - Keypad Lock Time No Bell Set Fail
E nter a configura tion
When code tampers are programmed to lockout the keypad (see number or us e the
page 64 for details), the keypad will lock out for the duration of this ? S C R OL L key to s earc h
timer. e.g. 09 = NVM Unlocked
Configuration 09
29 - Eng. log off Dly NVM is Unlocked
This timer starts when an Engineers code is entered. When the timer Pres s NO to cha nge
expires the engineer is automatically logged out of engineer’s mode. This n the config. option
timer is suspended if there are tamper faults on the system allowing the
engineer to remain in engineer’s mode indefinitely whilst on site. Configuration 09
NVM is Locked
30 - Fire Bell Delay
This timer starts when a fire alarm is generated in a particular area. y
When the timer expires sounders are activated in ALL areas.
31 - Forced Entry Dly These options control how various system functions work.
When a zone with the ‘Guard’ attribute (see page 51 for details)
activates, this timer is started. For the duration of this timer, any 00 - No Bell Arm Fail
‘Entry/Exit 1 or 2’ zone with the ‘Entry/Exit 2’ attribute (see page 51 If an area fails to arm, an Internal alarm will occur and the ‘Strobe’
for details) will become a ‘Guard’ zone. When this timer expires, the output will activate.
‘Entry/Exit 1 or 2’ zone will revert back to its normal mode of Bell on Arm Fail
operation. If an area fails to arm, an Internal alarm will occur and the ‘Bell’
output will activate for 10 seconds.
32 - Supervision Time
This timer controls the frequency at which the RadioPLUS detectors
are required to report in to the control panel.
33 - Poll IP Every
 The ‘Strobe’ output will also activate for 5 seconds to indicate
that the system has armed/disarmed.
This timer controls the frequency that the ComIP Polls the ARC. 01 - Bell is an SAB
The ‘Bell’ output on the control panel applies 0V when active.
Bell is an SCB
The ‘Bell' output on the control panel removes 0V when active.
02 - Clock is 24Hr
The system time is displayed in the 24-Hour format.
Clock is 12Hr (Default)
The system time is displayed in the 12-Hour format.
03 - Auto BST/GMT
The system clock will adjust itself at the beginning and the end of the
summer (the clock will automatically gain 1Hr on the last Sunday in
March and lose 1Hr on the last Sunday in October.
Manual BST/GMT
The system clock will not adjust itself at the beginning and the end of
the summer (the clock will have to be adjusted manually).
04 - View Armed Areas
When the system is part armed, the areas that are armed are
displayed and alarm information is displayed before a valid User
code is entered.
Hide Armed Areas
When the system is part armed, the areas that are armed are not
displayed and alarm information is only displayed after a valid User
code has been entered.
INS176-9 63

05 Global Bell Time 15 - Hide Exit Errors

When all areas are armed, the system uses the ‘Global Bell Delay’ and If a user tries to arm an area and there are zones activated, the exit
‘Global Bell Duration’ timers (see page 62 for details). mode will continue (giving a visual and audible indication that there is
Area Bell Time a problem).
When all areas are armed, the system uses the ‘Area Bell Delay’ and View Exit Error
‘Area Bell Duration’ timers (see page 54 for details). If a user tries to arm an area and there are zones activated, the exit
mode is suspended until all of the zones are secure.
06 - 24Hr Omit Global
‘24-Hour’ type zones can be omitted from any keypad. 16 - Enable Code Tampers
24Hr Omit Local 24 invalid key presses on a keypad will cause a Code Tamper
Only keypads assigned to the same area as the condition (see option 17).
‘24-Hour’ type zones can be used to omit the zone. No Code Tampers
A Code Tamper condition will never occur when the keys on a
07 - Remove Omits keypad are pressed more than 24 times.
When zones have been ‘Omitted’ by a user, the zones will be
automatically reinstated by the system when the area they are 17 - Code Tamper Alarm
assigned to is next disarmed. A Code Tamper condition will cause a Tamper alarm in the areas that
Leave Omits the keypad is assigned to.
When zones have been ‘Omitted’ by a user, the zones will remain Code Tamper Lockout
omitted until the user reinstates them. A Code Tamper condition will cause the keypad to lockout for the
duration of the keypad lockout timer (see page 62).
08 - Override Com Dly
If an area is ‘Fully’ armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in that area,
Intruder alarm events (for that area) are reported to the Alarm
Receiving Centre immediately.  Option 16 above must be set to enable code tampers in order
for this option to work.
Enforce Com Dly
If an area is ‘Fully’ armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in that area, 18 - Areas A-H & I-P
Intruder alarm events (for that area) are reported to the Alarm The first 8 areas will be displayed as letters A through to H and the last
Receiving Centre after any programmed ‘Coms delay’ has expired 8 areas will be displayed as letters I through to P.
(see page 54 for details). Areas 1-8 & I-P
09 - NVM is Unlocked The first 8 areas will be displayed as numbers
The factory default settings can be reloaded by pressing the Factory 1 through to 8 and the last 8 areas will be displayed as letters I
Restart button during power up. through to P.
NVM is Locked 19 - Auto Area Select
The factory default settings cannot be reloaded by pressing the When an Engineers code is entered to gain access to the
factory default button during power up. programming mode, ALL Zones and Tampers are disabled i.e. if any
Tampers, PA, Fire or Medical Alarms are activated - NOTHING WILL
HAPPEN.
 If the NVM is locked and the Engineer User code has been lost
or forgotten, the PCB will have to be replaced. Man. Area Select
When an Engineers code is entered to gain access to the
10 - Engineer Only programming mode, the Engineer will have to select which areas are
Access to the Engineers Programming menus can be obtained by going to be worked on.
just entering the Engineer User code.
User + Engineer
Access to the Engineers Programming mode can only be obtained, if  Zones and Tampers are only disabled for the selected areas all
other areas will respond to zone activations and tampers as
a User (with the ‘Engineer Access’ attribute) has authorised engineer normal.
access (see page 110 for details).
20 - Predictive Text
11 - Chime Audible When in text editing mode, the control panel will automatically select
Zones programmed with the ‘Chime 2 or 3’ attribute will only predictive text.
generate a Chime tone.
Manual Text Edit
Chime Visible (Default) When in text editing mode, the control panel will automatically select
Zones programmed with the ‘Chime 2 or 3’ attribute will generate a normal text.
Chime tone. The keypad will also display the number of the zone that
was activated. 21 - Short = Tamper
The control panel will see a zone that is in the short circuit condition
12 - Omit Tampers No as a ‘Tamper’.
A user cannot omit Tamper faults on a zone.
Short = Active
Omit Tampers Yes The control panel will see a zone that is in the short circuit condition
A user can omit Tamper faults on a zone. as ‘Active’.
13 - Offline Printing 22 - R/R=Reset Only
If a printer is plugged onto the control panel, nothing will be printed When 0V is applied to the control panel R/R input, any areas
unless a printout is requested (see page 120 for details). programmed for anti-code reset (see page 58 for details) that are in
Online Printing alarm, will be reset.
If a printer is plugged onto the control panel, anything that is logged R/R=Silence/RST
in the event log is also printed at the same time. When 0V is applied to the control panel R/R input any areas
14 - Hide Act. Fault programmed for anti-code reset (see page 58 for details) that are in
If a zone with the ‘Activity’ attribute is not activated during the ‘Activity alarm, will be silenced. When 0V is applied to the R/R input a second
Delay’ time window, the area that the zone is assigned to can still be time, the areas will be reset (this would normally be used when Audio
armed. However, this fault will be indicated to the user when they try Verification is required).
to arm the area.
View Act. Fault
If a zone with the ‘Activity’ attribute is not activated during the ‘Activity
Delay’ time window, the area that the zone is assigned to cannot be
armed. This situation can only be overcome by activating the zone.
64 INS176-9

23 - User Code Pulse EN50131 Enabled

Entering a user code which has an associated user output will cause Keypad display ‘blanking’ is enabled i.e. the keypad will only display
the output to activate for the duration of the door strike timer. the time, date and the banner message. If information is available to
User Code Latch be viewed i.e. AC Mains Fail, Line Fault, System Faults etc. the
Entering a user code which has an associated user output will cause keypad will bleep every 30 seconds and display ‘System Alerts’, this
the output to toggle from off to on or from on to off. information can only be viewed after a valid user code has been
entered. The keypad display will then ‘blank’ again 30 seconds after.
24 - Timed Test Call
A test call to the Alarm Receiving Centre will occur every time the The bell output will not activate, if an alarm occurs during the entry
‘Test Call Every’ timer expires. mode.
Test Call = CT4
A test call to the Alarm Receiving Centre will occur every time
‘Control Timer 4’ activates.  Duress Codes can only be programmed by an engineer
25 - Batt Test Timed 35 - 2nd Zone = Confirm

A battery test will occur every time the ‘Batt Test Period’ timer After the entry timer has expired, activation of 2 more zones is required
expires. to generate a Confirmed alarm
1st Zone = Confirm
Batt Test = Disarm After the entry timer has expired, activation of 1 more zone is required
A battery test will occur every time the system is disarmed or after the to generate a Confirmed alarm
‘Batt Test Period’ timer has expired (whichever occurs first).
36 - Keypads Global
26 - Bell = 1st Alarm Keypads show information for all areas.
The ‘Bell’ and ‘Strobe’ outputs will activate after an Intruder alarm (1st
Alarm) occurs. Keypads Local
Keypads only show information that is relative to the area that the
Bell = 2nd Alarm keypad is assigned to.
The ‘Bell’ and ‘Strobe’ outputs will activate after a Confirmed alarm
(2nd Alarm) occurs. 37 - Panel Grade 3
All options relating to PD6662: 2004/EN 50131-1 Grade 3 are enabled
27 - SNDR = 1st Alarm automatically. Also, the Anti-code reset becomes a 6-digit number
The internal sounders will sound after an Intruder alarm (1st Alarm) and all user codes can only be programmed as 5 or 6 digits.
occurs.
SNDR = 2nd Alarm Panel Grade 2
The internal sounders will sound after a Confirmed alarm (2nd Alarm) All options relating to PD6662: 2004/EN 50131-1 Grade 3 that are not
occurs. required for Grade 2 are disabled automatically. Also, the Anti-code reset
becomes the standard 4 digit number and all user and engineer codes
28 - Conf. = Instant can be 4, 5 or 6 digits.
Following the arming of the system/area, if two zones activate
(causing a Confirmed alarm), the signal will be reported to the Alarm 38 - Disable FOB PA
Receiving Centre immediately. When a ‘Smartkey’ Transmitter FOB is being used with the alarm
system, the Panic Alarm (PA) function i.e. Pressing buttons 1 and 2
Conf. = Delayed together, is disabled.
Following the arming of the system/area, if two zones activate
(causing a Confirmed alarm), the signal will only be reported to the Enable RF FOB PA
Alarm Receiving Centre after the ‘Abort’ time has expired. When a ‘Smartkey’ Transmitter FOB is being used with the alarm
system, the Panic Alarm (PA) function i.e. Pressing buttons 1 and 2
29 - Abort=Eng.Reset together, is enabled.
An Intruder alarm that is aborted can only be reset by an
Engineer/Anti-code. 39 - Armed Mask=Fault
Abort=User Reset If an Anti-masking signal is detected when the system is armed, the
An Intruder alarm that is aborted can be reset by any User. control panel will generate a Fault response.
30 – Auto AV Output Armed Mask=Alarm

When using the AV Module, if a microphone is remotely selected, the If an Anti-masking signal is detected when the system is armed, the
corresponding output automatically activates. control panel will generate an Alarm response.
Manual AV Output 40 – Silent RF FOB PA
When using the AV Module, if a microphone is remotely selected, the PA alarms generated from a wireless FOB will cause a silent alarm.
corresponding output must be activated manually. Audible FOB PA
31 - Clock = 50Hz PA alarms generated from a wireless FOB will cause a Audible alarm.
The internal clock on the control panel runs from the 50Hz main 41 – Monitor PSU Battery
frequency.
Battery faults from the PSU200XP are monitored.
Clock = Crystal
The internal clock on the control panel runs from the built-in crystal. No PSU Batt Flts
Battery faults from the PSU200XP are not monitored.
32 - 80 Column Print
Select this option when connecting an 80 Column printer to the 42 – Exp Loss Tamp
control panel. An expander lost event will generate a tamper alarm.
40 Column Print No Exp Loss Tamp
Select this option when connecting an 40 Column printer to the An expander lost event will generate a fault condition.
control panel.
43 – Soak Test Warn
33 - Disable Text If zones have been placed on Soak Test, a warning will be shown to
Areas that are armed are displayed as letters on the bottom line of the user at the time of arming.
the display i.e. ‘Armed: AB.D…’
No Soak Test Warn
Enable Text
If zones have been placed on Soak Test, no warning will be shown to
Areas that are armed are displayed using their assigned text on the
bottom line of the display i.e. ‘Armed: Garage’, ‘Office’ etc. (a the user at the time of arming.
different area is displayed every second).
34 - EN50131 Disabled
The Control Panels EN50131 options are disabled.
INS176-9 65

44 – FOB Batt Warn 53 – Enable PD6662:2010

When during arming if a low fob battery event is received the arming The panel will be defaulted to operate according to PD6662:2010
will be cancelled and the keypad will generate a warning, the user Disable PD6662:2010
will have to affirm the “Arm with faults” on the keypad before arming
will proceed. Both the low battery and the user acknowledgement will The panel will operate according to the requirements of PD6662:2004
be logged.
No FOB Batt Warn
When during arming if a low fob battery event is received the arming
will proceed but the low fob battery will be logged in the event log.
45 – Entry Stray
Enables Entry Stray to comply with BS8243 or EN50131-1. This flag
is selectable by configuring option 46.
No Entry Stray
Disables Entry Stray
46 – BS Entry Stray
A second alarm condition during the alarm notification period will
immediately expire the alarm notification timer. This will cause a
confirmed alarm message to be set to the arc and logged in the
event log.
No BS Entry Stray
Second and subsequent alarm conditions during the alarm
notification period have no effect on the timer.
47 – Tamp No Confirm
If a device has caused an unconfirmed alarm then a tamper from that
same device will not cause a confirmed alarm.
Tamper Confirm
If a device has caused an unconfirmed alarm then a tamper from that
same device will cause a confirmed alarm.
48 – Radio 2 Step Arm
When arming using a wireless FOB. The arming procedure requires
two steps.
Radio 1 Step Arm
When arming using a wireless FOB. The arming procedure requires
one step.
49 – Radio Step 1 Zone
When configuration option 48 is programmed as ‘Radio 2 Step Arm’
the second step of the arming procedure is the activation of any zone
programmed as ‘Guard Access’.
Radio Step 2 RKP
When configuration option 48 is programmed as ‘Radio 2 Step Arm’
the second step of the arming procedure is confirmation via the
keypad.
50 – Conf Hold Up EN
Once a PA zone is activated the hold-up timer is started (See Global
System Timers for Confirmed PA Timer), the confirmed alarm will
generate if one of the following happens, another PA Zone activated
or a tamper from a device, multi-action PA or a global tamper within
the timer period.
No Conf Hold Up
No confirmed hold-up will be generated.
51 – Max Log msgs 3
Log events from individual sources are limited to 3.
No Max Log msgs
Log events from individual sources are not limited to 3.
52 – Code Entry Timed
When 10 failed code attempts have been made, the keypad will lock
out for 90 seconds. If the panel is grade 2 a further 10 failed code
entry attempts the will keypad will locked out for 90 seconds. If the
panel is grade 3 then after every single failed code entry attempt the
keypad will lock out for 90 seconds. After 21 failed code entry
attempts the code tamper alarm is generated and logged.
No code Ent Time
Failed code entry attempts will not lock out keypads or generate a
code tamper
66 INS176-9

number is defined on the product label where applicable by LS1, LS2

System Options or LS3. The 640 has all languages listed available in the control panel.
24/48/88/168
YES to Select:-
Global Options LS1 LS2 LS3
y English UK English UK English UK

English English English
Global Options Swedish Spanish Russian
System Timers
French Italian Slovenian
y Belgian Dutch Polish Czech
Text Danish Hungarian German
Global Options
System Options Norwegian Estonian
Finnish
y
Advisory Volume
Level = 5 640
Us e the YE S key to move
y to the next option or use
the S C RO LL key to s earch
English UK
English
Italian
Polish
Chime Volume Swedish Hungarian
Level = 2 French Russian
Belgian Dutch Slovenian
Pres s NO to edit
Danish
n the volume level
Norwegian
Czech
German
Finnish Estonian
Chime Volume
Level =>2 Spanish
E nter a value or use the
S C R O LL key to inc rea s e
8 or dec rea s e the value 9 - Country Codes & Defaults
e.g. 8 = F ull Volume Country codes are used to define Telecoms requirements, and defaults
Chime Volume are loaded if available when the country code is chosen. The following
Level = 8 country codes are available and show the associated defaults loaded
by the panel.
y
Country Code Defaults
Export 0 UK
These options control various system functions. Russia 7 UK
0 - Advisory Volume South Africa 27 South Africa
Controls the volume of advisory tones (entry/exit etc.) from Netherlands 31 UK
loudspeakers connected to the control panel (Alarm tones are always
Belgium 32 Norway
full volume). 1 = min, 8 = max.
France 33 France
1 - Chime Volume
Controls the volume level of Chime tones from ALL loudspeakers. 1 = Spain 34 UK
min, 8 = max. Hungary 36 UK
2 - No. Of Re-Arms Italy 39 UK
Controls the number of times that a zone will re-arm. Once the re-arm limit Czech 42 UK
has been reached, the zone is ‘Locked Out’ and will not cause any further
Intruder alarms. UK 44 UK
3 - Anti-code Resets Denmark 45 Denmark

Limits how many times a user can perform an Anti-code reset. Once Sweden 46 Sweden
this limit is been reached, the system can only be reset using an Norway 47 Norway
Engineer code. This counter is reset every month or whenever an
Poland 48 UK
Engineers code is entered.
Germany 49 UK
4 - Multiple Knocks
Controls how many times, a zone with the ‘Double Knock’ attribute, Finland 58 Norway
must be activated, before an alarm occurs. The multiple knock count Australia 61 Australia
can be applied to zones on an area basis, see page 59 for details. Test 97 UK
5 - Clock Adjustment Themes 98 UK
Adjusts the accuracy of the clock by subtracting or adding time in
seconds at midnight every night. 0 = -50, 50 = 0 (no correction), 100 Chinn 99 UK
= +50. Estonia 172 (372) UK
6 - Quick Count
Set the number of 10milli Second pulses that are required within 30
Seconds in order for a zone with the ‘Quick Response’ attribute to
activate.
7 - Modem Level
When using a Com2400 this option allows adjustment to the
attenuation of the modem.
Modem Level 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3
Attenuation (dB) +4 +2 0 -2 -4 -6 -8 -10
8 - Language Selection
Various languages are available for the control panels. Listed below are
the language sets, and the languages available. The Language set
INS176-9 67

Monitor Hardware Control Timers

Global Options Global Options
y y
System Timers System Timers
3 4
Monitor Hardware Control Timers
y y
Monitor Hardware Control Timer 1a
P A O B A L * is On at >13:00
Pres s NO to edit Us e the S C RO LL k ey to

n the options
U s elect c ontrol timer 1 - 8
Control Timer 2a
ATS Path Faults is On at >13:00
>P A O B A L *
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t E nter the ‘a’ O n time
U an a ttribute or use the ? for e.g. 1152 = 11:52 a m

S C R O LL key to s earc h
Control Timer 2a
Bell Tamper is On at >11:52
P A O>B A L * Pres s YE S to s elect
Pres s NO to
n s elect/des elect y the ‘a ’ O n T ime

‘DAYS O F O PE R ATIO N’
the option
Timer 2a On Days
Bell Tamper ................ Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t
P A O>* A L * the days 1 = S unda y
y 1 through to 7 = S a turda y
(8 = Holida y Da te)
e.g. 1 = S unday
Timer 2a On Days
Su..............
The control panel monitors many inputs for fault conditions i.e. the Pres s YE S to s elect
panel lid tamper, bell tamper, aux fuse etc. y the ‘a’ O ff Time
Each one of these options can be disabled to overcome problems Control Timer 2a
related to the devices being monitored. is Off at >12:00
E nter the ‘a’ O ff Time
P - ATS Path Faults ? for e.g. 2134 = 9:34 pm
The Alarm Transmission System is monitored for faults.
Control Timer 2a
A - AC Power Failure is Off at >21:34
The AC Mains is monitored for faults. Pres s YE S to s elect
y the ‘a’ O ff Time
‘DAYS O F O PE R ATIO N’
O - Power Outputs/Charger
The Power outputs and charger are monitored for faults. see page Timer2a Off Days
106 for the list of Power Outputs monitored) ................
Us e k eys 1 - 8 to s elect the
B - Bell Tamper 1 da ys e.g. 3 = Tuesda y
The external sounder tamper loop is monitored for faults.
Timer2a Off Days
A - Aux Tamper ....Tu..........
The auxiliary tamper loop is monitored for faults.
y
L - Panel Lid Tamper
The control panel lid tamper is monitored for faults.
The 48 has 4 control timers and the 88 ,168 and 640 have 8 control
B - Battery Faults timers. Each timer has two ON and OFF times (a & b), and can be
The battery is monitored for faults. programmed to operate on any day of the week. Once configured, the
timers can be used to arm or disarm areas, lockout users and control
outputs.
 When programming the Control Timers ON time, pressing

 will bring a ‘*’ up on the display. This ‘*’ indicates that
the internal sounders will chime every time the Control Timers
ON time is reached.
When programming the Control Timers DAYS of operation,
pressing  will bring ‘HO’ up on the display. This ‘HO’
indicates that the control timer will operate on any
programmed Holiday date.
68 INS176-9

System Text Part Arm Text

y y
5 6
System Text Stay Arm Text
y y
Evening Arm
YES to EDIT: Text for Stay 1
Reset Message Us e keys 1 - 3 to s elec t a
Us e keys 1 - 6 to s elect s tay arm group or us e the
4
a text option or us e the
S C R O LL key to s earch
3 S C R OL L key to s earc h
e.g. 3 = S ta y Arm 3
i.e. 5 = B anner Mes s age
Bedtime Arm 2
YES to EDIT: Text for Stay 3
Banner Message
Pres s No to
y
P res s YE S to
edit the text
n edit the text
Êdit Text >TXT

Êdit Text >ABC
Pres s N O to s elect
Us e keys 0 - 9 to progra m n clear s creen
? text the sa me way tha t a
mobile phone works
Bedtime Arm 2
ABC A Êdit Text ^CLR
Edit T^xt ÂBC P res s NO followed by YE S Pres s YE S to
to clear the s creen or keep y clear s creen
n pres s ing NO to change between
upper ca s e, lower ca s e,
y numerica l and predictive text
Êdit Text >TXT
Us e keys 0 - 9 to progra m
Edit Text >CLR ? text the sa me way tha t a

mobile phone works
? Nightime setting
Êdit Text >TXT
ABC Alarms 2001

Edit Text >12^
y
y Text may be assigned to Part Arm 1, 2 or 3 to allow the user to select
the correct Part Arm by description instead of number. A maximum of
16 characters can be programmed for each of the Part Arms.
The system has 7 programmable messages.
1 - Reset Message
This 32-character message is displayed whenever the control panel  The 3 Part Arm messages are global messages and will appear
whenever one of the part arms are selected regardless of which
requires an Engineer reset. area is being part armed.
2 - Anti-code Msg.
This 32-character message is displayed whenever the control panel Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones. Select
requires a Anti-code Reset. characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate
3 - Service Message number of times (to select a character on the same key, press
This 32-character message is displayed whenever the control panel  to move the cursor along).
requires Daytime reset.
4 - Location Text
This 32-character message is displayed whenever the engineer views
the location text in ‘Engineer Utils’.
5 - Banner Message
This 16-character message is displayed above the time and date
whenever the control panel is unarmed or fully armed.
6 - Part Arm Banner
This 16-character message is displayed above the time and date
whenever the control panel is part armed.
7 - Printer Header
This 16-character header will be printed whenever a log printout is
taken from the control panel or a Short Message Service (SMS) text
message is sent to a mobile phone.
INS176-9 69

Holiday Dates Speaker Tones

y y
7 8
Holiday Dates Speaker Tones
y y
Holiday Date 1> Speaker Tones
00/00/00 F A F S E X C
Pres s No to edit
U Us e the S C R O LL key
to s elect a Holiday Date
n the s ounder option
Fire Tones
Holiday Date 3> >F A F S E X C
00/00/00
Use keys 1 - 8 to s elect/des elec t
y U the s ounder option or use the

Entry Tones
Holiday Date 3> F A F S>E X C
> 00/00/00
Pres s No to
Us e keys 0 - 9 to enter the
? new date DD/MM/YY n s elect/des elect
the s ounder option
e.g. 030501 = 3rd Ma y 2001
Entry Tones
Enter new date > F A F S>* X C
03/05/01
y
y
The speaker output on the control panel can be programmed so that
The system has 8 programmable holiday dates. certain types of tones are not generated. When deselected, Fire,
Alarms, Fault, Service, Entry, Exit and Chime tones will not be heard.
The holiday dates are pre-defined dates on which the Control Timers
will not operate. Select tones by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display means
the tone is selected, a Dot on the display means the tone is not
Example selected).
Control Timer 1 is programmed to operate between the hours of 8pm
and 8am on Monday through to Friday (for the purpose of arming the F - Fire Tones On
control panel). Fire alarm tones will be generated by the control panel
sounder/speaker.
Because Bank Holidays normally fall on Mondays the panel would
disarm itself leaving the premises unprotected. A - Alarm Tones On
Intruder alarm, Tamper alarm and PA alarm tones will be generated
• Christmas day 2001 falls on a Tuesday
by the control panel sounder/speaker.
• Under normal conditions the Control Timer will operate on a
F - Fault Tones On
Tuesday
Fault tones will be generated by the control panel sounder/speaker.
• The 25/12/01 is programmed as a Holiday Date
S - Service Tone On
• The Control Timer does not operate on Tuesday 25th December Service and Warning tones will be generated by the control panel
2001 and the premises remains protected at all times sounder/speaker.
E - Entry Tones On
Entry tones will be generated by the control panel sounder/speaker.
X - Exit Tones On
Exit tones will be generated by the control panel sounder/speaker.
C - Chime Tones On
Chime 1, 2 and 3 tones will be generated by the control panel
sounder/speaker.
70 INS176-9

PC Output Text Custom O/P Text

y y
9 9
PC Output Text Custom O/P Text
y y
PC Output 1 Text Custom O/P1 Text
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t Us e keys 1 - 4 to s elec t
a text option or us e the a text option or us e the
4 S C R OL L key to s earc h 3 S C R OL L key to s earc h
i.e. 3 = C us tom O/P 3 Text
i.e. 4 = PC O utput 4 Text
PC Output 4 Text Custom O/P3 Text
Pres s NO to Pres s NO to
n edit the text n edit the text
Êdit Text >ABC Êdit Text >ABC

Us e keys 0 - 9 to progra m Us e keys 0 - 9 to progra m
? text the sa me way tha t a ? text the sa me way tha t a

mobile phone works
mobile phone works
Central Heating Comm s Act i ve
Edit Text ÂB^ Edit Text ÂB^
P res s NO followed by YE S
to clear the s creen or keep
n pres s ing NO to change between y
upper ca s e, lower ca s e,
y numerica l and predictive text
Text may be assigned to Custom Outputs 1 to 4 to allow indication

Edit Text >CLR on the keypads display when the output is active (see page 82 for
details).
?
Central Heating
Edit Text >12^
 Outputs 1 & 2 are silent and outputs 3 & 4 give an audible
warning every 30 seconds for 3 minutes or until a code is
entered or RESET is pressed.
y
characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate
Text may be assigned to PC Control Outputs 1 to 8 to allow the user number of times (to select a character on the same key, press
to select the correct Output by description instead of number. A
maximum of 16 characters can be programmed for each of the PC  to move the cursor along).
Outputs.

number of times (to select a character on the same key, press
 to move the cursor along).
INS176-9 71

Keypad Setup Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5.4 Keypad Setup
YES to Select:-
Keypad Setup
Use keys 1 - 8 to s elec t a
k eypad and pres s 0 to
y toggle between networks e.g.
0, 3 = Network 2, Keypad 3
RKP*1,1 Areas: (a * to the left of the device number
A....... indic ates tha t the device is fitted)
? Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elect a n a rea e.g. 2 = B . Us e the

Pres s N O a rea key to toggle between areas A to H and I to P
to edit the s ee below for 640
keypad areas
RKP*2,3 Areas:
A....... n RKP*2,3 Areas:
> A******* < 2 RKP*2,3 Areas:
> AB****** <
y
R
y Pres s N O
to map the
E nter a zone number
or press YE S
E nter a zone
number
keypa d zones to move to zone B e.g. 011
RKP*2,3 Mapping RKP*2,3 Mapping RKP*2,3 Mapping RKP*2,3 Mapping

Z1- 000, Z2- 000 n Z1->000, Z2- 000 y Z1- 000, Z2->000 ? Z1- 000, Z2->011
y
R
Pres s No Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t Pres s No to
y to edit the
keypa d options
a keypa d option or us e the
S C R OL L key to s earc h
s elect/des elect
the keypad option
RKP*2,3 Options: PA Disabled PA is Silent PA is Silent

* * * T * * * * n >* * * T * * * * U * * * T>* * * * n * * * T>S * * *
y
R
Pres s N O Us e the S C R O LL key
y to edit the
volume level
to adjus t the volume level
up & down or enter a va lue
RKP*2,3 Volume:
Level = 4 n RKP*2,3 Volume:
Level =>4 U RKP*2,3 Volume:
Level =>5
y
R
y to edit the
s ounder options
a s ounder option or us e the
s elect/des elect
the s ounder option
RKP*2,3 Sounds: Fire Tones Entry Tones

F A F S E X C * n >F A F S E X C * U Entry Tones
F A F S>E X C * n F A F S>* X C *
RKP*2,3 Areas:1 Us e the A k ey to s witch

A............... A between Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4
n
Us e the C hime &
RKP*2,3 Areas:1
to sc roll between
A U se the Area key to s elect either

RKP*2,3 Areas:1 Us e the numeric buttons 1-8 to
72 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Keypad Setup
Keypad Areas Keypad Speaker Volume

Keypads can be assigned to any number of areas, assigning a This option controls the volume level of advisory tones from
keypad to an area determines: loudspeakers connected to the keypads. Advisory tones consist of
‘Entry/Exit’ and ‘Warning’ type tones. 1 = minimum; 8 = maximum.
• Which areas the sounder and speaker output in the keypad will
generate tones for i.e. if the keypad is assigned to areas A and C,
the sounder/speaker will only operate when areas A or C are in
alarm, entry, exit etc.
 Alarm tones are always full volume.
• Which areas can be armed or disarmed from that Keypad Sounder Options
keypad when using codes that have the ‘Local Arming’ or ‘Local
Disarming’ attributes (see page 110 for details) The sounder and speaker output in the keypad can be programmed
so that certain types of tones are not generated. When deselected,
• Which areas will cause a Tamper alarm when the keypad cover
Fire, Alarms, Fault, Service, Entry, Exit and Chime tones will not be
is removed
heard.
Select tones by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display means
Keypad Zone Mapping the tone is selected, a Dot on the display means the tone is not
selected).
The zones in the keypad need to be mapped to a valid zone number
before they can be used as part of the system i.e. Keypad 1 Zone 1 F - Fire Tones On
could be mapped to Zone 5 (panel) and Zone 2 could be mapped to Fire alarm tones will be generated by the keypad sounder/speaker.
Zone 25 (expander 3) etc.
A - Alarm Tones On
 Until mapped, the zones in the keypads will not work. by the keypad sounder/speaker.
F - Fault Tones On
A keypad zone can be mapped to any zone number on the
system, however, when mapped to a zone number that already Fault tones will be generated by the keypad sounder/speaker.
exists i.e. Zone 5 (panel), that zone can no longer be used.
S - Service Tone On
If a zone is mapped to a zone number not already on the Service and Warning tones will be generated by the keypad
system i.e. Zone 25 (expander 3) and expander 3 is then sounder/speaker.
added, that zone on the expander (Zone 25) cannot be used. If
E - Entry Tones On
you wish to use the zone on the expander, the keypad zone
Entry tones will be generated by the keypad sounder/speaker.
must be remapped to a different number.
X - Exit Tones On
If a zone is remapped to a different number, the new zone
Exit tones will be generated by the keypad sounder/speaker.
number must be treated as a new zone on the system and
therefore needs to be programmed accordingly (the zone C - Chime Tones On
programming will NOT automatically follow the mapping). Chime 1, 2 and 3 tones will be generated by the keypad
sounder/speaker.
Keypad Options K - Use Keypad Areas

When selected, the keypad sounder and arming control is
These 8 options control various keypad functions: determined by the area that the keypad is assigned to.
Select options by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display means When deselected, the keypad becomes an ‘Area Arm Suite’ controller
the option is selected, a Dot on the display means the option is not (see page 55 for details). This allows different combinations of areas to
selected). be armed or disarmed depending on which keypad is used and
operates as follows:
P - PA Enabled
Pressing keys 1 & 3 together will cause a PA alarm. • Keypad 1 = Area Arm Suite 1, Keypad 2 = Area Arm Suite 2,
F - Fire Enabled
Pressing keys 4 & 6 together will cause a Fire alarm. • When a User code is entered at a keypad, one of the ‘Area Arm
Suites’ is selected (depending on which keypad was used) and the
M - Medical Enabled areas contained within that suite arm using the arming mode for that
Pressing keys 7 & 9 together will cause a Medical alarm. suite, the keypad sounder will also follow the areas defined by the
suite.
T - Tamper Enabled
Removing the keypad cover will cause a Tamper alarm.
A - PA is Audible
A keypad PA (1 & 3) will cause an audible PA alarm.
D - PA is Delayed
When the keypad PA buttons (1 & 3) are pressed, the ‘Keypad PA
Delay’ timer starts, if a User code is entered before the timer expires,
no PA alarm will occur. If a User code is not entered before the timer
expires, a PA alarm will occur (see page 63 for details).
Q - Quick Arm is Enabled
Pressing the Area or Part keys will Arm or Part Arm the areas that the
keypad is assigned to without the need to enter a User code first.
O - Info.LED> Output
The ‘Info.’ LED on the keypad comes on when the keypad output
activates and goes off when the keypad output deactivates.
INS176-9 73

Expander Setup Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5.5 Expander Setup

YES to Select:-
Expander Setup
Us e keys 1 - 8 to select a n
expander a nd pres s 0 to
y toggle between networks e.g.
, 3 = Network 1, Keypad 5
Exp.*1,1 Areas: (a * to the left of the device number
A....... indic ates tha t the device is fitted)
3 Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elect an area e.g. 2 = B .

Pres s N O Us e the area key to toggle between areas
to edit the A to H and I to P.
expander area s F or 640 s ee below
Exp.*1,5 Areas:
A....... n Exp.*1,5 Areas:
> A******* < 2 Exp.*1,5 Areas:
> AB****** <
y
R
y Pres s NO to
edit the
Us e the key pa d to program
text the s a me way tha t a
expander text mobile phone works
Exp.*1,5 Text:
n Êdit Text >ABC ? In Reception
Edit Text ^>ABC
y
R
Us e the S C RO LL
y Pres s NO to
edit the
key to s elect
an input type
Auxilia ry Input
Exp.*1,5>Aux I/P
Not Used n Exp.*1,5>Aux I/P
Not Used U Exp.*1,5>Aux I/P
Auxiliary Tamper
y
R
Us e the S C RO LL
y Pres s NO to edit
the expander
key to a djust
the volume level
Volume level
Exp.*1,5 Volume: Exp.*1,5 Volume: Exp.*1,5 Volume:

Volume = 4 n Volume =>4 U Volume =>5
y
R
y to edit the a s ounder option or us e the select/des elect the
s ounder options S C R OL L key to s earc h s ounder option
Exp.*1,5 Sounds: Fire Tones

F A F S E X C n >F A F S E X C U Entry Tones
F A F S>E X C n Entry Tones
F A F S>* X C
y
EXP. 1,1 Areas1 Us e the A k ey to s witch
A............... A between Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4
n
Us e the C hime &
EXP. 1,1 Areas1
to sc roll between

EXP. 1,1 Areas1 Us e the numeric buttons 1-8 to
74 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Expander Setup
Expander Areas Expander Speaker Volume

Expanders can be assigned to any number of areas, assigning an This option controls the volume level of advisory tones from
expander to an area determines: loudspeakers connected to the expanders. Advisory
tones consist of ‘Entry/Exit’ and ‘Warning’ type tones.
• Which areas the speaker output on the expander will generate 1 = minimum; 8 = maximum.
tones for i.e. if the expander is assigned to areas A and C, the
speaker will only operate when areas A or C are in alarm, entry,
exit etc.  Alarm tones are always full volume.
• Which areas will cause a Tamper alarm when the expander

cover is removed Expander Sounder Options
The speaker output on the expander can be programmed so that
Expander Location Text certain types of tones are not generated. When deselected, Fire,
Alarms, Fault, Service, Entry, Exit and Chime tones will not be heard.
Each expander can be assigned up to 16 characters of text. This text
can be used to describe where the expander is located within the Select tones by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display means
building. the tone is selected, a Dot on the display means the tone is not
selected).
characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate F - Fire Tones On
Fire alarm tones will be generated by the expander sounder/speaker.
number of times (to select a character on the same key, press the
 key to move the cursor along). A - Alarm Tones On
by the expander speaker.
Expander Auxiliary Input F - Fault Tones On
Each expander has an input that can be programmed for one of the Fault tones will be generated by the expander speaker.
following options. If not being used, the input must be programmed
S - Service Tone On
as ‘Not Used’ (Default = Not Used).
Service and Warning tones will be generated by the expander
Not Used speaker.
Never monitored by the system.
E - Entry Tones On
Auxiliary Tamper Entry tones will be generated by the expander speaker.
Normally used for monitoring the box tamper of auxiliary devices
such as power supplies etc (remove 0V for Tamper alarm). X - Exit Tones On
Exit tones will be generated by the expander speaker.
Bell Tamper
Normally used for monitoring Bell Tamper returns (remove 0V for C - Chime Tones On
Tamper alarm). Chime 1, 2 and 3 tones will be generated by the expander speaker.
Remote Reset
Normally used to reset the system/area following an Intruder alarm
(the area must also be programmed for Anti-code reset) see page 58
for details (apply 0V to reset).
Line Fault +ve
Normally used to indicate a telephone line fault (remove 0V for Line
Fault).
Line Fault -ve
Normally used to indicate a telephone line fault (apply 0V for Line
Fault).
Silence Sounders
Normally used to silence the Internal sounders following an Intruder
alarm and would be used in conjunction with Audio Verification units
(apply 0V to silence).
Global Omit Key
Normally wired to a key switch. When the key switch is activated, all
zones (with the ‘Omit’ attribute) assigned to the same area as the
expander, will be omitted (0V removed for omit).
Local Omit Key
Normally wired to a key switch. When the key switch is activated, all
zones (with the ‘Omit’ attribute) wired to the expander, will be omitted
(0V removed for omit).
PSU Monitor
Normally used to monitor a Power Supply for faults, see page 35 for
wiring details.
Defer Auto Arming
Normally used to defer the automatic arming of an area (apply 0V to
defer).
INS176-9 75

System Outputs Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5.6 System Outputs

YES to Select:-
System Outputs
y
System Outputs
Panel Outputs
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elect a n Area:64. 1
output type or us e the ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
e.g. 1 = Digi Outputs n
System Outputs U se the C hime &
Digi Outputs Area:64. 1
to sc roll between
y
Digi Output 1
Not Used (off)
A Use the Area key to s elect either
3 E nter Output Number e.g. 3 A-H or I-P a rea s .
Us e the numeric buttons 1-8 to
Area:64. 1
Digi Output 3
Not Used (off)
n
Digi Output 3
> Not Used Pres s YE S to edit
the s elected option
0 Digi Output 3
> Not Used y
Digi Output E nter O utput
1 > System Type y Type e.g. 13
System output>13
System Open y Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t
an area, us e the AR E A key
E nter O utput to toggle between area s
Digi Output 3
2 > Area Type y Type e.g. 06
Area:11<A*******
Fire Alarm y A to H and I to P (168 only)
for 640 s ee a bove
Area:1>A**D****
Fire Alarm y
E nter Zone E nter Zone Type
3 Digi Output 3
> Zone Type y Number e.g. 011
Digi Output 3
Zone011<Mimic y e.g. 2 (a larm)
Digi Output 3
Zone011>alarm y
E nter Us er C ode
4 Digi Output 3
> User Type y Number e.g. 016
Digi Output 3
016<Code Entered y
E nter Timer
5 Digi Output 3
> Control Timer y Number e.g. 7
Digi Output 3
Control Timer 7< y
Digi Output 3 E nter PC C ontrol Digi Output 3
6 > PC Control y Number e.g. 4 PC Control 4< y
Digi Output 3 E nter Door C ontrol Digi Output 3
7 > Door Control y Number e.g. 4 Door Control>1,4 y
Digi Output 3
System Open
To P rogram the O utput

Attributes (if R equired)
Pres s NO to Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t Pres s No to
y edit the
a ttributes
a n a ttribute or us e the
s elect/des elect
the a ttribute
Digi O/P 3 Att: User Test Inverted Inverted

* * * * * * * * n >* * * * * * * * U *>* * * * * * * U *>I * * * * * *
y
P res s YE S to Accept a nd move to
If X-10 Outputs are Pres s NO to Us e keys 0 - 9 to s elec t the Unit Number, T hen us e keys 0 - 9
being programmed edit the H ous e a Hous e N umber or us e the to s elect a Hous e N umber or us e the
& Unit Numbers S C R OL L key to s earc h S C R OL L key to s earc h
X-10 Output 3
House A Unit 01 n X-10 Output 3
House >A Unit 01 U X-10 Output 3
House >F Unit 01 y X-10 Output 3
House F Unit>14
y
Pres s NO to Us e the key pa d to program
y edit the text the sa me way tha t a
expander text mobile phone works
X-10 Output 3
n Êdit Text >ABC ? In Reception
Edit Text ^>ABC
76 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual System Outputs
Available Outputs Output Group - System

Various sets of programmable outputs can be found on the control Select an output type from the following options:
panel, keypads, expanders and output modules.
00 - ATS Path Fault
Panel Outputs This output type activates when a fault is detected with the Alarm
Panel outputs 1 - 5 are located on the top right hand corner of the Transmission System and deactivates when the fault is cleared.
control panel and can be programmed to any of the output types
listed (see page 34 for wiring details). 01 - Mains Power Off
This output type activates when no AC Mains is detected on the control
Digi Outputs panel and deactivates when mains is detected.
Digi outputs 1 - 8 are located on the left hand side of the control
panel and can be programmed to any of the output types listed (see 02 - Aux Fuse Blown
page 34 for wiring details). This output type activates when the Auxiliary fuse (F1) fails and
deactivates when the system is reset.
Digi Channels
Digi channels 1 - 8 are for the Com300 and Com2400 plug-on 03 - Bell Tamper
communicators and can be programmed to any of the output types This output type activates when the control panel Bell tamper or an
listed. expander input (programmed as Bell tamper) is activated, causing a
Tamper alarm on the system, and deactivates when the Tamper
RedCARE/Relay Pins alarm is reset.
RedCARE or Relay Pins 1 - 8 are for a plug on RedCARE or RM8
Relay module and can be programmed to any of the output types 04 - Auxiliary Tamper
listed. This output type activates when the control panel Aux tamper or an
expander input (programmed as Auxiliary tamper) is activated,
Keypad Outputs causing a Tamper alarm on the system, and deactivates when the
Keypad outputs are for the outputs on the remote keypads (see page Tamper alarm is reset.
22 for details) and can be programmed to any of the output types
listed. Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34. 05 - Panel Lid Tamper
This output type activates whenever the panel cover is removed,
Expander Outputs causing a Tamper alarm on the system, and deactivates when the
Expander outputs are for the outputs on the zone/output expanders Tamper alarm is reset.
(see page 23 for details) and can be programmed to any of the
output types listed. Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34. 06 - Engineer Working
This output type activates whenever an Engineer code is entered to
Custom Outputs access the programming menu and deactivates when the engineer
Custom outputs are NOT physical outputs they are ‘Software’ outputs logs off.
that can be configured to operate under certain conditions (see page
81 for details). Once configured these outputs can then be assigned 07 - Confirm Devices
to a physical output (see system outputs 22-27). This output type activates when the control panel requires devices to
be confirmed and deactivates when the devices are confirmed (see
X-10 Outputs page 117 for details).
X-10 outputs are NOT physical outputs they are ‘Software’ outputs
that can be configured to operate devices that are connected to an X- 08 - Service Required
10 controller. These outputs can also be assigned a house and unit This output type activates when the ‘Service Interval’ timer expires
number along with descriptive text. (see page 81 for details). and deactivates when an Engineer code is entered (see page 62 for
details).
09 - Bell Fuse Blown
Programming Outputs This output type activates when the control panel bell fuse (F4) fails
and deactivates when the system is reset.
When programming outputs, select an output group and an output
type from that group’s list (each output group has its own output 10 - Battery Fault
types) then select attributes (if required). This output type activates when the system detects a fault with the stand-
by battery, and deactivates when the fault clears.
 Output Group + Output

= Output Programmed.
Type + Output Attributes 11 - Battery Test On
This output type activates when the ‘Battery Test’ starts, and
deactivates when the test expires (see page 62 for details).
Output Group - Not Used 12 - Courtesy Light

This output type activates when the ‘Courtesy’ timer starts, and
Only the following output type is available: deactivates when the timer expires (see page 62 for details).
Not Used (off) 13 - System Open

This output type never activates. This output type activates when all areas are unarmed, and
deactivates when any area is armed.
14 - Fully Arm
This output type activates when the system is fully armed and
deactivates when the system is disarmed.
15 - Digi Failed
This output type activates when the plug-on communicator fails to
report to the Alarm Receiving Centre (after 3 dialling attempts), and
deactivates the next time the communicator successfully reports to the
Alarm Receiving Centre.
16 - Digi Successful
This output type activates when the plug-on communicator
successfully reports to the Alarm Receiving Centre and deactivates
the next time the communicator is triggered.
17 - Digi Active
This output type activates when the plug-on communicator is triggered
and deactivates when the communicator shuts down.
INS176-9 77

18 - UDL Lockout 37 - Custom4 Stage AB

This output type activates when an attempt is made to upload/download This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 4’ Stage A or B
with incorrect site details more than three times and deactivates after 4 activates and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 4’ Stage A
hours or after a valid User code is entered. deactivates.
19 - UDL Call Active 38 - Com 1 Fault
This output type activates when an upload/download is started and This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 1
deactivates when the upload/download finishes. stops communicating with the control panel and deactivates when
communication starts again.
20 - UDL Enabled
This output type activates when ‘Enable UDL/Engineer’ is enabled 39 - Com 2 Fault
and deactivates when ‘Enable UDL/Engineer’ is disabled (see page This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 2
110 for details). stops communicating with the control panel and deactivates when
21 - Confirmed Alarm
If the system is already in alarm, this output type activates when a 40 - Com 3 Fault
different zone (not on the entry route) is activated and deactivates at This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 3
the end of the ‘Confirmation’ time, when a code is entered within the stops communicating with the control panel and deactivates when
‘Abort’ time or when the alarm is reset. communication starts again.
22 - Custom1 Stage A 41 - Com 1 No Signal
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 1’ Stage A activates This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 1
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 1’ Stage A deactivates. loses its signal and deactivates when its signal is regained.
23 - Custom1 Stage B 42 - Com 2 No Signal
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 1’ Stage B activates This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 2
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 1’ Stage B deactivates. loses its signal and deactivates when its signal is regained.
24 - Custom1 Stage AB 43 - Com 3 No Signal
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 1’ Stage A or B This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 3
activates and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 1’ Stage A loses its signal and deactivates when its signal is regained.
deactivates.
44 - Coms Fault
25 - Custom2 Stage A This output type activates whenever any type of communication fault
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 2’ Stage A activates occurs i.e. No Signal, Com Port Fault, line fault etc. and deactivates
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 2’ Stage A deactivates. when communication starts again.
26 - Custom2 Stage B 45 - Radio Jamming
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 2’ Stage B activates This output type activates whenever the wireless radio receiver
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 2’ Stage B deactivates. detects a jamming signal and deactivates when the jamming signal is
removed.
27 - Custom2 Stage AB
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 2’ Stage A or B 46 - Radio RX Tamper
activates and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 2’ Stage A This output type activates when the wireless radio receiver lid is
deactivates. removed, causing a Tamper alarm on the system, and deactivates
when the Tamper alarm is reset.
28 - Radio-Pad Failed
This output type activates when the radio pad fails to communicate 47 - Detector Test
with the Alarm Receiving Centre and deactivates when the radio pad This output type is activated via Wintex to initiate a diagnostics check
successfully communicates. on an PD6662: 2004/EN 50131-1 Grade 3 detector and deactivates
after 10 seconds.
29 - Radio Successful
This output type activates when the radio pad successfully 48 - ATS Remote Test
communicates with the Alarm Receiving Centre and deactivates when This output type conforms to the BSIA Form 175 Specification. When a
the radio pad fails to successfully communicate. Line Fault is not present it can be activated remotely by Wintex, or by
using the ‘Test Call Timer’ or ‘Start Test Call’ option on the control panel
30 - No Radio Signal to initiate a test on ATE equipment that have an ATS test input. NOTE:
This output type activates when the Radio-Pads forward signal is lost and Only the RedCare Line Fault and Control panel Line Fault inputs can be
deactivates when the signal is regained. used with the output type.
31 - Radio-Pad Lost 49 - No ATS Available
This output type activates when the Radio-Pad stops communicating This output type activates when no Alarm Transmission paths are
with its base station or the control panel and deactivates when available and deactivates when the fault is cleared.
50 - CIE Fault
32 – Custom3 Stage A This output type activates when a fault occurs on the CIE and
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 3’ Stage A activates deactivates when the fault is cleared.
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 3’ Stage A deactivates.
51 - PSU Fuse Blown
33 - Custom3 Stage B This output type activates when the Auxiliary input type ‘PSU Monitor’
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 3’ Stage B activates detects a 12V failure and deactivates when the fault is reset.
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 3’ Stage B deactivates.
52 - PSU Battery Flt
34 - Custom3 Stage AB This output type activates when the Auxiliary input type ‘PSU Monitor’
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 3’ Stage A or B detects a battery fault and deactivates when the fault is reset.
activates and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 3’ Stage A
deactivates. 53 – WD Test Active
This output is activated via remote maintenance software to initiate a
35 - Custom4 Stage A diagnostics check on an external sounder with remote test capability
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 4’ Stage A activates and will deactivate after 1 minute.
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 4’ Stage A deactivates.
36 - Custom4 Stage B
This output type operates when ‘Custom Output 4’ Stage B activates
and deactivates when ‘Custom Output 4’ Stage B deactivates.
78 INS176-9

16 - Ready
Output Group - Area This output type activates when all zones in the selected area are
secure and deactivates when any zone in the selected area is
Any number of areas can be assigned to each output type. Select an
activated.
output type from the following options:
17 - Entry Mode
00 - Alarm
This output type activates when the selected area is in the entry mode
This output type activates when any type of Intruder alarm occurs in the
and deactivates when the area is not in the entry mode.
selected area, and deactivates when the Intruder alarm is reset.
18 - 2nd Entry Mode
01 - Guard Alarm
This output type activates when the 2nd entry timer for the selected
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘Guard’
area starts and deactivates when the 2nd entry timer expires.
causes an Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates when
the alarm is reset. 19 - Exit Mode
This output type activates when the selected area is in the exit mode and
02 - Guard Access Alarm
deactivates when the area is not in the exit mode.
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘Guard
Access’ causes an Intruder alarm in the selected area and 20 - Entry/Exit Mode
deactivates when the alarm is reset. This output type activates when the selected area is in the entry or
exit mode and deactivates when the area is no longer in the entry or
03 - Entry Alarm
exit mode.
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘Entry/Exit 1
or 2’ causes an Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates 21 - Armed
when the alarm is reset. This output type activates when the selected area is armed and
deactivates when the selected area is disarmed.
04 - Confirmed Alarm
If an area is already in alarm, this output type activates when a different 22 - Full Armed
zone (not on the entry route) is activated in the selected area and This output type activates when the selected area is fully armed and
deactivates at the end of the ‘Confirmation’ time, when a code is entered deactivates when the selected area is disarmed.
within the ‘Abort’ time or when the alarm is reset.
23 - Part Armed
05 - 24Hr Audible This output type activates when the selected area is part armed and
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘24Hr deactivates when the selected area is disarmed.
Audible’ causes an Internal alarm or Intruder alarm in the selected
area and deactivates when the alarm is reset. 24 - Part Arming
This output type activates when the selected area is part arming and
06 - 24Hr Silent deactivates when the selected area arms.
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘24Hr Silent’
causes a silent alarm or Intruder alarm in the selected area and 25 - Force Armable
deactivates when the alarm is reset. This output type activates when the selected area has at least one
zone with the ‘Force Omit’ attribute, and the area is able to be force
07 - 24Hr Gas armed. It will deactivate when the area cannot be force armed.
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘24Hr Gas’
causes a Silent alarm or Intruder alarm in the selected area and 26 - Force Armed
deactivates when the alarm is reset. This output type activates when the selected area is forced to arm
with zones active, and deactivates when all zones are reinstated.
08 - PA Alarm
This output type activates when any type of ‘PA alarm’ i.e. PA 27 - Arm Failed
audible, PA silent or Duress causes a PA alarm in the selected area This output type activates when the selected area fails to arm
and deactivates when the alarm is reset. because a zone is in fault, and deactivates when a valid User code is
entered.
09 - PA Silent
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘PA Silent’ or 28 - Bell SAB
a keypad PA (1 & 3) causes a silent PA alarm in the selected area This output type activates when an External alarm occurs in the
and deactivates when the alarm is reset. selected area, and deactivates when area is disarmed or the ‘Bell
Duration’ timer expires.
10 - Duress
This output type activates when a User code with the ‘Duress’ 29 - Bell SCB
attribute causes a silent PA alarm in the selected area and This output type deactivates when an External alarm occurs in the
deactivates when the alarm is reset. selected area, and activates when area is disarmed or the ‘Bell
Duration’ timer expires.
11 - Fire Alarm
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘Fire’ or a 30 - Strobe
keypad Fire (4 & 6) causes a Fire alarm in the selected area and This output type activates when an External alarm (or Arm Fail) occurs
deactivates when the alarm is reset. in the selected area, and deactivates when area is disarmed (or a valid
User code is entered).
12 - Medical
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘Medical’ or a 31 - Detector Latch
keypad Medical (7 & 9) causes a Medical alarm in the selected area and This output type activates for 5 seconds when the selected area is in
deactivates when the alarm is reset. the exit mode then activates again when the area arms and
deactivates when an Intruder alarm occurs or the selected area is
13 - Auxiliary Alarm disarmed.
This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘Auxiliary’
causes a Silent alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the 32 - Detector Reset
alarm is reset. This output type is normally active, and deactivates for 5 seconds
when the selected area is in the exit mode.
14 - Tamper Alarm
This output type activates when any type of Tamper alarm occurs in 33 - Walk Test Active
the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset. This output type activates when the ‘Walk Test’ procedure is
selected, and deactivates when the ‘Walk Test’ procedure is
15 - Alarm Abort cancelled.
If the selected area is in alarm, this output type activates when a User
code is entered to cancel the alarm in the selected area and 34 - Zones Omitted
deactivates after 10 seconds. This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the
‘Omit’ attribute, is omitted by the user, and deactivates when the
zone is reinstated.
INS176-9 79

35 - 24Hr Zones Omit 54 - Zone Warning

This output type activates when a zone programmed as ‘24Hr Audible’ This output type activates when ‘Custom’ zone type in the selected
or ‘24Hr Silent’ (with the ‘Omit’ attribute) is omitted by the user, and area with the ‘Warning Req’ attribute (see page 52 for details) is
deactivates when the zone is reinstated. activated for the duration of the ‘Warning Delay’ timer (see page 63
for details) and deactivates when the zone activity is cleared.
36 - Reset Required
This output type activates when the selected area requires a reset 55 - Arm Fail Warning
following an alarm, and deactivates when the alarm is reset. This output type activates when the selected area fails to arm after a
period of time (controlled by the area exit time) when using
37 - Door Strike ‘Entry/Exit’ or ‘Exit Term.’ arming and deactivates when the area arms.
This output type activates for the 4 seconds when a User code with the
‘Door Strike’ attribute is entered for the selected area. 56 - Forced Entry
This output type activates for the duration of the ‘Forced Entry’ timer
38 - Chime Mimic (see page 63 for details) when any ‘Guard’ or ‘Custom’ zone with the
This output type activates for 2 seconds when a zone in the selected ‘Guard’ attribute is activated (see page 51 for details),.
area with the ‘Chime’ attribute is activated.
57 - Zones Locked Out
39 - Chime Enabled This output type activates when any zone is locked out following an
This output type activates when ‘Chime’ is enabled for the selected Intruder Alarm activation and deactivates when all zones are clear
area, and deactivates when ‘Chime’ is disabled for the selected area. and reinstated.
40 - DK First Knock 58 - All Areas Armed
This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the This output type activates when all of the selected areas are armed
‘Double Knock’ attribute is activated for the first time, and deactivates and deactivates when any one of those areas is disarmed.
when the zone causes an alarm or the ‘Double Knock Delay’ timer
expires. 59 - Time Arm Disabled
This output type activates when the timed arming procedure is
41 - BP First Knock disabled (see page 52 for details) and deactivates when timed
This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the arming is reinstated.
‘Beam Pair’ attribute is activated for the first time and deactivates when
another zone with the ‘Beam Pair’ attribute, causes an alarm or the 60 - Armed/Alarm
‘Beam Pair Time’ expires. This output type activates when the selected area is armed and
deactivates when the selected area is disarmed
42 - On Test
This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the This output type also pulses when an Intruder alarm occurs in the selected
‘Test’ attribute is placed on test and deactivates when the ‘Soak Test area, and deactivates when the selected area is disarmed.
Time’ expires.
61 - Intruder Alarm
43 - Test Fail This output type activates when an Intruder alarm occurs, and
This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the ‘Test’ deactivates when the Intruder alarm is cancelled.
attribute is placed on test (and fails) and deactivates when an Engineer
code is entered or the ‘Soak Test Time’ expires.
44 - Internal Alarm
 Tamper alarms will not activate this output
This output type activates when an Internal alarm occurs in the selected 62 - Speaker Mimic
area, and deactivates when the alarm is cancelled. This output type activates whenever the internal speaker output is on,
and deactivates when the speaker output is off.
45 - Auto Arming
This output type activates when the selected area ‘Auto Arms’, and 63 - Full Armed/Exit
deactivates when the selected area is disarmed. This output type activates when the selected area is in the full arm exit
mode and then arms and deactivates when the area is disarmed.
46 - Time Arming
This output type activates for 5 minutes prior to the selected area 64 - Detector Fault
being armed using the ‘Control Timers’. This output type activates when a detector fault occurs and
deactivates when the fault is reset.
47 - 1st Code Entered
This output type activates for 30 seconds when a User code with the 65 - Detector Masked
‘Dual Code’ attribute is entered for the selected area. This output type activates when a detector mask occurs and
deactivates when the mask is reset.
48 - 2nd Code Entered
This output type activates for 30 seconds when two User codes with 66 - Fault Present
the ‘Dual Code’ attribute are entered for the selected area. This output type activates when a general fault occurs i.e. Line Fault,
AC Mains Fail, Detector Fault etc. and deactivates when the fault is
49 - Area Secured cleared.
This output type activates whenever a ‘Security Key’ zone type is
used to lock keypads out and deactivates when the keypads are 67 - LED Control
unlocked again. This output type is always activate and deactivates when a User or
Engineers code is entered to gain access to a menu. The output
50 - Part Armed 1 activates again 30 seconds after the user/engineer exits the menu.
This output type activates when a Part Arm 1 is selected for the This output type is for use with detectors that require 0V applied to
selected area and deactivates when part arm 1 is disarmed. disable their LED’s.
51 - Part Armed 2 68 - Full Arm Entry
This output type activates when a Part Arm 2 is selected for the This output type activates when the entry mode is started and
selected area and deactivates when part arm 2 is disarmed. deactivates when the entry mode finishes whenever the system in
Full Armed.
52 - Part Armed 3
This output type activates when a Part Arm 3 is selected for the 69 – Fire Sounder
selected area and deactivates when part arm 3 is disarmed. This output type activates when a Zone programmed as ‘Fire’, or a
Keypad Fire (4&6) causes a Fire Alarm in the selected area and
53 - Custom Alarm
deactivates when the alarm is reset.
This output type activates when any ‘Custom’ zone type causes an
alarm in the selected area and deactivates when a valid user code is
entered.
80 INS176-9

70 – Confirmed PA These output types activate for the duration of the ‘Door Strike’ timer
If an area is in PA alarm this output type activates when one of the when a valid User code (assigned to the same door) is entered and
following happens. deactivates when the timer expires.
These output types are used in conjunction with the ‘Door Control’
 another PA zone is activated

User option (see page 111 for details).
 A tamper is detected from a different device Output Attributes

Assigning an attribute to an output will alter how the output works.
 A second signal from a multi action PA The following attributes can be assigned to any of the various types
listed.
 A global tamper within the timer period

means the attribute is selected, a ‘Dot’ on the display means the
71 – Confirmed Intruder attribute is not selected).
If an area is in Alarm, this output type activates when a different zone
U - User Test
(not the entry route) is activated in the same area. This output type
The output will activate when a user performs a User test (see page
deactivates at the end of the ‘confirmation time’ when a valid code is
117 for details).
entered within the Abort time, or when the alarm is reset.
I - Inverted
Output Group - Zone The output is inverted (an output that applies 0V when active will
become an output that applies 12V when active).
Any zone can be assigned to this output type. Select a zone number.then
select an output type from the following options: L - Latching
When activated, the output will remain on until a valid User code is
Mimic entered.
This output type activates when the selected zone is activated and
deactivates when the zone is secure. This output will work if the zone 1 - Use Pulse Period 1
is armed or disarmed. When activated, the output will remain on for the duration of the
‘Pulse Period 1’ timer (see page 62 for details).
MimicArm
This output type activates when the selected zone is activated and 2 - Use Pulse Period 2
deactivates when the zone is secured. This output will only work if the When activated, the output will remain on for the duration of the
zone is armed. ‘Pulse Period 2’ timer (see page 62 for details).
Alarm 3 - Use Pulse Period 3

This output type activates when the selected zone causes an alarm When activated, the output will remain on for the duration of the
and deactivates when the alarm is reset. This output will only work if ‘Pulse Period 3’ timer (see page 62 for details).
the zone is armed. C - Only Active With Custom Output 1 Stage A
Tamper The output will only operate whilst ‘Custom Output Stage A’ is ‘On’
This output type activates when the selected zone causes a Tamper (see page ‘Custom Outputs’ for details).
alarm and deactivates when the tamper is reset. This output will work R - Random
if the zone is armed or disarmed. The output will activate randomly. A minimum and maximum ‘On’
MimicLat time can also be programmed (see page 62 for details).
This output type activates when the selected zone is activated and
deactivates when the next time the zone is activated. This output will
work if the zone is armed or disarmed. X-10 Outputs
Omitted X-10 Outputs are outputs that can be configured to operate devices
This output type activates when the selected zone is omitted and that are connected to an X-10 controller. These outputs can be
deactivates when the zone is reinstated. assigned a house and unit number.
To Program an output for X-10, proceed as follows:
Output Group - User Code Entered Program the output type to ensure correct operation when the
programmed condition occurs i.e. an output programmed as
Any user can be assigned to this output type. ‘Entry/Exit’ will activate when the selected area is in the entry or exit
This output type activates for 5 seconds when the selected User mode and deactivate when the area is no longer in the entry or exit
code is entered. mode.
Assign any attributes i.e. ‘Pulsed 1’ would cause the output to be
timed for the duration of the ‘Pulse 1’ timer.
Output Group - Control Timer
Assign a House and Unit number i.e. this is the physical address of
Select a Control Timer. the X-10 Unit and ensures that the correct unit in the correct area
These output types activate when the respective control timer turns operates when the output condition is met i.e the correct unit
on and deactivate when the timer turns off. switches on and off during Entry/Exit.
Output Group - PC Control

Select a PC Control.
These output types can be activated and deactivated using a PC
running the Wintex UDL software.
Output Group - Door Control

Select a Door Control from 1,1 to 1,4 (48), 1,1 to 1,8 (88), 1,1 to 2,8
(168) 1,1 to 8-8 (640).
INS176-9 81

Custom Outputs
Custom outputs are NOT physical outputs they are ‘Software outputs
that can be configured to operate under certain conditions. Once
configured these outputs can then be assigned to a physical output
(see system outputs 22-27 and 32-37, page 78 for details).
Custom Output 1 - 4, Stage A
Will activate when switches 1 or 2 and 3 and 4 are active.
Custom Output 1 - 4, Stage B
Will activate when switches 5 or 6 and 7 and 8 are active.
Custom Output 1 - 4, Stage AB
Will activate when switches 1 or 2 and 3 and 4 are active OR
switches 5 or 6 and 7 and 8 are active.
A
2 3 4
AB
5
B
6 7 8
Example
Switch 1 is programmed as: Zone 1 Mimic
Switch 2 is programmed as: Zone 2 Mimic
Switch 3 is programmed as: Armed
Switch 4 is programmed as: Never Active (and inverted)
 Custom Output 1 Stage A will only activate when switches 1

OR 2 AND 3 AND 4 are closed.
i.e. if ZONE 1 or ZONE 2 ACTIVATES whilst the system is
ARMED (switch 4 is always closed).
Assign up to 16 Characters of text to each unit to allow easy

identification when the output needs to be manually triggered directly
from the keypad using the  command i.e. ‘Entrance
Light’.
Zone Group Outputs

Zone Group Outputs will activate when one or more zones on the
control panel are assigned to a Zone Group.
Zone Group Mimic
This output type will become active when a zone assigned to the
group goes active or changes state.
Zone Group Armed
This output type will become active when a zone assigned to the
group goes active when the area the zones is assigned too is armed.
82 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual UDL/Digi Options
5.7 UDL/Digi Options

Reset Digi MSN/Pre-Dial No.

UDL/Digi Options UDL/Digi Options
y y
Reset Digi Reset Digi
P res s R E S E T to res et the
y digimodem - a confima tion 2
tone will be heard
UDL/Digi Options
MSN/Pre-Dial No.
This option should be used whenever a plug-on communicator is
plugged on or removed from the control panel. y
Start Test Call ^ >123 Us e keys 0 - 9 to
enter numbers ,
? O mit = *, C hime = #
Part = 3 s econd Paus e
YES to Select:- Area = 10 S ec ond Pause
UDL/Digi Options *44#
^ >123
y y
UDL/Digi Options
Reset Digi
When a ComISDN is connected to an extension of an ISDN line with
1 more than 1 number, the direct dial number should be programmed in
here, this ensures that the ComISDN will only answer a call when the
UDL/Digi Options direct dial number is dialled. This number can be up to 24 digits.
Start Test Call
y  The Use MSN/Pre-Dial option must also be enabled (see page

88 for details).
Do Test Call = 0
Call PC= 1,2 or 3 When entering the telephone number the following extra keys can be
P res s 0 to s end a tes t call used:
0 or 1, 2 or 3 to initiate a n
upload to a remote computer
Com300 is Idle
Wait Dial Tone
Wait Dial Tone

Dialling No. 1P
Dialling No. 1P
Looking 1st H/S
Looking 1st H/S

Sending Data
Sending Data
Wait Clear Delay
Wait Clear Delay

Com300 is Idle
N
When a plug-on communicator has been fitted to the control panel.
This option can be used to send a test call to the Alarm Receiving
Centre or to initiate a remote Upload/Download call to one of the
programmed call-back numbers.
INS176-9 83

UDL & Digi Options Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Program Digi
YES to Select:-
UDL/Digi Options
y
UDL/Digi Options
Reset Digi
3
UDL/Digi Options
Program Digi
y
ARC 1 Protocol:
Disabled
S ta rt Us e keys 0 - 4 to
S elec t the required Alarm
R eceiving C entre ‘S et’ 2 Pres s N O to s elect
the protocol
s elect a protoc ol or us e
the S C R O LL key to s earch
e.g. 2 = ‘S et’ 2
ARC 2 Protocol: ARC 2 Protocol:

Disabled n > Disabled 2 ARC 2 Protocol:
> Fast Format
y
Us e k eys 0 - 9 to enter
the telephone number
y Pres s NO to edit O mit = *, C hime = #
the Primary Part = 3 s econd Paus e
telephone number Area = 10 S econd Paus e
Primary No.:
n ^ >123 ? 9,08701234567
^ >123
y
Pres s NO to edit O mit = *, C hime = #
the S ec ondary Part = 3 s econd Paus e
Secondary No.:
n ^ >123 ? 9,08701234567
^ >123
y
P res s NO to edit the
y ac count number or pres s Us e k eys 0 - 9 to enter
AR E A to edit the area the acc ount number
a ccount numbers e.g. 1234 = Acc ount 1234
Account Number: Account Number:

n ^ >123 ? 1234
y Pres s NO to edit
the number of
E nter the number
of dia lling attempts
dialling attempts e.g. 3 = 3 a ttempts
Dialling Attempts Dialling Attempts Dialling Attempts

00 n > 00 3 > 03
y
y
Pleas e refer to next page
84 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual UDL & Digi Options
From previous page if

F as t F ormat protocol is s elected
Pres s NO to edit Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t

the reporting the R eporting c ha nnels
channels e.g. 2 & 3 = channels 2, 3
Reporting on: Reporting on: Reporting on:

........ n > ........ 23 > .23.....
y Pres s NO to edit Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t

the Res toring channels
the reporting
Restoring on: Restoring on: Restoring on:

........ n > ........ 23 > .23.....
y Pres s NO to edit Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t

the Open/C los e the O pen/C los e channels
Open/close on: Open/close on: Open/Close on:

........ n > ........ 23 > .23.....
y Pres s NO to
edit the
Pres s NO to
change the
reports options reports option
Config: Use Area Acc Use Area Acc

. . . . . . . n >. . . . . . . n >A . . . . . .
y
y
B ack to the s tart
INS176-9 85

From previous page if C onta ct ID,

S IA L evel II, E a s yC om Pager or S MS
Mes s aging protocols are s elected
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elect the R eport

y Pres s NO to
edit the a reas e.g. 1 = area A
report a reas for 640 s ee below
Report Areas : Report Areas : Report Areas :

........ n > ........ < 1 > A....... <
y Pres s NO to
edit the
Us e the S C R O LL key to s elect
the required R eports option
Pres s NO to
change the
Reports: Priority Alm Normal Alarm Normal Alarm

. . . . . . . . n >. . . . . . . . U .>. . . . . . . n .>A . . . . . .
y Pres s NO to
edit the
Us e the S C R O LL key to s elect
the required R eports option
Pres s NO to
change the
Config: Use Area Acc Use SIA I Use SIA I

. . . . . . . n >. . . . . . . U .>. . . . . . n .>S . . . . .
y
y
B ack to the s tart Report Areas : 1
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
n
Us e the C hime &
Report Areas : 1
ABCDEFGH< JKLMNOP C/P Part keys
to sc roll between

Report Areas : 1 Us e the numeric buttons 1-8 to
ABCDEFGH>JKLMNOP toggle the required areas on or off
86 INS176-9

The plug-on communicator can be programmed to dial up to 3 sets

The following option is only displayed if Contact ID, SIA
of Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) information. Each ‘Set’ consists of the
Level II or EasyCom Pager protocols are selected
following options:
Reports
Protocol
This option defines which events report to the Alarm Receiving
This is the reporting protocol that is used to communicate with the
Centre when using Contact ID or SIA Level II.
Alarm Receiving Centre. The following 4 protocols are supported:
P - Priority Alarm and Cancel Events
• Fast Format: The panel will report using Fast Format. If this The system will report Priority alarm and cancel events to the
option is selected the ‘Reporting Channels’ must be selected Alarm Receiving Centre.
programmed (see below)
A - Normal Alarm and Cancel Events
• Contact ID: The panel will report using Contact ID. If this option The system will report alarm and cancel events to the selected
is selected, the ‘Reporting Areas’ must be programmed (see Alarm Receiving Centre.
below)
O - Open and Close Events
• SIA Level II: The panel will report using SIA Level II The system will report open and close events to the selected
Alarm Receiving Centre.
• EasyCom Pager: The panel will report to an EasyCom type pager
B - Omit and Reinstate Events
• SMS Messaging: The panel will send Short Message Service The system will report omit and reinstate events to the selected
(SMS) text messages to a mobile phone Alarm Receiving Centre.
Primary Telephone Number M - Maintenance Alarm Events
This is the first telephone number that the communicator will dial for The system will report maintenance alarm events to the selected
the Alarm Receiving Centre or the first mobile telephone number to Alarm Receiving Centre.
send SMS to. Each telephone number can be up to 24 digits.
T - Tamper Alarm Events
Secondary Telephone Number The system will report tamper alarm events to the selected Alarm
This is the second telephone number that the communicator will dial Receiving Centre.
for the Alarm Receiving Centre or the second mobile telephone
number to send SMS to. Each telephone number can be up to 24 C - Test Call Events
digits. The system will report test call events to the selected Alarm
Receiving Centre.
Account Number
This is the account number that will be reported to the Alarm Receiving R - Restore Events
Centre. Each account number can be up to 6 digits. The system will report restore events to the selected Alarm
Receiving Centre.
 Each area can also have its own account number (see page
88 & 81 for details).
Dialling Attempts The following option is only displayed if Fast Format
This is the number of times the communicator will try to dial the Alarm Contact ID or SIA Level II protocols are selected
Receiving Centre or Pager telephone number.
Config.
This option defines which secondary options are enabled.
 The number of dialling attempts is limited to 9. If this value is set
to 0, the communicator will never dial out.
A - Area Account
Events are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre using the area
account numbers (see page 88 for details).
The following option is only displayed if the S - SIA Level I / UCP
Fast Format protocol is selected Events are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre using SIA
Level I or or to an SMS Messaging Server using UCP.
Reporting on
This option defines which channels report to the selected Alarm R - Enable Radio-Pad
Receiving Centre. The system will use the Paknet radio-pad to report events to the
selected Alarm Receiving Centre.
Restoring on
This option defines which channels report a restore to the selected G - Enable GSM Module
Alarm Receiving Centre. The system will use the GSM Module to report events to the
selected Alarm Receiving Centre.
Open/Close on
This option defines which channels report Open/Close to the selected A - AV Module
Alarm Receiving Centre. The AV Module will dial the Alarm Receiving Centre.
F - Use GSM First
The GSM module is the primary path when this is enabled
The following option is only displayed if Contact ID I - Connect Via IP
or SIA Level II protocols are selected The system will use the IP Module to report events to the
Reporting Areas selected Alarm Receiving Centre.
This option defines which areas report events to the selected T - Send SIA Text
Alarm Receiving Centre. Text is sent to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using SIA II (this
makes the protocol SIA III)
INS176-9 87

Digi Options Area Accounts 24/48/88/168

y y
Reset Digi Reset Digi
4 6
Digi Options Area Accounts
y y
Digi Options Area A Account:
. . . . . . ------
Pres s NO to edit Us e keys 1 - 8 to select a n
n the Digi option 2 area or us e the S C RO LL k ey
to s ea rch e.g. 2 = Area B .
Digi is Enabled Area B Account:

>. . . . . . ------
Pres s NO to edit
U an option or us e the
n the acc ount number
Blind Dialling
. . .>. . . ^ >123
Pres s NO to Us e k eys 0 - 9 to enter
n s elect/des elect
the option ? the acc ount number
e.g. 1234 = Acc ount 1234
Blind Dialling
. . .>B . . Area B Account:
--1234
y y
There are 6 options that control how the plug-on communicator When using Fast Format, Contact ID or SIA, each area can have its
works. own account number to identify events.
Select options by pressing keys 1 to 8 (a letter on the display means Account Numbers A to H (I to P)
the option is selected, a Dot on the display means the option is not This is the account number that will be reported to the Alarm
selected). Receiving Centre. Each account number can be up to 6 digits.
E - Digi is Enabled
The plug-on communicator will report all system events to the Alarm
Receiving Centre.
 In order for the control panel to use the area account numbers,
the area account Config. option must be enabled (see page 87
P - Pulse Dialling for details).
The plug-on communicator will always dial telephone numbers using
pulse dialling.
3 - Pulse After 3
The plug-on communicator will always dial telephone numbers using
tone dialling. However, if the Communicator fails to dial the number
three times in a row, it will revert to pulse dialling for the remaining
attempts.
B - Blind Dialling
The plug-on communicator will not look for a dial tone before dialling
a telephone number.
U - Use MSN/Pre-Dial
The ComISDN will only answer a call when the programmed
MSN/Pre-Dial telephone number is dialled.
A - Dial All Numbers
If the communicator is acknowledged by the first ARC, it will continue
to dial any other programmed ARC. This is normally used when a
second or third ARC is programmed with SMS Messaging.
88 INS176-9

Area Accounts 640
YES to Select:-
UDL/Digi Options
y
UDL/Digi Options
Reset Digi
6
UDL/Digi Options
Area Accounts
y
Area 1A Account:
------
2 to search for areas .
Area 1B Account:
------
Pres s NO to edit
n the acc ount number
^ >123
? the acc ount number
e.g. 1234 = Acc ount 1234
Area 1B Account:
561234
y
When using Fast Format, Contact ID or SIA, each area can have its
own account number to identify events.
Account Numbers A to H (I to P)
This is the account number that will be reported to the Alarm
Receiving Centre. Each account number can be up to 6 digits.
 In order for the control panel to use the area account numbers,
the area account Config. option must be enabled (see page 87
for details).
INS176-9 89

UDL Options
YES to Select:-
UDL/Digi Options
y
UDL/Digi Options
Reset Digi
5
UDL/Digi Options Us e k eys 0 - 9 to enter
UDL Options the telephone number
O mit = *, C hime = #
y P res s NO to edit the
C all B ack number
Area = 10 S ec ond Paus e
Call Back No. 1 9,08701234567

n ^ >123 ? ^ >123
y
y
Call Back No. 2 F ollow C all B ac k No.1 Ins tructions
y
Call Back No. 3 F ollow C all B ac k No.1 Ins tructions
P res s NO to edit the Us e keys 0 - 9 to program text the

y UDL Pa s s word sa me way tha t a mobile phone work s
UDL Password is:

n Êdit Text >ABC ? ABC123
Edit^Text >123
Pres s NO to Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t Pres s NO to

y edit the an option or use the s elect/des elect
UDL Options S C R OL L key to s earc h the option
UDL Options
. M D . . . n DL Attended
>. M D . . . U Call Defeat ON
. M>D . . . n Call Defeat On
. M>. . . .
y Pres s NO to E nter the number

edit the of rings required
R ings required e.g. 3 = 6 rings
Rings required: Rings required: Rings required:

000 n > 000 6 > 006
y Pres s NO to
edit the
E nter the number
Dialling Attempts e.g. 3 = 3 a ttempts
Dialling Attempts Dialling Attempts Dialling Attempts

00 n > 00 3 > 03
90 INS176-9

The system has the following UDL download options: D - Call Defeat
The modem will answer incoming calls as follows:
Download Call Back Number 1
This is the telephone number that is dialled by the modem when ‘Call- • The modem must detect one or more rings and the number
back Number 1’ is requested by the remote UDL computer. This of rings must NOT exceed the value set up in ‘Rings
telephone number can be up to 24 digits. Required’
Download Call Back Number 2 • When the ringing stops, the panel will start a 30 second
This is the telephone number that is dialled by the modem when ‘Call- delay timer
back Number 2’ is requested by the remote UDL computer. This
telephone number can be up to 24 digits. • If the modem detects ringing before the timer expires it will
answer the call immediately
Download Call Back Number 3
This is the telephone number that is dialled by the modem when ‘Call- L - Armed DL Limited
back Number 3’ is requested by the remote UDL computer. This The panel will not allow download access when the system is armed
telephone number can be up to 24 digits. (also see below).
UDL Password is: A - Any Area Armed

When the remote downloading computer dials into the system, the The panel will not allow download access when any areas are armed.
control panel compares the UDL password sent by the computer with K - Online RKP = Off
UDL password stored in the control panel. If the passwords match, The control panel cannot be accessed using the ‘On-line’ keypad
access to the control panel is granted, if they don’t match, access is feature of the Wintex UDL software.
denied.
Rings Required
This counter controls the number of rings the modem needs to see
 If more than three attempts at reporting are made with a wrong
password, the modem will lock out for 4 hours or until a Master
before it will answer the call (Default = 003).
User code is entered. UDL Dial Attempt

If a ‘Call-Back’ is started, this option controls how many times the
The UDL password programmed in this option must also be modem will try to call the remote downloading computer before
programmed in the customer account on the remote giving up (Default = 003).
downloading computer. This password can be up to 16
characters (numbers and letters).
If no UDL Password has been programmed, access to the  Enter the number of dialling attempts. This number is limited to
9. If this value is set to 0, the communicator will never dial out.
control panel can be gained by using the engineers code as
the UDL Password. This only affects the modem for download access and does
not affect the operation of the communicator in any way.
UDL Options
There are 6 UDL options that affect how and when access to the
control panel via the Wintex UDL software is allowed.
Select options by pressing keys 1 to 6 (a letter on the display means
the option is selected, a Dot on the display means the option is not
selected).
The following UDL options are available:
A - DL Attended
The system will not allow the remote downloading computer access
without user authorisation first.
M - Man Call-Back
The system will not use the automatic call back feature. The user
must instruct the panel to call back the remote downloading
computer.
The Auto Call-Back feature operates as follows:
• The remote downloading computer calls the control panel

and establishes a connection
• The UDL password is verified and the remote downloading
computer instructs the panel to call it back using one of the
3 call back numbers
• The panel hangs up and dials the requested number and re-
establishes the connection with the remote downloading
computer
INS176-9 91

Setup Modules
YES to Select:-
UDL/Digi Options
y
UDL/Digi Options
Reset Digi
7
UDL/Digi Options
Radio/SMS Option Us e k eys 0 - 9 to enter
Us e keys 0 - 9 to s elec t Pres s NO to edit the AR C O mit = *, C hime = #
P res s YE S to s etup an option or use the Primary R adio-Pa d Part = 3 s econd Paus e
y the Ra dio-Pa d S C R OL L key to s earc h telephone number Area = 10 S econd Paus e
Setup Radio-Pad?
y Pad ARC 1 Pri No
U Pad ARC 3 Pri No
n ^ >123 ? 123
^ >123
y
N
U P res s YE S to s etup
an option or use the
P res s NO to enter
the number of
E nter the number
the Ra dio-Pa d S C R OL L key to s earc h dialling attempts e.g. 5 = 5 a ttempts
Setup AV Module?
y AV No.1>
U AV Dial Attempts
03 n AV Dial Attempts
> 03 5 123
^ >123
y
N
U P res s YE S to s etup
an option or use the Pres s NO to Us e keys 0 - 9
the C omIP Module S C R OL L key to s earc h edit the option to enter text
Setup IP Data? Polling Address

y ComIP Adress
U n ^ >123 ? 192168000001
^ >123
y
N
U P res s YE S to s etup P res s No to edit the P res s No to edit the P res s No to edit the
the IRIS Module Acc es s Point Name Us er N ame Us er Pas s word
Setup GPRS Data? User Name Password

Chiron IRIS y Access Pnt Name
y y
y
N
P res s NO to edit the
U S MS C entre Prima ry
T he following 6 options
SMS Centre Pri. will only be s een is a
n ^ >123 ? 07890123456
^ >123 R adio-Pa d or G S M
Module is fitted
y
Pad Serial No.:
Us e k eys 0 - 9 to enter 00000123456
U P res s NO to edit the
S MS C entre S econdary
U
Pad NUA: 1234567
SMS Centre Sec. 07890123456
n ^ >123 ? ^ >123
U
y Last Call From:
aaaaaaa
U
U Pres s NO to
edit the Modem Us e keys 0 - 9 to program text the
s etup s tring s a me way tha t a mobile phone works
FSS:016 (>=03)
RSS:089 (>=50)
Modem Setup Stg.

n ^ >123 ? +CHSN=3,0,0,0
^123
U
y CRC:000 (<=10)
BER:003 (<=10)
U
U Pres s NO to cha nge Us e the S C RO LL k ey to Signal: -85 dBm
GSM BER:00 (<4)
the Modem s peed s elect the required s peed
Modem Speed:
U
2400 n Modem Speed:
> 4800 U Modem Speed:
> 9600
Press R E S E T
to res et C om 1 Com1
y
U
U
Press R E S E T
to res et C om 2 Com2
92 INS176-9

The following options are used when a Paknet Radio-Pad is ComIP Gateway
connected to the control panel in order to achieve DUAL This is the Gateway IP Address that the IP Module communicates
SIGNALLING to an Alarm Receiving Centre, when a MODEM through.
(External PC or Com2400) is used to connect to the control panel or
send SMS messages to mobile phones, when an AV Module is ComIP Mask
connected to the control panel in order to achieve AUDIO This is the Subnet Mask number for the IP Module.
VERIFICATION to an Alarm Receiving Centre or when a TCP/IP Polling/SMG Address
Module is connected for communications over a This is the IP address of a dedicated Polling or SMG Server that the
Broadband/ADSL/DSL Line. IP Module might need to connect to.
Name/SMG Port
Setup Radio-Pad This is a descriptive name for the IP Module or SMG Port and might
Pad ARC 1 Pri No be used for authentication purposes.
This is the first number that is used by the Radio-Pad for reporting
events to ARC 1.
Chiron Iris GPRS Data
Pad ARC 1 Sec No Access Pnt Name
This is the second number that is used by the Radio-Pad for This is the GPRS Access point Name provided by Chiron
reporting events to ARC 1.
User Name
Pad ARC 1 Prefix This is the APN User Name provided by Chiron
This number will prefix the account number for ARC 1.
Password
Pad ARC 2 Pri No This is the APN password provided by Chiron.
events to ARC 2.
SMS Centres
Pad ARC 2 Sec No
SMS Centre Pri.
This is the second number that is used by the Radio-Pad for
This is the first SMS centre telephone number that is used by for
reporting events to ARC 2.
sending SMS to mobile phones. (Default = 07785499993).
Pad ARC 2 Prefix
SMS Centre Sec.
This is the second SMS centre telephone number that is used by for
Pad ARC 3 Pri No sending SMS to mobile phones. (Default = 07860980480)
events to ARC 3. Modem
Pad ARC 3 Sec No Modem Setup Stg.
This is the second number that is used by the Radio-Pad for If a standard PC modem is connected to Com1 or Com2, it may
reporting events to ARC 3. require a configuration string to make it work properly (please refer
to instruction manual of modem being used for details of required
Pad ARC 3 Prefix
AT commands).
Radio-Pad Attempts
This is the number of times the Radio-Pad will try to dial the Alarm
Receiving Centre telephone number before giving up.
 The Setup string is programmed the same way that TEXT
would be programmed and has a maximum length of 16
characters.
 The number of dialling attempts is limited to 9. If this value is

set to 0, the Radio-Pad will never dial out.
The setup string does NOT require AT to be entered at the
beginning as this is done automatically.
Modem Speed
This option allows the speed of a standard PC modem connected to
Setup AV Module Com1 or Com2 to be adjusted.
AV No. 1>
This is the first number that is dialled by the AV Module. Radio-Pad Info
AV No. 3> Pad Serial No.
This is the second number that is dialled by the AV Module. This screen displays the Serial number of the Radio-Pad that is
connected.
AV No. 3>
This is the third number that is dialled by the AV Module. Pad NUA
This screen displays the NUA number of the Radio-Pad that is
AV Dial Attempts connected.
This is how many times the AV Module will attempt to dial before
giving up. Last Call From
This screen displays the NUA number of the last Radio-Pad that
communicated with the Radio-Pad that is connected to the control
 The number of dialling attempts is limited to 9. If this value is
set to 0, the AV Module will never dial out.
panel.
FSS:??? (>=004), Forward Signal Strength
AV Re-Dial Delay RSS:??? (>=050), Reverse Signal Strength
This is the amount of delay that the AV Module uses between re- This screen displays the Radio-Pad Forward (FSS) and Reverse
dialling telephone numbers. (RSS) Signal Strength of the Radio-Pad that is connected to the
control panel.
Setup IP Module
ComIP Address
This is the IP Address of the IP Module.
 The FSS value should be greater than or equal to 4 and the RSS
value should be greater than or equal to 50.
ComIP Port
This is the Port number of the IP Module.
INS176-9 93

CRC:??? (<=009), Cyclic Redundancy Check 0: No Module Fitted - No Devices/PC-Com/ USB-Com

BER:??? (<=009), Bit Error Rate 1: Com300 - Com300 Communicator.
This screen displays the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Bit 2: Com2400 - Com2400 Communicator.
Rate Error (BER) of the Radio-Pad that is connected to the control 3: ComISDN - ComISDN Communicator.
panel.
4: ComIP - ComIP TCP/IP Communication Module.
5: Modem Unit - Standard Serial PC Modem.
 The CRC and BER values should be less than 10. 6: Radio Pad - Paknet RP9 Radio-Pad.
7: GSM Module - GSM Module/Mobile Phone.
GSM Info 8: Crestron System - Crestron Home Automation System.
9: SIP - Serial IP Protocol.
Signal =??? dBm (<=080), GSM Signal
10: RadioPlus - Serial Wireless Receiver.
GSM BER:??? (<=004), GSM Bit Error Rate
This screen displays the signal strength (GSM) and Bit Rate Error 11: Inovonics Radio - Inovonics Serial Wireless Receiver.
(BER) of a GSM Module that is connected to the control panel. 12: WebWayOne/Emizon - WebWayOne/Emizon UDP Module.
13: X-10 Control - X-10 Home Automation Module.
14: IRIS IP - Chiron IRIS Serial TCP/IP Module.
 The GSM value should be greater than or equal to 80 and the
BER value should be less than 9.
Onboard Digicom
Com1 Monitor Screen This option determines what type of device is connected to the plug-
This screen allows you to view the data activity of Com1. Press on digmodem connector on the top right hand corner of the control
RESET to reset the device connected to this port. panel. (Default = Com300).
Com2 Monitor Screen The following devices are available from the above list:
This screen allows you to view the data activity of Com2. Press
0/1/2/3
RESET to reset the device connected to this port.
Com1
Com Port Setup This option determines what type of device is connected to the
Com1 connector on the left hand side of the control panel. (Default
= No Module Fitted).
YES to Select:-
UDL/Digi Options The following devices are available from the above list:
0 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 12 / 13 / 14
y
UDL/Digi Options
Reset Digi  If any of the above devices are connected to the control
panel on Com1 and a PC needs to be connected (for
uploading/downloading) the device must be disconnected
8 from Com 1 and the ‘Factory Default’ button pressed for 3
seconds to allow the PC to talk to the control panel.
UDL/Digi Options
Com Port Setup
If the PC is not connected to the control panel (or is removed)
the Com port will automatically revert back to normal
y operation after 1 minute.
Onboard Digicom
Com300 Module Com2
This option determines what type of device is connected to the
U se the S C RO LL
Com2 connector on the left hand side of the control panel. (Default
y key to s elect the
required C om Port = No Module Fitted).
Com Port 1 The following devices are available from the above list:
No Module Fitted
0 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14
Pres s NO to edit
n the C om Port
Com3*
Com Port 1 This option determines what type of device is connected to the
No Module Fitte< Com3 connector on the left hand side of the control panel. (Default
Us e keys 0 - 8 to s elec t = No Module Fitted).
a n device or us e the
7 S C R OL L key to s earc h The following devices are available from the above list:
e.g. 7 = G S M Module
Com Port 1 0 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14
GSM Module <
y  *640 only
Expansion Port
This option determines what type of device is connected to the
Expansion Port connector (Default = No Module Fitted).
The control panel must be programmed with the type of device that
are connected to each of its coms ports. Available Device Types:
Onboard Digicom, Com Port 1 and 2 0: No Module Fitted - No Devices

1: AV Module - Audio Verification Module
The following devices are available for fitting to the various ports: 2: iD Module - 60IXD iD Module
3: X10 Module - X10 Controller
4:Memory Module –Memory Module (24/48/88/168 only)
 Selecting memory module when none is fitted will prevent

events being recorded to the log.
94 INS176-9

DualCom® Inside (48 Only) Initial Setup

Please follow the instructions in INS176 to install the equipment and
initiate the power up sequence. When applying power for the first
Aerial Siting time, the factory default settings must be loaded. DualCom Inside®
cannot be setup through Wintex, so please follow the diagrams and
ALWAYS do a site survey to find an area of strong signal before
instructions to setup DualCom® Inside. The process for enabling
installation. Installing a Com GSM with a weak signal is bad
DualCom Inside® is as follows:-
installation practice.
1. Install Equipment
The aerial should be mounted vertically at the point of strongest
signal. This is usually the highest point in the building (often the loft 2. Plug Com2400 onto control panel PCB
area).
3. Plug Com GSM onto Com port 1
Avoid installing the aerial directly under metal roofs or within metal
skinned buildings because this will reduce the signal strength and a. Set option switches 1 & 2 to ON and 3 & 4 to
may inhibit operation completely. If this is unavoidable, the OFF
strongest signal will be found away from the metal roof or close to
4. Enter engineers mode on keypad
large external windows or skylights.
5. Select UDL/Digi Options
Avoid installing the aerial close (2 metres) to cable runs, ducting,
structural metalwork, metal pipes, water tanks and electronic 6. Com Port Setup
equipment, e.g. photocopiers, fax machines etc. These can have
similar effects to metal roofs. 7. Select Com2400 as the Digicom
Reliable operation is unlikely with a low signal strength. If the display 8. Select ComIP for Com port 1
shows that the signal strength is 40% or lower, you should improve 9. Enable DualCom Inside®
the signal strength. This may be achieved by repositioning the
aerial. The GPRS aerial lead should not be cut, therefore 10. Choose your ARC
repositioning the aerial may require that the Com GSM is also
11. Enter your Gemini Account number
repositioned.
12. Enter your PSTN number
The DualCom® CS2366 Radio Test Set is ideal for surveying a site.
This handheld unit can check the availability, signal strength and 13. Test the equipment
interference status of all surrounding Base Stations. In addition, it
will identify the best location for a DualCom GPRS aerial within the The flow diagram on the following page shows the procedure to
building, help to avoid sources of interference and can confirm the enable and test DualCom® Inside.
availability of a GPRS service at the proposed site.
YES to Select:- DualCom Inside Auto Set Up
UDL/Digi Options Enabled No
Where a Nokia ‘Net Mon’ phone is available and a Vodafone SIM
Card is fitted, it may be used in the same manner as the CS2366 y y Do not us e Auto S etup until
S ig nal S tren gth s ho ws
Radio Test Set. UDL/Digi Options
Reset Digi
Signal Strength CS Q is > 4 0% & B E R is 0%
CSQ:40% BER:0% if the values are in corre ct
repos ition the an tenn a
Alternatively, a Vodafone mobile phone may be used to locate the 8 y
point of strongest signal. The signal strength indicator is normally a n
UDL/Digi Options SIM ICCID ????
bar or line at the side of the display on the mobile telephone. Note: Com Port Setup ???????????????? 1
The mobile phone MUST use the Vodafone network. A mobile y y y
phone that uses a different radio network will NOT show the correct Onboard Digicom ARC
Th e s ys te m will now d o wnload
th e c on fig ura tion file s from
signal strength. Nothing Fitted 1st County Mon
the C S L s e rvers , DO NO T
pres s th is option m ore than
This ‘mobile phone’ method cannot provide information on the n n onc e.
availability, signal strength and interference status of all radio Base 2 U s e th e U key to s ele ct yo ur AR C
If the AR C you u s e is n ot lis ted y
Stations in the surrounding area. Use of the CS2366 Radio Test Set y g o to Us er Co de an d en te r the
cod e you h ave be en given Test Calls
is recommended. Onboard Digicom
No
Com 2400 Module y
When you have identified the point of the strongest signal, make a n
2 y
note of this point and use it when installing the Com GSM aerial. Gemini Account
1
Com Port 1
Remember: It is always easier to find the point of strongest signal
Nothing Fitted ?????? y
T he s ys tem will no w tes t
before the equipment is fitted to a wall. Moving aerials, cables, n n all e nable d com mun icatio n
E nter you r G emini R ad io paths an d report PAS S or
trunking etc. after installation is wasted time and effort. 4 Acco unt Num ber FAIL for ea ch
y y N
Com Port 1
ComIP Module y N
PSTN Account
N ????
9 n
UDL/Digi Options E nter you r P S TN Acc oun t
DualCom Inside Nu mbe r
y y
n y
1
y
INS176-9 95

• Select “Enable communicator”

EMIZON 21 TCD
Panel IP Setup
Introduction The control panel communicates to the ARC via the EMIZON TCD.
The EMIZON 21 TCD is compatible with all Premier Elite Control
The TCD’s primary signalling path is via an IP network; therefore the
Panels.
control panel need’s an IP address so that it can connect to a local
network.
PCB Layout Ensure that the customer has filled in the “Customer IT Survey
PSTN Connection to RS232 RS485
phone or panel Form” provided by EMIZON.
Secondary path LED
This will give you the information you need to set up the IP data on
SIM
the control.
Primary path LED Card
Power Display see page 93 (Setup IP Module)
LED
GPRS
TCD serial
activity LED Connect the Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port on the TCD
number on label
S/N:02-000123-0 unit and the Network router.
‘Mode’ Button GPRS aerial
1 M S
‘Set’ Button 1 Connection
1
Ethernet port
Commissioning
Now that the programming for the EMIZON21 is complete you need
to power up the TCD and wait 15 seconds (approx) and check the
16 pin Inputs incl. Power Ethernet activity
following –
BSIA Form 175 supply Relay
LED
Outputs
inputs • Flickering light on the Ethernet path LED.
• Flashing green light on the GPRS path LED.
These indicate that the signalling paths are available and that the
PC COM to TCD Connection TCD is ready to be commissioned.
The Emizon 21 connects to the panels Via the PC-COM lead*.
Now you need to call The ARC (084404129009) with the TCD serial
number that is printed on the label located on the front cover, the
 *Order Part Number JAA-0001

ARC will then associate the TCD to this specific installation on their
system and activate it.
This lead converts the TTL port to standard RS232. If this is the first time this TCD is being installed, you will need to
wait for the “tl” indication to appear on the display and then press
You will need to remove the 9 way D-Type serial connector on the
and hold the set button for 4 seconds.
PC-COM adaptor and connect the following wires to the TCD RS232
terminals as shown in the table below. The TCD will contact EMIZON service platform and the display will
alternate between “tl” and 01, then “CA” (completely Active).
C ut Here
Alternate flashing decimal points indicate normal operation following
a successful commission.
The GPRS and Ethernet LED’s will turn green to indicate that they
are communicating with the service platform.
Wintex UDL via EMIZON 21 TCD

To utilise the UDL option you will need to sign up with the Emizon
PC-Com EMiZON 21 UDL service.
Black Wire TCD GND After signing up you will be sent your security certificate along with
UDL server login details.
Yellow Wire TCD TX You will also be given the server IP and port address.
You will need to enter these details in the Network details section of
Blue Wire TCD RX Panel details in Wintex.
You must also install the Emizon UDL software on to the PC you
Once you have connected the wires of the PC-COM to the TCD you intend to use for UDL.
then need to connect the Molex connector to Com1 or Com 2.
Panel Com Port Setup

The Com Port speed needs to be configured to19200 baud if using
Com 2 ( Com 1 is set to 19200 baud at default and cannot be
changed ).
See page 94 (Com Port Setup).
Panel ARC Setup

To set up the ARC account only a few setting need to be made.
see page 84 (Program Digi).
• Set the reporting Protocol to SIA or Contact ID.
• Set an account number.
• Select “Connect via IP” in the protocol options.
see page 88 (Digi Options).
96 INS176-9

WebWayOne Programming the Control Panel

Digi Options
WebWayOne integration with the control panels provides the • Enable communicator must be ticked
following features 7 functions:- • UDL passcode (set in the panel) must match.
• Automatic Commissioning • Dial attempts 1, ring before answer 3
• ATS Monitoring and Fault Reporting
•
•
Alarm and Fault reporting
Remote Support  See page 88
• Upload/Download In ARC’s
• Remote Maintenance 1. Account number (site ID)
2. SIA Level 2/3
The connection is via a TTL link to a Com Port on the control panel. 3. Connect Via IP - ticked
You will need the following to connect and setup the module:- 4. Send SIA text – ticked
• WebWayOne cable 05-0246
• Wintex software
The WebWay solution is quick and easy to install and commission
 See page 84
In Radio-Pad and Com Port options
with your chosen ARC. 1. Com Port 1 – WebWayOne module
2. Local IP address 127.0.0.1
3. Local IP port 50561
R T N B F MF TMP R -T T L-T B -48 5-A R -2 32 -T
SIM 4. Gateway 127.0.0.1
5. Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
A
B P an el 6. Name/SMG port 50561
ON
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
R TN

B
C See page 93
Wintex Programming
+ PWR- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 12 13 14 1 5 1 6 A+ A- 1A 1B 2 A 2B 3A 3B
All other settings are done by the Wintex Comms menu This can be
P ower configured on a local PC plugged on to Com Port 2 with the Module
running on Com Port 1 or vice versa.
The Auto Take On process completes the installation. The WebWay Digi Options
servers automatically programme the module to work seamlessly
with the panel to enable SIA alarms, Upload Download and secure
remote access using the Texecom Wintex software.
Automatic SIA 3 with text enriched messages
All alarms generated by the Alarm System are automatically sent to
the AMS using SIA. SIA messages provide a full audit trail of an
event - which detector, location, time and date, and a permanent
record of every alarm. Messages for set and unset include who,
where, time, and date, all recorded.
Serial Panel Connection
Connect the 05-0246 connector cable to the Texecom onto Com
Port 1. Com port 2 usually has a local PC or other peripheral
equipment connected.
Texecom TTL Ca ble 05-0246
WebWay SPT Texecom Enter the options shown including the callback number.
T - Red
R - Green Com Port 1
RTN - Blue
Connect the WebWay PWR + and - to any relevant Power

(+12V/+24V) and Ground (0V) terminals.
The Texecom panel configuration is uploaded via the Wintex
software and downloaded to the panel on com port 2 from a local
PC. The following requires configuring in the panel.
INS176-9 97

ARC's
“Account No:” should match the ARC Site/Chip ID and tick the
relevant trigger event boxes relevant to the premises.
• Connect Via IP Checked
• Protocol SIA Level2/3
Radio Pad and Com Port Options
If the SMS call centre is utilised the engineer should enter the
appropriate number and it should be configured under:
SMS Call Centre 1&2

The SMS centre telephone number is used to send SMS text
messages to mobile phones. (Default = 07860980480).
Com-IP Details
 if the panel is being programmed with a laptop on com port

2, and the WebWay is connected to com port 1 the SPT will
be lost from the panel until the Wintex session is closed.
98 INS176-9

Programming
Chiron IRIS For both Alarms and Wintex upload/download the following should
The Chiron IRIS Touch range of communicators offers a way of be programmed.
transmitting alarm signals to an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) over UDL/DIGI Options
an Ethernet (IP) path, GPRS path, and PSTN path or a Combination For full details on the options listed please see page 84 to 94
as opposed to using a traditional PSTN lines.
Program Digi
To connect to the control panel an RS232 Interface is required. For Arc 1 Protocol i.e. Fast Format, Contact ID, or SIA level 2/3.
the IRIS 400 series this is a modified PC-Com JAA-0001 and for the
Primary No Set this to the IP address of the Monitoring Centre in
IRIS 600 series is a Chiron Tex 600 lead. a 12 digit format 80.176.196.135 = 080176196135
Secondary No Leave blanks as the IRIS System will receive the

The TTL connection is made to either Com1 or Com 2 on the
secondary number from the Monitoring Centre
Control panel. Secure Apps platform.
Account Number Enter in the account number from the Monitoring

PCB Layout Centre, 4or 6 digits.
C hiron IR IS 400 S eries
Aux Dialler Attempts Leave as the default 3
0V for P in Inputs P in Inputs
R elay Outputs Voltage
Report options The Reporting Options will change depending on the
0V F O R INP UT S 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D -D C -C B -B A-A P O WE R
alarm format selected, please set up the various
Dial
INP UT S INP UT S reporting option for the Alarm event you wish to send
C apture to the Monitoring Centre
Config Enable the Connect via IP (Key press 7).
Digi Options
S erial R S 232
Enable the Digi (key press 1) you should now see E on option screen
E thernet
now.
UDL Options
UDL Password Must match the UDL password in Wintex
D- D+ T- T +
R s 485
S IM C ard Antenna Setup Modules

Setup IP Data 1 = ComIP Address for the IRIS e.g. 192.168.0.10
S ER IA L
GP R S
P STN
P OLL
DIA L
2 = ComIP Port
US B
E TH
S YS
T AMP E R
RF
3 = ComIP Gateway e.g. 192.168.001.001

C hiron IR IS 600 S e ries Aux
Voltage
1 2V 0 V A B
 To use DHCP leave the ComIP Address &
Gateway blank
ComIP Netmask Enter the network subnet mask i.e. 255.255.255.000

E thernet S erial Polling/SMG IP Set this to the IP address of the Monitoring Centre in
R S 232 a 12 digit format i.e. 80.176.196.135 =
080176196135.
Com Port Setup

Com Port 1 Set to IRIS IP Module
Antenna
S IM C ard GPRS Info

GPRS
P O LL
SYS
SER
E TH
To programme the APN and the User Name & Password please see
Aux page 93
Voltage
To programme and commission any other features of the IRIS units
1 2 3 4 A-A B-B
please refer to the Chiron IRIS installation manual.
INP UT S R E L AYS
PC Com Modification
Cut the DB9 Male end of off the PC Com and wire as follows
IRIS RS232 (DB9

PC Com
Female)
Pin 2 Yellow
Pin 3 Blue
Pin 5 Black
Tex600 Lead
300mm
INS176-9 99

Zone Alarm Reporting Codes

The Reporting codes for Contact ID and SIA are fully configurable, however these codes can only be changed using Wintex downloading software.
The following tables show the default codes for each event on the system:
Default Zone Event Codes
No Zone Type Event Reporting Group Contact ID SIA

00 Entry/Exit 1 Alarm Alarm 134 BA
Alarm Restore Restore 134 BH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 573 BB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 573 BU
01 Entry/Exit 2 Alarm Alarm 134 BA
02 Guard Alarm Alarm 132 BA
03 Guard Access Alarm Alarm 132 BA
04 24Hr Audible Alarm Tamper 133 BA
05 24Hr Silent Alarm Tamper 133 BA
06 Audible PA Alarm Priority Alarm 123 PA
Alarm Restore Restore 123 PH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 573 PB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 573 PU
07 Silent PA Alarm Priority Alarm 122 HA
Alarm Restore Restore 122 HH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 573 HB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 573 HU
08 Fire Alarm Alarm Priority Alarm 110 FA
Alarm Restore Restore 110 FH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 571 FB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 571 FU
09 Medical Alarm Priority Alarm 100 MA
Alarm Restore Restore 100 MH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 572 MB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 572 MU
10 24Hr Gas Alarm Alarm Tamper 151 GA
Alarm Restore Restore 151 GH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 572 GB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 572 GU
100 INS176-9

No Zone Type Event Reporting Group Contact ID SIA

11 Auxiliary Alarm Alarm Tamper 150 UA
Alarm Restore Restore 150 UH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 572 UB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 572 UU
12 24Hr Tamper Alarm Alarm Tamper 137 TA
Alarm Restore Restore 137 TR
Omit Omit/Reinstate 572 TB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 572 TU
13 Exit Terminator Alarm Open/Close --- --
Alarm Restore Open/Close --- --
14 Keyswitch - Momentary Alarm Open/Close 409 OP
Alarm Restore Open/Close 409 CL
15 Keyswitch - Latching Alarm Open/Close 409 OP
Alarm Restore Open/Close 409 CL
16 Security Key Alarm Open/Close 421 DK
Alarm Restore Open/Close 421 DG
17 Omit Key Alarm Omit/Reinstate --- --
Alarm Restore Omit/Reinstate --- --
18 Custom Alarm Omit/Reinstate --- --
Alarm Restore Omit/Reinstate --- --
19 Confirmed PA Audible Alarm Priority Alarm 123 PA
Alarm Restore Restore 123 PH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 573 PB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 573 PU
20 Confirmed PA Silent Alarm Priority Alarm 122 HA
Alarm Restore Restore 122 HH
Omit Omit/Reinstate 573 HB
Reinstate Omit/Reinstate 573 HU
INS176-9 101

Non-Zone Event Types

The default Non-Zone Event codes are as follows:
No Type Event Reporting Group Contact ID SIA ID

22 Keypad Medical Alarm Priority Alarm 100 MA Keypad No *
Restore Restore 100 MH Keypad No *
23 Keypad Fire Alarm Priority Alarm 115 FA Keypad No *
Restore Restore 115 FH Keypad No *
24 Keypad Audible PA Alarm Priority Alarm 120 PA Keypad No *
Restore Restore 120 PH Keypad No *
25 Keypad Silent PA Alarm Priority Alarm 122 PA Keypad No *
Restore Restore 122 PH Keypad No *
26 Duress Code Alarm Alarm Priority Alarm 121 HA User No
Restore Restore - 122 HH User No
27 Alarm Active Alarm Not Reported - - -
Restore Not Reported - - -
28 Bell Active Alarm Not Reported - - -
29 Zones Locked Out Alarm Alarm 130 BA Zone No
30 Verified Cross Zone Alarm Alarm Alarm 130 BV 00
31 User Code Alarm Not Reported - - User No
32 Exit Started Alarm Not Reported - - Keypad No
33 Exit Error (Arming Failed) Alarm Open/Close 457 EE 00
34 Entry Started Alarm Not Reported - - -
35 Area Arm Suite Alarm Open/Close - - Suite No 1 - 8
Restore Open/Close - - -
36 Armed with Line Fault Alarm Not Reported - - User No
37 Open/Close (Full Arm) Alarm Open/Close 401 OP User No
Restore Open/Close 401 CL User No
38 Open/Close (Part Arm) Alarm Open/Close 401 OP User No
Restore Open/Close 401 CL User No
39 Auto Open/Close Alarm Open/Close 403 OA 00
Restore Open/Close 403 CA 00
40 Auto Arm Deferred Alarm Open/Close 405 CE User No
Restore Open/Close - - -
41 Open After Alarm (Alarm Abort) Alarm Open/Close 406 OR 00
42 Remote Open/Close Alarm Open/Close 407 OP 00
Restore Open/Close 407 CL 00
43 Quick Arm Alarm Not Reported - - -
Restore Open/Close 408 CL Keypad No *
44 Recent Closing Alarm Open/Close 459 CR 00
45 Reset After Alarm Alarm Restore - - Reset ID ****
46 Power Output Fault Alarm Maintenance 300 YP Device ID **
Restore Restore 300 YQ Device ID **
47 AC Fail Alarm Maintenance 301 AT 00
Restore Restore 301 AR 00
102 INS176-9


48 Low Battery Alarm Maintenance 302 YT 00
Restore Restore 302 YR 00
49 System Power Up Alarm Maintenance 305 RR 00
50 System Over Voltage Alarm Maintenance 321 YA 00
Restore Restore 321 YH 00
51 ATS Path Fault Alarm Maintenance 351 LT Line Fault ID ***
Restore Restore 351 LR Line Fault ID ***
52 Fail to Communicate Alarm Maintenance 354 YC 00
53 Download Start Alarm Maintenance 411 RB 00
54 Download End Alarm Maintenance 412 RS -
55 Log Capacity Alert (80%) Alarm Maintenance 623 JL 00
56 Date Changed Alarm Maintenance 625 JD User No
57 Time Changed Alarm Maintenance 625 JT User No
58 Installer Programming Start Alarm Maintenance 627 LB User No
59 Installer Programming End Alarm Maintenance 628 LS User No
60 Panel Box Tamper Alarm Tamper 145 TA 00
Restore Restore 145 TR 00
61 Bell Tamper Alarm Tamper 145 TA Device ID **
Restore Restore 145 TR Device ID **
62 Auxiliary Tamper Alarm Tamper 145 TA Device ID **
63 Expander Tamper Alarm Tamper 145 TA Device ID **
64 Keypad Tamper Alarm Tamper 145 TA Keypad No *
Restore Restore 145 TR Keypad No *
65 Expander Trouble (Network Error) Alarm Tamper 333 ET Device ID **
Restore Restore 333 ER Device ID **
66 Keypad Trouble (Network Error) Alarm Tamper 333 ET Keypad No *
Restore Restore 333 ER Keypad No *
67 Fire Zone Tamper Alarm Tamper 373 FT Zone No
Restore Restore 373 FJ Zone No
68 Zone Tamper Alarm Tamper 383 TA Zone No
Restore Restore 383 TR Zone No
69 Keypad Lockout Alarm Tamper 421 JA Keypad No *
70 Code Tamper Alarm Alarm Tamper 421 JA Keypad No *
71 Soak Test Alarm Alarm Test - - Zone No
Restore Restore - - Zone No
72 Manual Test Call Alarm Test 601 RX 00
73 Automatic Test Call Alarm Test 602 RP 00
74 User Walk Test Start/End Alarm Test 607 TS User No
Restore Restore 607 TE User No
INS176-9 103


75 NVM Defaults Loaded Alarm Not Reported - - Zone No
Restore Not Reported - - Zone No
76 First Knock Alarm Not Reported - - -
77 Door Access Alarm Not Reported - - -
78 Part Arm 1 Alarm Not Reported - - -
Restore Close 401 CL User No
81 Auto Arming Start Alarm Not Reported - - -
Restore Close 401 CL 000
82 Confirmed Alarm Alarm Alarm 139 BV Zone No
83 Prox TAG Alarm Not Reported - - -
84 Access Code Changed/Deleted Alarm Not Reported - - -
85 Arm Failed Alarm Not Reported - - -
86 Log Cleared Alarm Maintenance - - -
Restore Not Reported 401 CL 000
87 iD Loop Shorted Alarm Tamper 145 TA 000
Restore Restore 145 TR -
88 Communication Port Alarm Maintenance - - 000
Restore Restore - - 000
89 TAG System Exit (Batt. OK) Alarm Not Reported - - Zone No
Restore Not Reported - - Zone No
90 TAG System Exit (Batt. LOW) Alarm Not Reported - - -
91 TAG System Entry (Batt. OK) Alarm Not Reported - - -
92 TAG System Entry (Batt. LOW) Alarm Not Reported - - -
93 Microphone Activated Alarm Not Reported - - -
94 AV Cleared Down Alarm Not Reported - - -
95 Monitored Alarm Alarm Alarm 220 BA Zone No
Restore Restore 220 BH Zone No
96 Expander Low Voltage Alarm Maintenance 143 ET Device No
Restore Restore 143 ER Device No
97 Supervision Fault Alarm Maintenance 355 UT Zone No
Restore Restore 355 UJ Zone No
98 PA From Remote FOB Alarm Priority Alarm 121 121 Zone No
Restore Restore HA HH Zone No
99 RF Device Low Battery Alarm Maintenance 384 XT Zone/User No
Restore Restore 384 XR Zone/User No
100 Site Data Changed Alarm Maintenance - - -
Restore Restore - - -
101 Radio Jamming Alarm Maintenance 344 XQ 000
Restore Restore 344 - 000
104 INS176-9


102 Test Call Passed Alarm Not Reported - - -
103 Test Call Failed Alarm Not Reported - - -
104 Zone Fault Alarm Maintenance 380 UT Zone No
105 Zone Masked Alarm Alarm 380 UT Zone No
106 Faults Overridden Alarm Maintenance - - 000
Restore Not Reported - - 000
107 PSU AC Fail Alarm Maintenance 301 AT Device No
Restore Restore 301 AR Device No
108 PSU Low Battery Fail Alarm Maintenance 302 YT Device No
Restore Restore 302 YR Device No
109 PSU Low Output Fail Alarm Maintenance 300 YP Device No
Restore Restore 300 YQ Device No
110 PSU Tamper Alarm Tamper 333 TA Device No
Restore Restore 333 TR Device No
111 Door Access Alarm Open 422 DG Device No
112 CIE Reset Alarm Maintenenace 305 RR 000
Restore Not Reported - - 000
113 Remote Command Via Com Port
114 User Added Alarm Not Reported - - -

115 User Deleted Alarm Not Reported - - -
116 Confirmed PA Alarm Priority Alarm 139 BV Zone No
117 User Ack Alarm Not Reported - -
Restore Not Reported - -
118 Power Unit Failures Alarm Maintenance Alarm - YP -
Restore Maintenance Restore - YQ -
119 Charger Fault Alarm Maintenance Alarm - YP -
Restore Maintenance Restore - YQ -
INS176-9 105

Tamper Fault ID *** Reset ID ****

Panel ID is transmitted as follows: Reset ID is transmitted as follows:
Device ID Device ID
Panel 000 Panel (RR) 00
Engineer 01
Keypad ID is transmitted as follows:
Anti-Code 02
Network
RedCARE 03
RKP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Keyswitch 04
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81
User 05
2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82
Wintex 07
3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 Expander ID is transmitted as follows:
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 Network
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 EXP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82
3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
Expander ID is transmitted as follows:
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
Network
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85
EXP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87
2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88
3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
Power Fault ID ****
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 Reset ID is transmitted as follows:
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 Device ID
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 Bell Under Voltage 00
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 Digi Under Voltage 01
System Under Voltage 02
ATS Path Fault ID *** Aux Under Voltage 03
Line Fault ID is transmitted as follows:
Battery Under Voltage 04
Device ID
Network 1 Under Voltage 05
Panel 00
Network 2 Under Voltage* 06
RedCARE 01
Network 3 Under Voltage** 07
Com 300/Com 2400 02
Com IP 002
Expander ID is transmitted as follows: Network 6 Under Voltage** 10
Network Network 7 Under Voltage** 11
EXP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Network 8 Under Voltage** 12
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81
2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 *168 & 640 Only
3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 **640 Only
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88
106 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Setup Users
5.8 Setup Users

User 010 Remote > Activa te the R adio F OB to
O Activate Device as s ign it to the us er
ASSIGNING TAG
YES to Select:-
Setup Users
1 Present TAG Now! P res en t TAG to
as s ign it to us er
A Add TAG to User?

1=New, 2=Import 2 IMPORTING TAG
Present TAG Now!
y E nter Us er Number P res s NO to exit ‘Add TAG’

i.e. 10 = Us er 10 R outine
Setup Users Setup Users Do You Want to Pres s YE S to delete the

User002: ? Enter User010: R DELETE User 010? Us er from ths s ys tem
y y
Allow Arming
>A D O . . . . F
E nter Us er code number
4, 5 or 6 digits long Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t
e.g. 1234 = 1234 U a Us er option or us e the
Enter User Code> Enter User Code>
------ ? --1234 Aut o Yes
A D O . . .>. F
Pres s NO to
y y n s elect/des elect
the Us er option
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elect a rea s e.g. 2 = B . Aut o Yes

Us e the area key to toggle between areas
A D O . . .>Y F
A to H and I to P (P remier 168 only)
F or 640 s ee below y
User 10 Areas > If the Us er If the Us er Menu option is
> A******* < 2 User 10 Areas >
> AB****** < menu option s elec ted, the ‘Us er C onfig’
is not s elected menu will be dis played
y y
Change Own Code
>C . . . . . . .
a Us er type U a Us er C onfig. or us e the
e.g. 2 = Manager
System Test
If a C us tom Us er C . .>. . . . .
User 10 Type > User 10 Type > type is s elected, this Pres s NO to
Not In Use 2 Manager ‘Us er O ptions ’ menu
n s elect/des elect
will be dis played the Us er option
y All Us er types System Tests
E xcept C us tom y O P T IO NAL C . .>T . . . .
S elect a T imer C ontrol

User 10 Door Ctl
e.g. 5 = T imer C ontrol 5 > ******** <
User 10 Locked
by Timer 5 User 10 Locked
by Timer 1 5
This option is only
y available to Us ers
with the ‘Door S trike’
User 10 Door Ctl
> ****5*** <
attribute
y
y Pres s NO to
edit the U ser
Us e the key pa d to program
text the s a me way tha t a
name text mobile phone works
User 10 Name is: Claire

n Êdit Text >ABC ? Edit Text ^>ABC
y O P T IO NAL
y
ASSIGNING TAG
Add TAG to User?
1 Present TAG Now! Pres ent the Proximity TAG
to the ‘Prox’ s ymbol on the User002 Area > 1
1=New, 2=Import A*******<*******
k eypad and a beep will be heard
2 IMPORTING TAG
Present TAG Now! Us e the C hime &
2 C/P Part keys
to s c roll between
Area Groups 1,2,3 & 4
User002 Area > 1

A*******<*******
Us e the Area key to s elect either
A Use the numeric buttons 1-8 to
Zone 001 Areas1

*******>IJKLMNOP
INS176-9 107

Setup Users Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Default User Codes User Types

When the control panel is first powered up and the factory default The User type determines which functions are available to the user i.e.
settings are loaded (see page 42 for details), only the Engineer code arming, disarming etc. In addition, the User type also determines which
and the Master User code exist. options the user can access i.e. Setup Users etc. The following User
types are available:
The Factory default Engineer User code is
0: Engineer
. Engineers can arm, disarm, omit zones, silence alarms and reset
their assigned areas. In addition, Engineers can access the
 The Engineer is always User 00.

Programming Menu and all User menu options. Engineers can also
change their own User codes and assign new users to the system.
If the Engineer code has been lost or forgotten, it can normally
be reset back to the factory default without having to
reprogram the entire system (see page 47 for details).  The default Engineer User type (User 00) can assign any User
types to the system.
Resetting the Engineer code is only possible if the NVM has
Engineers can only disarm areas that were armed using an
not been locked (see page 64 for details).  Engineer code. They cannot disarm any areas that were armed
with another User code.
The Factory default Master User code is
1: Master
. Master users can arm, disarm, omit zones, silence alarms and reset
their assigned areas. In addition, Master users can access all User
menu options. Master users can also change their own User codes
 The Master User is always User 01.  and assign new users to the system. The Master user will also
activate any output programmed as ‘Door Strike’.
If the Master User code has been lost or forgotten, it can be
reprogrammed by the Engineer in this menu.  2: Manager
Manager users can arm, disarm, omit zones, silence alarms and
reset their assigned areas. In addition, Manager users can access all
Programming New Users User menu options except Setup Users. Manager users can also
change their own User codes.
Each User code on the system is made up of the following elements.
Items 1, 2 or 8, 3 and 4 which are essential for the code to function 3: Standard
correctly and items 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 which are optional. Standard users can arm all the areas assigned to the code and disarm
all the areas assigned to the code (even if only one area is in entry or
1. User Number
alarm) from any keypad, omit zones, silence alarms and reset their
When users are assigned to the system, they need to be identified by
assigned areas. In addition, Standard users can access all User menu
the control panel. Each user is identified as Users 01, 02, 03 etc. User
options except for Setup Users, System Tests, and Change Timers.
01 is always the Master User.
Standard users can also change their own User codes.
2. User Code
4: Local
This is a unique 4, 5 or 6 digit code number that is assigned to a user.
Local users behave the same way as Standard users. However, Local
The system will allow a mixture of different length User codes. The User
users will only arm the area that the keypad is assigned to and disarm
code must be entered at a keypad to operate the alarm system.
the area that is in entry or alarm (provided that the code has that area
assigned to it
 There is a programmable ‘Black List’ of banned user codes

which can be set and edited via Wintex UDL software.
5: Duress
Duress users behave the same way as Standard users. However,
Duress users will activate any outputs programmed as ‘Panic Alarm’ or
3. User Areas ‘Duress’ whenever their code is entered.
Any number of areas can be assigned to the selected user. Assigning
areas to a user determines which areas can be armed, disarmed, reset
etc. by that user. In addition, assigning areas to a user determines
which of the area related functions i.e. omitting zones, silent arming etc.
will be available to that user.
 Duress users can only be set up by an Engineer if system is set to
Grade 3 – see configuration option 37.
4. User Types 6: Arm Only

The User type determines which functions are available to the user i.e. Arm Only users can only arm or reset their assigned areas and view
arming, disarming, resetting etc. In addition, the User type also the event log.
determines which options the user can access i.e. Setup Users,
System Tests etc. 7: Door Strike
Door Strike users have no access to User functions or Menu options.
5. User Time Lock However, Door Strike users will activate any outputs programmed as
This option allows the selected user to be denied access to the ‘Door Strike’ whenever their code is entered (see page 80 for details).
system at different times of the day and days of the week. When a
Control Timer is assigned to a user, the User code will not allow 8: Vacation
access to any functions during the timers ‘On’ period. Vacation users behave the same way as Standard users. However,
Vacation users will automatically be deleted the first time that the
6. User Name Text Master User code (User 01) is used to disarm the system.
Each user can be assigned up to 8 characters of name text. The
name text is displayed whenever a code is entered and also when
reading the log, making identification of people using the alarm
easier.
 Vacation user can only be deleted by the Master user after it
has been used to disarm the system at least once.
7. Door Control 9: Custom

This option would normally be used for access control. Users are Custom users can access any functions and User menu options that
able to open/unlock doors that are assigned to their user code. have been assigned to them in ‘User Options 1 or 2’ and ‘User
Config’. This flexibility allows new User types to be created that have
8. Proximity TAG their own unique set of characteristics. Any number of Custom users
As well as or instead of operating the alarm system with a code can be assigned to the system and each one will respond differently,
number, it is also possible to operate it by presenting a Proximity depending on the functions and features that have been assigned to
TAG to the keypad (this requires a Proximity keypad). them.
108 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Setup Users
User Functions and Options

The table below shows the options that are available to each user.
 All users that have access to the ‘Arming Menu’ have the ability to ‘View Zone Status’, ‘Set Chime Areas’, ‘View Act. Faults’ and ‘View Act.
Counts’.
All users have access to the ‘User Menu’ have the ability to ‘View Event Log’, ‘Adjust Volumes’ and ‘Print Event Log’.
User Options 1
Engineer Master Manager Standard Local Duress Arm Only Door Strike Vacation Custom
Arming Arming Arming Arming Arming Arming Arming - Arming -
Disarming Disarming Disarming Disarming Disarming Disarming - - Disarming -
Omitting Omitting Omitting Omitting Omitting Omitting - - Omitting -
Eng. Reset - - - - - - - - -
- - - - Local Arming - - - - -
- - - - Local Disarm - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First - - Disarm First -
User Options 2
User Menu User Menu User Menu User Menu User Menu - User Menu - User Menu -
Eng. Program - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - Vacation -
Door Strike Door Strike - - - - - Door Strike - -

Call Rem. PC Call Rem. PC Call Rem. PC - - - - - - -
- - - - - Duress Code - - - -
Open/Close Open/Close Open/Close Open/Close Open/Close Open/Close Open/Close - Open/Close -
User Config.
Engineer Master Manager Standard Local Duress Arm Only Door Strike Vacation Not Used
Change Code Change Code Change Code Change Code Change Code - - - - -
Chime Zones Chime Zones Chime Zones Chime Zones Chime Zones - - - - -
Change Timer Change Timer Change Timer - - - - - - -
System Tests System Tests System Tests - - - - - - -
Setup Users Setup Users - - - - - - - -
Eng. Access Eng. Access Eng. Access Eng. Access Eng. Access - Eng. Access - Eng. Access -
Add Eng. code - - - - - - - - -
NVM Locking - - - - - - - - -
INS176-9 109

Engineer Utilities Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
R - Call Rem. PC
User Options 1 The selected user has access to the ‘Call Remote PC’ option,
allowing them to initiate a call to a remote upload/download PC.
This menu defines which options are available to the user when their
code is entered. C - Duress Code
The selected user will activate any outputs programmed as ‘Duress’,
Press  to scroll through the options and press  to select whenever their codes are entered.
  (‘Letter’ = option IS selected, ‘Star’
them or use keys - O - Open/Close
= option is NOT selected). The selected user will report open (disarm) and close (arm) events to
an Alarm Receiving Centre every time they arm or disarm.
The following options are available:
A - Arming User Config.
Areas assigned to the selected user can be armed.
This menu will only be displayed if a Custom User type is selected
D - Disarming AND ‘User Menu’ (User Option: U) is enabled (see page 110 for
Areas assigned to the selected user can be disarmed. details).
O - Omitting This menu defines which menu options are available to the user when
Zones assigned to the same areas as the selected user can be their code is entered.
omitted, providing that they have the ‘omit’ attribute assigned to
them.
Press to scroll through the options and press  to select
R - Eng. Reset (Engineers only) them or use keys  -  (‘Letter’ = option IS selected, ‘Star’
Areas programmed as ‘Engineer reset’ can be reset after an Alarm = option is NOT selected).
has occurred.
The following options are available:
a - Local Arming
The User can only arm areas that the keypad is assigned to. C - Change Code
The selected user can change their own User code.
d - Local Disarm
The User can only disarm areas that the keypad is assigned to, or Z - Chime Zones
areas that are in entry or alarm (provided that the code has that area The selected user can access the ‘Edit Chime Zones’ option,
assigned to it). allowing them to select which zones chime when activated.
Y - Auto ‘YES’ T - Change Timers
The selected user can access the ‘Override Timers’, ‘Alter Timers’,
After a User code has been entered, pressing the  key to ‘Alter Part Arms’, ‘Alter Hol. Dates’ and ‘Edit Phone No.’ menu
confirm the next action is not required.
options.
F - Disarm First
S - System Tests
If an area is already armed and the selected user enters their code,
The selected user can access the ‘System Tests’ option, allowing
the ‘Disarm’ option is displayed.
them to walk test zones, activate the external sounder etc..
User Options 2 U - Setup Users

The selected user can access the ‘Setup Users’ option, allowing
This menu is only displayed if the Custom User type is selected (see them to alter existing users or assign new users. However, users
page 109 for details). cannot assign User types to the system that have a higher access
level than themselves. Also, if a user assigns a Custom User type,
This menu defines which options are available to the user when their functions that are not available to them cannot be assigned to the
code is entered. Custom user.
Press to scroll through the options and press  to select E - Eng. Access
The selected user can access the ‘Enable Engineer’ option, allowing
them or use keys  -  (‘Letter’ = option IS selected, ‘Star’ them to authorise Engineer access or Remote UDL access to the
= option is NOT selected). system.
The following options are available: A - Add Eng. Code (Engineers only)
U - User Menu Only Available to Engineers.
The selected user has access to the User menu. However, the N - NVM Locking (Engineers only)
selected user will only have access to options assigned in ‘User
Only Available to Engineers.
Config.’ (see page 110 for details).
E - Eng. Program (Engineers only)
Only Available to Engineers. User Time Lock
D - Dual Code This option allows the selected user to be denied access to the
The selected user can only access an area when a second User system at different times of the day and days of the week. When a
code (with the ‘Dual Code’ attribute and also assigned to the same Control Timer is assigned to a user, the User code will not allow
area) is entered. Dual Code users will also activate the ‘1st and 2nd access to any functions during the timer ‘On’ period (see page 68
Code’ output type. for timer programming).
V - Vacation The first 4 options (48) or 6 options (88/168) will lockout the
The selected user is enabled the first time it is used to disarm the selected user (Code and TAG) when the corresponding control
system and can be used as many times as required. However, it will timer is active. The last two options will lock out the selected users
be automatically deleted the first time that the User 01 code is used TAG (T) when Custom Output 2 Stage A is active or lock out the
to disarm. Vacation users will only be deleted by the Master user, selected users Code (C) when Custom Output 2 Stage B is active.
once they have been used on the system.
S - Door Strike This allows conditions to be set up in the custom outputs and then
The selected user will activate any outputs programmed as ‘Door the TAG or Code to be locked out during those conditions i.e.
Strike’, whenever their codes are entered. Custom Output 2 Stage B could be programmed to activate during
entry, resulting in the code being disabled during the entry period.
110 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Engineer Utilities
choose which zones (and therefore expander) the Premier Elite

User Name Text SmartKey™ will use for its routeing, LED and Aux functions can also
be changed within the “Setup Users” menu.
Each user can be assigned up to 8 characters of name text. This
can be beneficial when reading the log, as identification of people is All users on the system can have a Premier Elite SmartKey™ a TAG
made easier. and a code, or any combination of them.
See page 47 for details on programming text. This section only deals with Premier Elite SmartKey™ learning and
routeing, all other user programmable options can be found in
INS176-8 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual or later.
number of times (to select a character on the same key, press the
 key to move the cursor along).  Great care should be taken when using large numbers of Premier
Elite SmartKey™, only one Premier Elite SmartKey™ per expander
can be used by the system at any one time, and on Multiple expanders
Door Control systems, or large sites, functionality should be checked in all areas of
the site where the device may be used.
This option would normally be used for access control as it only
allows the user to open/unlock doors that are assigned to that user
code. Premier Elite SmartKey™ Routeing
Premier Elite SmartKey™ should only be learned to the system
AFTER all devices have been learned and placed in their final
 Door control is only available to users with the ‘Door Strike’
attribute assigned to it.
location. Whilst it is possible to learn at any point during the
programming of the system, learning and testing the functionality of
the Premier Elite SmartKey™ after all devices have been placed will
ensure that the Premier Elite SmartKey™ performs as expected,
Adding Tags and works in locations where the user would expect it too.
When using a Proximity Keypad, Tags can be programmed or Route By
imported from another panel. The Route By function allows you to select which Zones (and
When prompted, select 1 to add new Tag or 2 to import a Tag from therefore expander) the Premier Elite SmartKey™ will use on the
another system. system for its routeing. This should be selected BEFORE the device
has been learned.
Tags can be imported from any other panel to any user and it is
possible to import Tags from several other panels. In the examples below Fig 1 shows the zones associated with
Expander 1, which is a 32XP-W, and Fig 2 shows Expander 2 which
is also a 32XP-W, when using 8XP-W there willobviously be less
Deleting Users devices that the Premier Elite SmartKey™ can use.
If a User code needs to be deleted from the system, this must be User001 Route By
done, by a user that has access to the ‘Setup Users’ menu. Zones 009 - 040
Fig 1
To delete User codes proceed as follows: User001 Route By
Zones 041 - 072
Ensure that Setup Users is selected, the display should look Fig 2
like this:
The  key is used to select this menu and the  key used to
Do you want to select which expander and associated zones will be used
Setup Users?
Once a Premier Elite SmartKey™ has been learned the  key will
show which zones are being used for routeing. It is not possible to
Press  , the display should look like this: alter this once learned. To change the routeing the Premier Elite
SmartKey™ should be deleted and the process started from the
Setup Users
Enter User -- beginning.
Select a user from 1 to 24 (48), 1 to 49 (88) or 1 to 199 (168) Deleting a Premier Elite SmartKey™
 then press , the display should look like this: Deleting the Premier Elite SmartKey™ from the user is a similar
process to learning, at the appropriate point in the menu press 
Enter User Code>
------ followed by , the Premier Elite SmartKey™ will be removed from
the User. To delete all user data see INS176-8 or later.
Press , the display will look something like this: YES to Select:-
Setup Users
Us ing the A key at this point allows
Do you want to y you to view the group of zones ,
a nd therefore the expander
DELETE User 15 that the S ma rtKey will us e.
Setup Users
User002:
Where ‘15’ is the selected User number. Us e the U key to s elect the group
of Zones and E xpander you want to us e
O
Press  to confirm deletion of the selected User code User002 Ricochet
Free A User002 Route By
Zones 009 - 040 U
Press  to exit from Setup Users n User002 Route By
User002 Ricochet Zones 009 - 040
Learning... 20s
Adding SmartKey™ n
User002 Ricochet
Fob LED Aux n
Introduction * 1 to toggle L E D on or off
? * 2 to toggle Aux on or off
Premier Elite SmartKey™ are now learnt and all functionality
User002 Ricochet
managed through the “Setup Users” Menu. Fob --- Aux
Us e U s croll
Ricochet™ MT2 and Premier Elite Series V2 firmware upgrades n N U to next us er
add additional capabilities to the management of Premier Elite R

SmartKey™. In multiple expander systems it is now possible to
INS176-9 111

5.9 Engineer Utilities

The control panel has three Event Logs, which are time and date
View Event Log stamped. The first log which is a system log, records all events that
occur on the system, i.e. Users entering their codes to arm or disarm
areas, alarm events, failures to arm etc.
YES to Select:-
Engineer Utils
The second log which is an alarm log, only records alarm events that
y occur on the system.
The third log is the Mandatory Event log which records only events
Engineer Utils
View Event Log defined as ‘mandatory’ by EN50131.
y
The System Log records the last 500 (48), 1000 (88) or 2000 (168)
1=Event,2 =Alarm
3=Mandatory Log events.
Us e keys 1, 2 or 3 to s elec t the
1 S ys tem, Alarm or Madatory The Alarm Log records the last 32 alarm events.
log i.e. 1= S ys tem Log
PROG. START The Mandatory Log records the last 500 mandatory events.
12:28.04 06/03 Us e the S C R O LL key to move up and
down through the log. DO WN moves to Event Log Hotkeys
U the previous event ( backwards in time)
and UP moves forwards a gain. O r When viewing the system log there are 9 hotkeys available. These
use one of the available h otkeys hotkeys allow certain events to be found easier without the need for
Code 01 David
12:28.04 06/03 searching.
Press C HIME . to find a ny
preceding events relating to
C the dis played event i.e.
The following hotkeys are available:
User codes being entered
Code 12 John
12:28.04 06/03  = Priority Alarms (PA, Fire etc.)
Pres s ARE A. to toggle the  = Normal Alarms (Guard, 24hr, Entry/Exit etc.)
A dis pla y between the Area
information a nd the time/da te  = Opens and Closings (Arm, Disarm etc.)
Code 01 David
Area: A.......  = Omits and Reinstates (Zone Omits etc.)
P Pres s PAR T to dis play any
progra mmed zone text etc.
 = Maintenance (System Tests, Engineer Program etc.)
 = Tampers (Zone, Bell, Aux etc.)
Code 01 David
Area: A.......  = Test Calls (Communicator Active, successful etc.)
N  = Entry/Exit (Entry and Exit Procedures)
 = User Codes (User codes being used)
112 INS176-9

Event Log Descriptions

Log Event Description
### ARM FAILED An exit fault from Zone ### has caused the system to fail to arm
### Flt Alarm Zone ### has detected a Fault condition
### Mask Alarm Zone ### has detected a Mask condition
### Test Failed Zone ### has activated whilst it has been on soak test
### Tested OK Zone ### has activated during the walk test
#,# RESET AREAS - Area have been reset using keypad #,# following an Intruder alarm
AC Off Alarm The control panel has detected an AC Mains failure
ALARM ABORT An Open After Alarm-Abort has occurred for area ?
ALARM Active An Intruder alarm signal has been activated for area ?
Anti-Code Reset A reset has been performed using the Anti-code reset procedure
AREA Armed Area ? has been armed
AREA Disarmed Area ? has been disarmed
ARMED WITH L/F The system has been armed with a Line Fault condition present
ARMING FAILED A Exit Error-Arm Fail has occurred on area ?
ARMING SUITE # Area Arm Suite # was used to arm the system
ATS FAILED The Communicator has failed to report to the Alarm Receiving Centre
ATS FLT Alarm There is a problem with the telephone line
AUTO TEST CALL An Automatic test call has been initiated
AUX #,# Tamper An Auxiliary Tamper input from device #,# has been activated
AV CLEARED by ## The Audio Verification unit has been cleared down by user ##
BELL #,# Tamper A Bell Tamper input from device #,# has been activated
BELL Active The Bell output has been activated for area ?
BELL FUSE Alarm The control panel Bell Fuse has failed
BOX LID Tamper The control panel lid has been removed causing a Tamper alarm
CHARGER FAULT Battery Charge Current has Failed
CIE Reset The internal processor has failed its self checks.
CODE #,# Tamper Too many invalid key presses have caused a tamper alarm from keypad #,#
Com??? Line Fault The Com300, 2400 or ISDN has detected a line fault
COM PORT Alarm A com port has generated an alarm
CONFIRMED ALARM Two or more detectors have activated, resulting in a confirmed alarm condition
CONFIRMED PA Two or more PA zones have activated, resulting in a confirmed PA alarm condition
CONFIRMED INTRUDER Two or more detectors have activated, resulting in a confirmed Intruder condition
CORRUPT EVENT No event has been stored in memory
CROSS ### Alarm A Verified Cross Zone (Beam Pair) Alarm has occurred from zone ###
DATA CHANGED Programming data has been changed
DATE CHANGED The control panel Time has been changed
DEFAULTS LOADED The factory default values have been loaded into memory
DEFERRED The arming mode was deferred for area ?
DOOR #,# Door #,# has been opened by a user with Door Control
DOWNLOAD START An Upload/Download has been initiated
DOWNLOAD END The Upload/Download has finished
DURESS User ## has entered a Duress Code at a keypad
Engineer Reset A reset has been performed using an Engineers code
ENTRY Area ## The Entry mode has been started for area ?
EXIT Area ## The Exit mode has been started for area ?
EXP #,# Reset A reset has been performed using the input on expander #,# (programmed as reset)
EXP #,# Line Fault The Input on expander #,# (programmed as line fault) has been activated
EXP #,# LOST Expander ## has been lost from the network
EXP #,# Tamper The cover of expander #,# has been removed
EXP ## Low Voltage Expander #,# has detected that its supply voltage is low
F_PA ## A Panic Alarm from a Radio FOB has been generated
Fault Override The system has been armed with a Fault condition present by a user
FIRE ### Active Zone ### (programmed as Fire Alarm) has caused an alarm
FIRE ### Tamper Zone ### (programmed as Fire Alarm) has caused an Tamper alarm
FIRST KNOCK ### Zone ### (which is programmed as double knock) has activated for the first time
FUSE #,# Alarm The Auxiliary 12V Fuse in device #,# has failed
GSM MODULE LOST The GSM Module has lost communications with the control panel
iD Loop# Tamper There is a short circuit on iD loop # on the iD expander
Key switch Reset A reset has been performed using a key switch
KSW ### Disarmed A Keyswitch zone type has been activated (zone number ###)
LOG ALERT 80% of the Event Log has filled (since the last Upload/Download)
LOG CLEARED The event log has been erased
LOW BAT Alarm The control panel has registered a low battery condition
LOW V #,# Alarm Expander #,# has detected that’s its supply voltage is low
MANUAL TEST CALL A Manual test call has been initiated
MIC ## TESTED Microphone ## on the Audio Verification Module has been tested
Monitored Alarm A zone programmed as key tube has caused an alarm
No RF Signal ### The Wireless receiver has detected a signal loss from zone ###
PA From Remote FOB A PA has been generated from a Remote Fob
Panel Line Fault The control panel line fault input has been activated
PART Armed Area ? has been Part Armed
PART 1 Armed Part Arm 1 has been selected
POWERED UP System Power Up (without doing a factory restart)
POWER O/P FAULT The system has generated a Power Output Fault see Table Power ID Fault on Page 98
POWER UNIT FAILURE The system has generated a rate of voltage failure
PROG. END The Engineer has logged out of the Programming menu
PROG. START An Engineer code has been entered
PSUac ## Alarm An expander input programmed as PSU Monitor control panel has detected an AC Mains failure
PSUbat## Alarm An expander input programmed as PSU Monitor control panel has detected a Battery fault
PSUvol## Alarm An expander input programmed as PSU Monitor control panel has detected a 12V Output failure
INS176-9 113

Log Event Description

PSUTam## Alarm An expander input programmed as PSU Monitor control panel has detected a Tamper condition
QUICK Armed Quick Arm from keypad #,#
R/Bat ## Alarm The Wireless receiver has detected a low battery signal from device ##
Radio Jamming The Wireless receiver has detected an attempt to jam its radio signal
RADIO PAD LOST The Radio-Pad has no signal or has lost communications with the control panel
REARM LOCK ### Zone ### has locked out after reaching its re-arm limit (after causing an alarm)
RECENT Armed Area ? has been armed recently
Redcare Line Fault The Redcare has detected a line fault
REMOTE Armed Area ? was armed using the Wintex UDL software
REMOTE Disarmed Area ? was disarmed using the Wintex UDL software
Remote PC Reset A reset has been performed by the remote download PC
Remote Reset A reset has been performed using the ‘Remote Reset’ input
Redcare Reset A reset has been performed by the Redcare
RF Device ###Low Battery RF Device ### has registered a low battery condition
RKP #,# MEDICAL A Medical alarm (7 & 9) has occurred from keypad number #,#
RKP #.# FIRE A Fire alarm (4 & 6) has occurred from keypad number #,#
RKP #,# AUD PA An Audible PA alarm (1 & 3) has occurred from keypad number #,#
RKP #,# SIL PA A Silent PA alarm (1 & 3) has occurred from keypad number #,#
RKP #,# Tamper The cover of keypad #,# has been removed
RKP #,# LOST Keypad ## has been lost from the network
RKP LOCKED #,# Keypad #,# has been locked out from too many invalid key presses
Site Data Changed Site Data has been changed e.g. zone ### has been changed
Supervision Fault A Radio device has failed to poll back to the panel within the Supervision Time
System Over Voltage The control panel Bell Fuse has failed
TAG ## User ## has presented their Prox TAG
Test Call Passed Manual or Periodical Test Call has passed
Test Call Failed Manual or Periodical Test Call has failed
TESTED ### Zone ### has been tested
TEST FAIL ###) Zone ### has failed its Soak test
TAG System Exit (Batt. OK) The system has been put in to exit via tag and battery voltage is ok
TAG System Exit (Batt. Low) The system has been put in to exit via tag and battery has low voltage
TAG System Entry (Batt. OK) The system has been put in to entry via tag and battery voltage is ok
TAG System Entry (Batt. Low) The system has been put in to entry via tag and battery has low voltage
TIME Armed Area ? was armed automatically using one of the control timers
TIME CHANGED The control panel Date has been changed
TIME Disarmed Area ? was disarmed automatically using one of the control timers
TUBE ### Alarm Zone ### (programmed as Key Tube) has caused an alarm
USER ## User ## has entered their code
User Ack A user has acknowledged a fault to set system
USER CODE CHANGED A User code has been altered
USER ADDED A User code has been added
USER DELETED A User code has been deleted
User Reset A reset has been performed using a User code
WALK Test Start The Walk Test mode has been initiated
Zone ### Alarm Zone ### has been activated
Zone ### Tamper Zone ### has caused a Tamper alarm
Zone ### Restore Zone ### has restored to its normal condition
Zone ### Omitted Zone ### has been omitted
Zone ### Un-Omit Zone ### has been reinstated
Zone ### Test Start Zone ### has been put on test
Zone ### Test End Zone ### has been removed from test
Zone ### Fault Zone ### has generated a Fault Condition
Zone ### Masked Zone ### has been Masked
114 INS176-9

Do Bell Test Do Walk Test 24/48/88/168

Engineer Utils Engineer Utils
y y
View Event Log View Event Log
1 2
Engineer Utils
Do Bell Test Engineer Utils
Do walk test?
y y
Push YES to test
Bell is >Off Walk test Areas>
> ABCDEFGH <
Pres s O MIT to invoke the
O E ngineers Hold O ff mode
of a Texecom B ellbox y
P res s YE S to walk tes t all
areas or us e k eys 1 - 8
to s elect/des elect areas
Push YES to test
Bell Disabled * NONE *
Us e the S C RO LL key to Pres s C HIME to s elect:
U s elect the required tes t C hime O nce then lockout zone
C C hime on every ac tiva tion
or No C hime at all
Push YES to test
Digi > ********
Pres s YE S to tes t ALL Zone 005
channels or us e keys 0 - 8 Lounge PIR
Pres s ARE A. to toggle the
£ to s elect individua l cha nnels
dis pla y between the zones
Push YES to test

e.g. 3 = C ha nnel 3
A that ha ve been tes ted and
the zones that s till need tes ting
Digi > ********
Pres s YE S again to clear ALL Zones that need
channels or us e keys 0 - 8 testing are : To view zones that ha ve not
3 to clea r individual c ha nnels a ctivated recently, enter the
e.g. 3 = C ha nnel 3
Push YES to test
? number of days required
i.e. 007 will s how zones that have
Digi > ******** not ac tiva ted in the las t 7 days
Zone 001 >007
N Front Door
N
This option allows the Bell, Speaker and various control panel
outputs to be tested.
Any of the zones on the system can be walk tested to ensure that
The following outputs can be individually tested:
they operate correctly. A walk test can only be performed when the
Test Bell The Bell output system or area is disarmed.
Test Strobe The Strobe output
Test Speaker
Test Digi
The Speaker output
The Hardwired digicom outputs
 Once a zone has been activated it will not generate a chime
tone again. If however the  key is pressed, a zone will
Test Panel The panel outputs chime every time it is activated.
Test RedCARE The plug on RedCARE outputs The Walk test menu also includes a last activation log that can be
Test Com???? The plug on Com 300/2400 digi channels recalled when doing a walk test. This log shows zones that have NOT
LCD Display The LCD keypad display been activated over a period of days.
User Outputs Any outputs that have the ‘User Test’
attribute (see page 81 for details). Pressing the  key will firstly show the zones that still need
testing, pressing the  key a second time will display the zones
that have not been activated that day, to view zones that have not
 Pressing OMIT at the Bell or Strobe Test will cause the Strobe
output to pulse 3 times, invoking Engineers Hold Off mode if a
been activated for 3 days, type in 003 the maximum number of days
that can be recalled is 255, pressing the  key a third time will
Texecom bell box is connected.
revert back to the standard walk test display.
INS176-9 115

Do Walk Test 640 View Zone Status

YES to Select:-
Engineer Utils YES to Select:-
Engineer Utils
y
y
Engineer Utils
View Event Log
Engineer Utils
View Event Log
2
Engineer Utils
3
Do walk test?
Engineer Utils
View Zone Status
y
Walk test Areas1>
y
ABCDEFGH<JKLMNOP
Us e the C hime & Zone 001 Panel 1
Secure 2k2
C/P Part keys
to s c roll between
Us e keys 0 - 9 to enter the
required zone number or
Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4 ? us e the S C RO LL k ey to s ea rch
Walk test Areas4> e.g. 064 = Zone 64
ABCDEFGH<JKLMNOP
Us e the Area key to Zone 064 N1,E7,8
Secure 2k2
s elect either
A A-H or I-P a rea s .
Us e the numeric
Zone 064 N1,E7,8
Active 6k9 To dis able the zone,
Walk test Areas4> buttons 1-8 to Pres s O MIT.
ABCDEFG>******** toggle the required To ma ke the zone C hime,
areas on or off O Press C HIME
To view the zone text,
y ZoneX064 N1,E7,8
Zone Disabled
P res s AR E A
* NONE *
Pres s C HIME to s elect:
N
C hime O nce then lockout zone
C C hime on every a ctivation
This option can be used to view the status of any zone on the system to
or No C hime a t all
Zone 005 see whether it is ‘Active’, ‘Secure’, ‘Tampered’ or ‘Shorted’. The
Lounge PIR
Pres s ARE A. to toggle the selected zone can also be temporarily disabled (zone and tamper) to
dis pla y between the zones allow the zone to be worked on or made to chime every time it is
A that ha ve been tes ted and activated.
the zones that s till need tes ting
Zones that need
testing are : To view zones that have not
a ctivated recently, enter the
 When leaving the View Zone Status menu, all zones will be
automatically reinstated and cleared of Chime.
? number of da ys required
i.e. 007 will s how zones that ha ve
not activa ted in the las t 7 days
Zone 001 >007
Front Door
N
Any of the zones on the system can be walk tested to ensure that
they operate correctly. A walk test can only be performed when the
system or area is disarmed.
 Once a zone has been activated it will not generate a chime

tone again. If however the  key is pressed, a zone will
chime every time it is activated.
The Walk test menu also includes a last activation log that can be
recalled when doing a walk test. This log shows zones that have NOT
been activated over a period of days.
Pressing the  key will firstly show the zones that still need
testing, pressing the  key a second time will display the zones
that have not been activated that day, to view zones that have not
been activated for 3 days, type in 003 the maximum number of days
that can be recalled is 255, pressing the  key a third time will
revert back to the standard walk test display.
116 INS176-9

Do System Tests Confirm Devices

y y
4 5
System Tests Confirm Devices
y y
Net RKP>1.......
Do you want to 1 Exp>........
View Sys. Status
Us e keys 1 - 4 to s elect Us e the S C RO LL k ey to
y an option or us e the
U s elect the required network
e.g. YE S = View S ys . S tatus

Net RKP>123.....
Sys Voltage>13.7 2 Exp>1.......
Sys Current>0689 Pres s YE S if the number
of devices fitted is correct.
y An ‘X’ on the dis play indicates
y that a device wa s previous fitted
Press YES again
to Confirm.
This option allows various control panel features to be tested or Pres s YE S to confirm
reviewed. the devic es fitted
y (a confirma tion tone
1 - View Sys. Status will be heard)
Allows the system voltage and current to be viewed. Net RKP>123.....
2 Exp>1.......
2 - View Batt Status P res s AR E A to view the network
errors ( the total number of errors
Allows the battery voltage and charging status to be viewed. A on the network and the la s t devic e
to ca us e an error is being dis played)
3 - Test Outputs
Allows the Bell, Speaker and system outputs to be tested. Net Errors> 0054
2 Last RKP> 1
4 - View Version No. Pres s R E S E T to
This option allows the control panel software version and serial R clea r the network errors
number to be viewed.
Net Errors> 0000
2 Last RKP> 1
y
This option allows the networks to be viewed to see what devices are
connected and whether there are any problems. Whenever new
devices are added to the system, the networks must be checked and
confirmed.
 If any devices are removed from the system, the networks must be
rechecked and reconfirmed.
An ‘X’ on the display indicates that device that was previous
fitted is no longer being seen by the control panel.
INS176-9 117

View RKP Status Set System Time

y y
View Event Log
View Event Log
6 8
Engineer Utils
View RKP Status Engineer Utils
Set System Time?
y
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elect a
y
N1,R1 Z1=. Z2=.
*NOT Fitted* keypad and pres s 0 to
toggle between networks e.g. Enter new time >
00:00
0, 3 = Network 2, Keypad 3
? Us e keys 0 - 9 to enter the
N2,R3 Z1=H Z2=H

P res s AR E A to dis play errors
P res s NO to tes t output
? new time (24-Hour format)
e.g. 1645 = 4:45 pm
Tamp=H Output=0 Pres s O MIT to tes t s ounder
Enter new time >
16:45
y
y
This option allows the status of the keypad, the zones and the output
to be viewed.
The control panel has a real time clock that is used to date and time
stamp events that are recorded within the system log. The option
View Exp. Status allows you to set the control panel time.
YES to Select:- Set System Date

Engineer Utils
y YES to Select:-
Engineer Utils
Engineer Utils
View Event Log
y
7
Engineer Utils
Engineer Utils
View Event Log
View Exp. Status
y
9
N1,E1 12345678 Engineer Utils
*Not Fitted* Set System Date?
Us e keys 1 - 8 to s elec t a n
expander a nd pres s 0 to
? toggle between networks e.g. y
0 , 2 = Network 2, E xpa nder 2
N2,E2 12345678 Enter new date >
Zones HHHHHHHH 01/01/01
Pres s AR E A to change between
zones /volta ge/outputs /errors Us e keys 0 - 9 to enter the
(a nd PS U s tatus if PS U200XP fitted)
Pres s C HIME to tes t zones
? new date DD/MM/YY
e.g. 030501 = 3rd Ma y 2001
Press O MIT to tes t s ounder
y Pres s 1 - 8 to tes t outputs Enter new date >
03/05/01
If P SU 200 XP Fitted
y
N2,E2 12345678 N2,E2-PSU V:13.5
Outputs ........ AA I:0656mA: S:.....
N N The control panel has a real time clock that is used to date and time
stamp events that are recorded within the system log. The option
allows you to set the control panel date.
This option allows the status of the expander, the zones,
voltage/inputs and outputs and any monitored power supply to be
viewed.
 The PSU status shows the following codes:.

A: AC Mains Fail
1: Battery 1 Fault
2: Battery 2 Fault
F: Mains Fuse Blown
T: PSU Box Tamper
118 INS176-9

Change Eng. Code Default NVM Data

y y
U U
Change Eng. Code Default NVM Data
y y
Enter New Code > Press YES Reset:
------ Panel Outputs
E nter Us er code number Us e keys 0 - 9 to s elec t
a n option or use the
? 4, 5 or 6 digits long
e.g. 1234 = 1234
e.g. 3 = K eypad O utputs
Enter New Code > Press YES Reset:
--1234 Keypad Outputs
Pres s YE S to defa ult
y y the option
Keypad Outputs
* Please Wait! *
This option allows the Engineer code (User 00) to be changed. This
code can be 4, 5 or 6 digits in length. The system will allow a mixture of
different length User codes. y
Adjust Volumes This option allows various parts of the NVM to be defaulted without
having to ‘Factory Default’ the system.
YES to Select:-
Engineer Utils
Location Text
y
Engineer Utils YES to Select:-
View Event Log Engineer Utils
U y
Adjust Volumes View Event Log
y U
Panel Volume Engineer Utils
Level = 6
Location Text
U to s elec t a Panel, Keypad
or E xpander S peaker y
Keypad 03 Volume No Location Text
Level = 4 Has Been Setup
n y
Keypad 03 Volume
Level =>4
E nter a value or us e the This option allows the ‘Panel Location’ text that has been
S C R O LL key to inc rea s e programmed in ‘System Text’ to be displayed (see page 69 for
8 or dec rea s e the value
e.g. 8 = Full Volume
Keypad 03 Volume
Level =>7
y
 The display will automatically clear after 5 seconds.
This option is used to adjust the volume level of speakers that are
connected to the control panel, keypads and expanders.
 Pressing the CHIME key will cause the speaker that is being
programmed to generate the exit tone at the selected volume
level.
INS176-9 119

Print Log Data Soak Test Areas 640

y y
U U
Print Log Data Soak Test Areas
y y
Number of Events: Soak Test Areas1
> 0000 ........<.......
E nter a value or use the Us e the C hime &
Part keys
?
S C R O LL key to inc rea s e
or dec rea s e the value
C/P to sc roll between
e.g. 50 = Las t 50 E vents Area G roups 1,2,3 & 4
Soak Test Areas1
Number of Events: ........<.......
> 0050 U se the Area key to s elect either
y Pres s YE S
to print
A Us e the numeric buttons 1-8 to
Soak Test Areas1
ABCDEFGH<.......
This option allows the ‘Event Log’ to be printed to a standard RS232
printer (see page 41 for details). Pres s YE S to default
y the option
Soak Test Areas 24/48/88/168 When an area is selected for soak test, the soak test timer is started.
Any zones in the selected area with the soak test attribute will be put
on soak test for the duration of the soak test timer (see page 62). If
YES to Select:-
Engineer Utils the area soak test option is subsequently deselected before the end
of the test, all zones are returned to normal operation.
y When a zone is on soak test, it will not cause an alarm when
activated. However the system will log the event and will notify the
Engineer Utils
View Event Log user that the zone has failed soak test.
A test failure will not prevent the user arming the system and will be
U cleared when the engineers code is entered.
Engineer Utils At the end of the soak test all zones that have passed the test will be
Soak Test Areas returned to normal operation.
y
Soak Test Areas:
> A*...... <
area s e.g. 2 = B. Us e the
2 area key to toggle between
area s A to H a nd I to P
Soak Test Areas:
> AB...... <
Pres s YE S to default
y the option
When an area is selected for soak test, the soak test timer is started.
Any zones in the selected area with the soak test attribute will be put
on soak test for the duration of the soak test timer (see page 62). If
the area soak test option is subsequently deselected before the end
of the test, all zones are returned to normal operation.
When a zone is on soak test, it will not cause an alarm when
activated. However the system will log the event and will notify the
user that the zone has failed soak test.
A test failure will not prevent the user arming the system and will be
cleared when the engineers code is entered.
At the end of the soak test all zones that have passed the test will be
returned to normal operation.
120 INS176-9

View iD Data Configure Radio

y y
U U
Engineer Utils
View iD Data Engineer Utils
Configure Radio
y
y
1111101010100011
..............1N 01: ID265400 OK
Pres s 0 to toggle between Use keys 0 - 9 to enter the
SL:000 Zone 000 required device number or
0 iD L oop 1 a nd 2
T he s tatus of the zones us e the S C R OLL key to search
will be dis play ed U e.g. 23 = Device 23
0000111001100111
..............2N
Pres s Area to toggle 23: No Device 20
between N ormal loop s can ,YES , To Learn If Device already programmed
A Q uick loop s ca n and
ID will show here
B is cuit Mapping
0000111001100111 y Pres s YE S to learn
R adio Device
..............2Q
23: No Device 18
A Activate Device If Device already programmed
ID will s how here
iD Loop 1,01 P ress Learn s witch and
Mapped Zone 000 ins ert battery/Po wer Pres s R E S E T to Delete
Pres s 0 to toggle between up S martKey. R adio Device
iD Loop 1 and 2.
U Us e S croll keys to s elect the
23: ID4DD3C3 TAMP
required iD bis cuit.
SL:085 Zone 000
P res s No to edit
y the zone ma pping a nd
wiring options .
n Pres s NO to map the
device to a zone/user
iD Loop 1,01 23: ID4DD3C3 OK

Mapped Zone>000 SL:085 Zone>000
Us e k eys 0 - 9 to enter Use keys 0 - 9 to enter the
? the zone number ? required zone/user number or
us e the S C R OLL key to search
iD Loop 1,01 e.g. 18 = Zone 18
Mapped Zone>010 23: ID4DD3C3 OK
Pres s O mit to toggle between SL:085 Zone>018
N orma lly O pen a nd Normally
O C los ed wiring.
y
* = N orma lly O pen.
iD Loop 1,01 Top Line = Serial number
Mapped Zone>010* 23: ID4DD3C3 OK and status of device
SL:085 Zone 018 Bottom Line = Signal strength
y and zone/user number
N
iD Loop 1,01
Mapped Zone 010*
N Configuring Radio devices (NOT MT2 Systems)

Up to 32 wireless devices can be learnt on to the system this can be
any combination of detectors, mag contacts and remote FOBs. The
number of remote FOBs is limited to the maximum number of
Viewing the iD Data devices the expander can accept.
This option allows the 60IXD expander the iD biscuit data to be
viewed to diagnostic purposes. There are two way of viewing the Wireless devices can then be mapped on to the system along with
data from the expander: conventional detectors.
Normal S can Mode The top line on the display shows the serial number of the device and
also the status i.e. Active, Tamper etc.
This is the normal operation mode of the expander and the data
being displayed is the average result of 4 successive scans of the iD The bottom line of the display shows the signal strength and also
loop. which zone/user the device is mapped to.
Q uic k S c an Mode
In this mode the data being displayed is the result of each scan of the
iD loop. This mode is useful for identifying problems with biscuits due
 Signal strength should be greater than 30.
The signal range is between 0 and 90
to interference, high resistance connections etc.
Deleting Devic es
To delete radio devices, select the device number to be deleted then
follow the procedure for learning a new device but press the 
button on the keypad when prompted to activate device instead of
activating the tamper switch.
INS176-9 121

Example
Ricochet Diagnostics (MT2 Only) In this example Zone 9 can see the
Zone 009 Shock
This menu displays information about the live system, and is split into _OEB devices as detailed below, use the scroll
Premier Elite SmartKey™ and Ricochet™ devices via Zones and key to view information about other
Users. devices:-
Devices
Display    
For Devices the following information can be viewed:-
Device 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• Routeing
Can see        
• RSSI
• Alarms and Status
•
•
Device visibility
Time since last message
 On the 32XP-W there are 16 windows to show information from the 32
devices of the system; the format is the same.
Device Status
Premier Elite SmartKey™
Zone 009 Shock
For Premier Elite SmartKey™ the following information can be Status: aaaSpdtt
viewed:-
• Routeing Secure/OK Active/Fault Type
• RSSI a A Mag1
• Premier Elite SmartKey™ Button a A Mag2/Sho
• Status a A Reed/PIR
s S Poll/Supervision
Interpreting Keypad Displays p P Power/Battery
d D Device
Routeing t T Rear
The image below shows that Zone 009 is routeing through 14 and t T Front
then 7 to the expander, for Premier Elite SmartKey™ this may vary
depending on where & when the reading is taken. If question marks
appear in the display it means the information is not available. Premier Elite SmartKey™ Messages
Zone 009 PIR The chosen user does not have a Premier Elite
->014->007->XP User000 Ricochet
Not Ricochet SmartKey™ associated with them.
The Premier Elite SmartKey™ is not switched
RSSI User002 Ricochet
on
Each value in the image below represents the RSSI levels in dBm at Not connected
each of the hops. If question marks appear on the display it means User002 Ricochet Shows the battery is OK and the fob has logged
the information is not available. Logon Bat OK onto the system.
User002 Ricochet Shows the different messages displayed when

Zone 009 PIR
69>> 80>> 57@XP Partarm Bat OK the relevant buttons are pressed.
User002 Ricochet
 If question marks appear it could be because either the system has just
been powered up and information has not been collected yet, or on
Disarm Bat OK
User002 Ricochet
large systems the information is not in memory. To populate the display Fullarm Bat OK
activate the device and the information should appear. Shows which Aux button has been pressed
User002 Ricochet
Aux? Bat OK when in Function Mode.
Device Messages
The chosen zone does not have a Ricochet User002 Ricochet Shows the Panic function has been activated
Zone 001 Panic Bat OK
Not Ricochet device learned to it.
Zone 009 PIR shows the last time the device communicated
this represents the last message and could be a YES to erase Use this option ONLY if the panel has been
Msg ??? mins ago
poll, activation or tamper etc..... unknown keyfobs replaced and not all Premier Elite SmartKey™
This is a warning showing that the last are recognised by the new panel, or if the error
Zone 009 PIR tone is heard when learning new Premier Elite
>1hr since msg communication from the device was over an
hour ago. SmartKey™
This display shows that no message has been
Zone 009 PIR
No msg recvd yet received yet, this would normally be seen on a
recently powered up system, wait 15 minutes
 This option DOES NOT remove known Premier Elite SmartKey™, use the
Delete option in Setup Users.
from power up before checking the diagnostics
information.
Signal Security™
Zone 009 Shock This display shows information relating to signal
???? security on an 8XP-W. 4 windows are available
to show information; each window represents
two devices, (Odd & Even device slots). Each
window could show any of the information
detailed in the table below
? No information is available
_ The chosen device cannot “see” either of the devices
O The chosen device can see the ODD device(s)
E The chosen device can see the EVEN device(s)
B The chosen device can see BOTH devices
122 INS176-9

Ricochet Diagnostics Menu

YES to Select:-
Engineer Utils
y
Engineer Utils
View Event Log
Us e U to s c roll
U to R ic oc het Diag
Zone 001 User000 Ricochet YES to erase

Not Ricochet O Not Ricochet R unknown keyfobs
E nter the Zone/Us er
? Number to view ? y
Zone 009 Shock User002 Ricochet Turn on
->???->???->XP Not connected S ma rtKey
C User002 Ricochet
->XP
Zone 009 Shock
??>> ??>> ??@ XP
C
C User002 Ricochet
-99>>@ XP
Zone 009 Shock
Status: aaaSpdtt
C
C User002 Ricochet
Logon Bat OK
Zone 009 Shock
????????????????
C
C
Zone 009 Shock
>1hr since msg
INS176-9 123

Programming Part Arms Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5.10 Programming Part Arms

Alter Part Arms
YES to Select:-
Zone Setup
P
YES to Select:-
Alter Part Arms
P
For Part Arm 1
Zone 001 is > ON Pres s O MIT to s elect Part Arm 1
Pres s C HIME to s elect Part Arm 2
C Pres s PAR T to s elect Part Arm 3
e.g. C HIME = Part Arm 2
For Part Arm 2
Zone 001 is > ON Us e keys 0 - 9 to enter the
required zone number or
? us e the S C RO LL k ey to s ea rch
e.g. 064 = Zone 10
For Part Arm 2
Zone 010 is > ON
Pres s N O to turn the
n zone O n or O ff for the
s elected Part Arm
For Part Arm 2

Zone 010 is >OFF
Each area on the system can have up to 3 Part Arms.
When Part Arm 1, 2 or 3 is selected, pre-programmed zones

are omitted to allow access to certain parts of the building.
124 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Standards
6. Specifications Control Panels

Identifying the Control Panel Maximum Current Available
0.75A charge 1.0A
0.3A charge 1.9A
Rated Output
Type Code Description
1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.48A 0.19A 0.13A 0.021A
AEO Premier 24
AEJ Premier 48 0.3A 1.32A 0.61A 0.47A 0.18A
1 x 17Ah
AFG Premier 48-W 868MHz 0.75A 1.0A 0.61A 0.47A 0.18A
AFN Premier 48-W 433MHz
AEK Premier 88 Standby and Recharge Times
AEL Premier 168 EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
AEZ Premier 640 Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h 30h *
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs
Premier Elite 24 (Polymer) Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs **
Current Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs
Current Consumption 95mA *30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h
Maximum Current Available **This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
0.3A charge 1.1A
Jumper Settings
Rated Output Recharge
Battery Battery Rated Output (Amps) Battery Arrangement Battery Charge Selector
Time
1 x 7Ah < 24Hrs 0.3 A
1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.48A
< 24Hrs 0.75 A
1 x 17Ah
< 72Hrs 0.3 A
EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Power Supply Type A
Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Rated Input: 220V - 240V @50/60Hz; 1A
PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Rated Output Current@40°C: 2.5A MAX
Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs Rated Input: 100VV - 120V @50/60Hz; 1A
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs
Rated Output Current@40°C: 2.3A MAX
Power Supply Type A Rated Output Voltage: 13.&Vdc +/- 2%
Rated Input: 100V - 240V @ 50/60Hz; 1A Mains Terminal Block Fuse: 250Vac; 3-3.15A Slow/Medium Blow
Rated Output Current @ 55°C:: 1.5A MAX Maximum rating of each power output (note that these are not considered to be
"independent power outputs" according to EN50131-6
Rated Output Voltage: 13.&Vdc +/- 2%
Aux 12V 1.0A
Mains Terminal Block Fuse: 250Vac; 3-3.15A Slow/Medium Blow
Bell/Strobe 1.0A
Maximum rating of each power output (note that these are not considered to be
Network 1 1.0A
Battery 1.6A
Aux 12V 1.0A
DC+/DC- 1.0A
Bell/Strobe 1.0A
Standby Current 95mA
Network 1 1.0A
Battery 1.6A Output Voltage Range: 13.0V to 13.9V
DC+/DC- 1.0A Maximum Ripple Voltage: 0.5V pk-pk
Standby Current 95mA Battery type: sealed lead acid, up to 18Ah,

Maximum recharge time 24h (0.75A
Output Voltage Range: 13.0V to 13.9V charge rate) 72h (0.3A charge rate)
Maximum Ripple Voltage: 0.5V pk-pk Battery Low Voltage Signal: 9.5V
Battery type: sealed lead acid, up to 7Ah, Maximum Power Output Fault signal: 10.5V (with mains present)
recharge time 72h
Deep Discharge protection: 8.1V
Battery Low Voltage Signal: 9.5V
Over voltage protection trigger: 16V
Power Output Fault signal: 10.5V (with mains present)
Fuses F1 (900mA) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse
Deep Discharge protection: 8.1V (electronic PTC)
Over voltage protection trigger: 16V F2 (900mA) Digicom Power (electronic
Fuses F1 (900mA) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse PTC)
(electronic PTC) F3 (900mA) Network 1 fuse (electronic
F2 (900mA) Digicom Power (electronic PTC)
PTC) F4 (900mA) Bell/Strobe fuse
F3 (900mA) Network 1 fuse (electronic (electronic PTC)
PTC) F6 (1.6 Amp) Battery fuse (electronic
F4 (900mA) Bell/Strobe fuse PTC)
(electronic PTC)
F6 (1.6 Amp) Battery fuse (electronic
PTC)
Housing 1mm Mild Steel
Dimensions (W x H x D) 315mm x 415mm x 100mm
Battery Compartment Up tp one 18Ah battery
Housing 3mm Polycarbonate
Packed Weight 4.5 Kg (Approx)
Battery Compartment One 12V 7.0Ah battery
Premier Elite 48-W
Premier Elite 24 (Metal)
Current
Current Current Consumption 150mA
Current Consumption 95mA Maximum Current Available
INS176-9 125

Specifications Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
0.3A charge 1.0A
Power Supply Type A
Rated Output Rated Input: 220V - 240V @50/60Hz; 1A
1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.433A Rated Input: 100VV - 120V @50/60Hz; 1A
Standby and Recharge Times Rated Output Voltage: 13.&Vdc +/- 2%
EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2
Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Maximum rating of each power output (note that these are not considered to be
PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 "independent power outputs" according to EN50131-6
Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs Aux 12V 1.0A
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs
Bell/Strobe 1.0A
Network 1 & 2 1.0A
Power Supply Type A
Battery 1.6A
Rated Input: 100V - 240V @ 50/60Hz; 1A
DC+/DC- 1.0A
Rated Output Current @ 55°C:: 1.5A MAX
Rated Output Voltage: 13.&Vdc +/- 2%
Output Voltage Range: 13.0V to 13.9V
Maximum Ripple Voltage: 0.5V pk-pk
Maximum rating of each power output (note that these are not considered to be
"independent power outputs" according to EN50131-6 Battery type: sealed lead acid, up to 18Ah,
Maximum recharge time 72h
Aux 12V 1.0A
Bell/Strobe 1.0A
Network 1 1.0A
Battery 1.6A Deep Discharge protection: 8.1V
DC+/DC- 1.0A Over voltage protection trigger: 16V
Standby Current 150mA Fuses F1 (1Amp) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse

F2 (1.6 Amp) Battery fuse (electronic
Output Voltage Range: 13.0V to 13.9V
PTC)
Maximum Ripple Voltage: 0.5V pk-pk F3 (1 Amp) Network 1 fuse
Battery type: sealed lead acid, up to 7Ah, Maximum F4 (1 Amp) Bell/Strobe fuse
recharge time 72h F5 (1 Amp) Network 2 fuse (168 only)
Power Output Fault signal: 10.5V (with mains present) Housing 1mm Mild Steel
Deep Discharge protection: 8.1V Dimensions (W x H x D) 315mm x 415mm x 100mm
Over voltage protection trigger: 16V Battery Compartment Up tp one 18Ah battery
Fuses F6 PTC (0.9A) Auxiliary 12V Power Packed Weight 4.5 Kg (Approx)
fuse
F4 PTC (0.9 A) Network 1 fuse
F5 PTC (0.9 A) Bell/Strobe fuse
Premier Elite 640
Current
Housing 3mm Polycarbonate
Maximum Current Available
Dimensions (W x H x D) 305mm x 263mm x 98mm 0.75A charge 1.0A
Battery Compartment One 12V 7.0Ah battery
Rated Output
1 x 17Ah 0.75A 1.0A 0.558A 0.416A 0.133A
Premier Elite 48/88/168
Current EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h 30h *
Maximum Current Available
0.75A charge 1.0A
0.3A charge 1.9A
Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs **
Rated Output *30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h
Arrangement Charge 12h 24h 30h 60h **This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
1 x 7Ah 0.3A 0.458A 0.166A 0.108A
0.3A 1.29A 0.583A 0.441A 0.158A Power Supply Type A
1 x 17Ah
0.75A 1.0A 0.583A 0.441A 0.1588A Rated Input: 220V - 240V @50/60Hz; 1A
Rated Input: 100VV - 120V @50/60Hz; 1A
EN50131-1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Rated Output Current@40°C: 2.3A MAX
Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h 30h * Rated Output Voltage: 13.&Vdc +/- 2%
Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Mains Terminal Block Fuse: 250Vac; 3-3.15A Slow/Medium Blow
Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs ** Maximum rating of each power output (note that these are not considered to be
*30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h Aux 12V 1.0A
Bell/Strobe 1.0A
**This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
Network 1 & 2 1.0A
Jumper Settings Battery 1.6A
Recharge DC+/DC- 1.0A
Battery Arrangement Battery Charge Selector
Time
1 x 7Ah < 24Hrs 0.3 A
< 24Hrs 0.75 A Output Voltage Range: 13.0V to 13.9V
1 x 17Ah
< 72Hrs 0.3 A
126 INS176-9

Maximum Ripple Voltage: 0.5V pk-pk Siren Outputs
Battery type: sealed lead acid, up to 18Ah, Bell Trigger 1A switched to 0V
Maximum recharge time 72h Strobe Trigger 1A switched to 0V
Battery Low Voltage Signal: 9.5V Speaker Output Minimum load 8Ω
Deep Discharge protection: 8.1V
Environmental (All Models)
Over voltage protection trigger: 16V
Operating Temperature -10°C to
Fuses (Electronic PTC) F3 (1600 mA) Battery
+40°C
F4 (250mA) Speaker
Storage Temperature -20°C o
+60°C
F6 (900mA) Bell/Strobe
Maximum Humidity 95% non-condensing
F8 (900mA) Network 3 EMC Environment Residential
F9 (900mA) Network 4 Commercial
F10 (900mA) Network 5 Light Industrial
F11 (900mA) Network 6 Industrial
F14 (900mA) Auxiliary 12V Inhibit Functions
For Alarms and Tamper is controlled by the Swinger shutdown
Housing 1mm Mild Steel counter which is programmable and is defaulted to 3.Please see
Dimensions (W x H x D) 315mm x 415mm x 100mm page 46 and 69.
Battery Compartment Up tp one 18Ah battery
Packed Weight 4.5 Kg (Approx) Minimum Logical Keys
10,000 for 4 digit code*
General (All Models) 100,000 for 5 digit code*
Data Network 4-wire standard 7/0.2 alarm
cable up to 500m Star, Daisy 1,000,000 for 6 digit code*
Chain or any combination of the
two The number of disallowed codes = 0*
Remote Keypads
24 &48 & 48-W
88
168
Up to 4
Up to 8
Up to 16
 User codes must be programmed as a 6 digit code to
comply with INCERT.
640 Up to 64
Expanders
24 Up to 2
 Dependant on the use of the Black Listed codes function
available via Wintex, a maximum of 16 codes may be Black
48 & 48-W Up to 4 Listed
88 Up to 8
168 Up to 16
640 Up to 64 Calibration Checks & Adjustments
Output Modules There are no calibration checks or adjustments available on the
24 1 control panel.
48 & 48-W Up to 2
88 Up to 4
Signal & Message Processing Indications
168 Up to 8
First alarm indications followed by any other events during the set
640 Up to 32
Zones period will scroll and can be controlled by the  key on the
keypad.
24 8 expandable to 24
48-W 4 expandable to 48 Memory Support
88 8 expandable to 88 A memory support battery is not required.
640 0 expandable to 640- Compliance Label
EOL Resistor Values (Alternatives Available)
If the alarm system is programmed to NOT conform with EN50131-1
EOL Resistor 2k2 (3k3) or EN50131-3 or is installed to Grade 1 the compliance label MUST
Contact Resistor 4k7 (3k3) be removed.
Fault Resistor 2k2
0 - 1k Zone Short
Engineer Access
1k1 to 4k Zone Secure
Global Options/System Configuration Option 10 see page 64 set to
4k1 to 5k6 Zone Fault
Engineer only EN50131 and User + Engineer for PD6662.
5k7 to 8k Zone Active
8k1 to 20k (30k) Zone Mask
21k+ (30k+) Zone Tamper
Microprocessor Identification
Digicom Outputs Premier Elite 24/48/88/168 24LC256I/P
Outputs 1 to 8 100mA switched to 0V
Premier Elite 640 25LC1024I/P
Panel Outputs
PG1 (24 only) 100mA -ve
Outputs 1 & 2 (48/88/168) 500mA switched to 0V
Outputs 3 & 4 (88/168) 500mA switched to 12V
Output 5 (88/168) 3 Amp Relay
INS176-9 127

Specifications Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
any combination of the two
Remote Keypads Zones
8XP 8 DP or EOL zones
Electrical 60IXD 60 iD zones (2 loops)
Operating Voltage 10 - 13.7VDC EOL Resistor Values (Alternatives Available)
ACE Type B EOL Resistor 2k2 (3k3)
Current Consumption without Prox Contact Resistor 4k7 (3k3)
Quiescent (Not Backlit) 25mA Fault Resistor 2k2
Alarm (Not Backlit) 45mA 0 - 1k Zone Short
Fully Backlit 100mA 1k1 to 4k Zone Secure
Alarm + Fully Backlit 145mA 4k1 to 5k6 Zone Fault
Current Consumption with Prox 5k7 to 8k Zone Active
Quiescent (Not Backlit) 85mA 8k1 to 20k (30k) Zone Mask
Alarm (Not Backlit) 105mA 21k+ (30k+) Zone Tamper
Fully Backlit 185mA Outputs
Alarm + Fully Backlit 205mA Outputs 1 & 2 (4XP) 100mA switched to 0V
Data Network 4-wire standard 7/0.2 alarm cable Outputs 1 - 8 (8XP) 100mA switched to 0V
up to 500m Star, Daisy Chain or
any combination of the two Speaker Output (4XP & 8XP) Minimum load 8Ω
Keypad Type
LCD 32 Character LCD Environmental
LCDL 32 Character large LCD Operating Temperature -10°C (+14°F) to
LCDP LCD + Prox Reader +55°C (+131°F)
LCDLP LCDL + Prox Reader Storage Temperature -20°C (-4°F) to
Zones 2 +60°C (+140°F)
EOL Resistor Values (Alternatives Available)
EMC Environment Residential
EOL Resistor 2k2 (3k3)
Commercial
Contact Resistor 4k7 (3k3)
Light Industrial
Fault Resistor 2k2 Industrial
0 - 1k Zone Short
1k1 to 4k Zone Secure
Physical
4k1 to 5k6 Zone Fault
5k7 to 8k Zone Active Dimensions (W x H x D) 170mm x 140mm x 35mm
Packed Weight 200g Approx.
8k1 to 20k (30k) Zone Mask
21k+ (30k+) Zone Tamper
Output 100mA switched to 0V
Back Lighting Fully adjustable Output Expanders
Speaker Output (LCDL/LCDLP) Minimum load 8Ω
Electrical
Speaker Volume (LCDL/LCDLP) Fully adjustable
Operating Voltage 9 - 13.7VDC
Proximity Reader (LCDP/LCDLP) Tag
ACE Type B
Environmental Current Consumption
Operating Temperature -10°C (+14°F) to Quiescent 65mA
+55°C (+131°F) Alarm (Nothing Connected) 65mA
Storage Temperature -20°C (-4°F) to Network 4-wire standard 7/0.2 alarm cable up
+60°C (+140°F) to 250m Star, Daisy Chain or any
combination of the two
Bank 1 Outputs
Commercial
Bank 2 Outputs
Light Industrial
Industrial
Physical Environmental
Operating Temperature -10°C (+14°F) to
+55°C (+131°F)
Storage Temperature -20°C (-4°F) to
+60°C (+140°F)
Zone Expanders Maximum Humidity 95% non-condensing
Electrical Commercial
Light Industrial
Operating Voltage 9 - 13.7VDC
Industrial
ACE Type B
Current Consumption 4XP 8XP
Quiescent 65mA
Physical
Alarm (Nothing Connected) 65mA Dimensions (W x H x D) 170mm x 140mm x 35mm
Data Network 4-wire standard 7/0.2 alarm cable
up to 500m Star, Daisy Chain or
128 INS176-9

Standards
2004/108/EC (CE directive): Hereby, Texecom declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 2004/108/EC.
Weee Directive: 2002/96/EC (WEEE directive): Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal
waste in the European Union. For proper recycling, return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new
equipment, or dispose of it at designated collection points. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info.
RoHs Directive: 2002/95/EC RoHS Compliant. Hereby, Texecom declares that this device does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent
chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) or polybrominated depheny ethers (PBDE) in more than the percentage specified by EU directive
2002/95/EC, except exemptions stated in EU directive 2002/95/EC annex.
This product is suitable for use in systems designed to comply with EN 50131-1, EN50131-3 and PD6662 at Grade 3 and Environmental Class II.
Warranty
All Texecom products are designed for reliable, trouble free operation. Quality is carefully monitored by extensive computerised testing. As a result
the control panel is covered by a two-year warranty against defects in materials or workmanship.
As the control panel is not a complete alarm system but only a part thereof, Texecom cannot accept responsibility or liability for any damages
whatsoever based on a claim that the control panel failed to function correctly.
Due to our policy of continuous improvements Texecom reserve the right to change specification without prior notice.
Keypads and Expanders are protected by UK & International Registered Design. Registered Design Numbers: 2089016 and 3004996.
Premier & Premier Elite are trademarks of Texecom.
INS176-9 129

Notes Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Notes:
130 INS176-9

Premier Elite 24,24-W, 48,48-W, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual Notes
Notes
INS176-9 131

Texecom Limited, Bradwood Court, St. Crispin Way, Haslingden, Lancashire BB4 4PW,
England.
Technical Support:
UK Customers Tel: 08456 300 600
(Calls charged at local rate from a BT landline. Calls from other networks may vary.)
International Customers Tel: +44 1706 233875
Email: techsupport@texe.com
© Texecom Limited 2012
INS176-9

Premier Elite 24

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Premier Elite 24

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Premier Elite 24

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual

Premier Elite 24/24-W/48/48-W/88/168 & 640

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Expander Speaker Volume ................................................75 Change Eng. Code ........................................................... 119

5.6 System Outputs ................................................ 76 Default NVM Data ............................................................. 119

5.8 Setup Users .................................................... 107

5.9 Engineer Utilities ............................................ 112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4 Wire Data Network 1

Be ll/S trobe Outputs Plug on Digimode m

PC and Modem for

PC and PC -Com for

Premier Elite 24 Premier Elite 24-W & 48-W

• Up to 1 output module • 1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)

• 2 area arm suites • Up to 2 output modules

• 25 programmable User codes • 2 or 4 independent areas each with 3 part arms

• 1 programmable panel outputs (1 x 100mA ) • 25 or 50 programmable User codes

• Up to 4 keypads and 4 zone expanders

• Up to 2 output modules • 1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)

• 4 area arm suites • Up to 4 output modules

• 50 programmable User codes • 8 independent areas each with 3 part arms

• 500 Event Log (time & date stamped)

• 2 programmable panel outputs (2 x 1A )

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• 2.5 Amp power supply LCDLP

• 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones FMK/SMK

Premier Elite 640

• Expandable to 640 zones via keypads and zone expanders R eady

Premier Elite 24, 24-W, 48, 48-W, 88, 168 &

• 500 Event Mandatory Log Keypad

• 32 character zone text

• Fully adjustable back-lighting, normally bright, dim or off, changing to

• Built in piezo sounder

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keys • For use with an analogue telephone line (REN = 1)

= = • Sends SMS text messages to mobile phones

• Remotely wired USB-Com

• 16 fully programmable outputs (100mA each) Battery Splitter

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4: Install the Alarm Detection Devices

• Connect the AC mains

8: Programming the Control Panel

9: Testing the System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Premier Elite 24 Control Panel Layout Polymer

Mains Terminal C able

Premier Elite 24-W & 48-W Control Panel Layout

+ - T R AUX 12 V AUX 0V S trb 0V Tam p B e ll + 1 2v AUX F ault S pk+ S p k- O P 1- O P 2- Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4

Mains Terminal C able

1.5 Amp Mains S pace for

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Control Panel Layout Metal All Models (168 shown)

DANGER Rated Output Voltage: 13.7Vdc +/- 2%

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Premier Elite 24 PCB Layout

F6 Batt B ell Network Aux 12V

Strb 0V Tamp B ell+ 12V + - T R Op1 S pk - + Aux

1: Texecom PSU Connection

9: SPK- Loudspeaker Connection